2010 Nissan Sentra Owner's Manual
User Manual: 2010-sentra
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 360 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]
®
2010 SENTRA
OWNER’S MANUAL
For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.
2010 NISSAN SENTRA B16-D
Printing : February 2010
Publication No.: OM0E 0B16U2
Printed in U.S.A. B16-D
Information Provided by:
Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN
owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with
confidence. It was produced using the latest
techniques and strict quality control.
This manual was prepared to help you under-
stand the operation and maintenance of your
vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome-
ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through this
manual before operating your vehicle.
A separate Warranty Information Booklet
explains details about the warranties cov-
ering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Service
and Maintenance Guide” explains details
about maintaining and servicing your ve-
hicle. Additionally, a separate Customer
Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will
explain how to resolve any concerns you
may have with your vehicle, as well as
clarify your rights under your state’s lemon
law.
Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle
best. When you require any service or have any
questions, they will be glad to assist you with the
extensive resources available to them.
Before driving your vehicle, please read this
Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure famil-
iarity with controls and maintenance require-
ments, assisting you in the safe operation of your
vehicle.
WARNING
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE-
MINDERS FOR SAFETY!
Follow these important driving rules to
help ensure a safe and comfortable trip
for you and your passengers!
●NEVER drive under the influence of al-
cohol or drugs.
●ALWAYS observe posted speed limits
and never drive too fast for conditions.
●
ALWAYS give your full attention to driving
and avoid using vehicle features or taking
other actions that could distract you.
●
ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-
priate child restraint systems. Preteen
children should be seated in the rear seat.
●ALWAYS provide information about the
proper use of vehicle safety features to
all occupants of the vehicle.
●ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual
for important safety information.
MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification could affect its
performance, safety or durability, and
may even violate governmental
regulations. In addition, damage or per-
formance problems resulting from modi-
fications may not be covered under
NISSAN warranties.
FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY
Information Provided by:
This manual includes information for all options
available on this model. Therefore, you may find
some information that does not apply to your
vehicle.
All information, specifications and illustrations in
this manual are those in effect at the time of
printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change
specifications or design without notice and with-
out obligation.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
THIS MANUAL
You will see various symbols in this manual. They
are used in the following ways:
WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of a
hazard that could cause death or serious
personal injury. To avoid or reduce the
risk, the procedures must be followed
precisely.
CAUTION
This is used to indicate the presence of a
hazard that could cause minor or moder-
ate personal injury or damage to your ve-
hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-
cedures must be followed carefully.
If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”
or “Do not let this happen.”
If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra-
tion, it means the arrow points to the front of the
vehicle.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these
indicate movement or action.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these
call attention to an item in the illustration.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
WARNING
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
and certain vehicle components contain
or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth de-
fects or other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE
ADVISORY
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batter-
ies, may contain perchlorate material. The
following advisory is provided: “Perchlorate
Material – special handling may apply, See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”
APD1005
WHEN READING THE MANUAL
Information Provided by:
BLUETOOTH威is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,
U.S.A. and licensed
to Visteon.
XM Radio威requires
subscription, sold
separately after first
90 days. Not available
in Alaska, Hawaii or
Guam. For more
information, visit
www.xmradio.com.
© Nissan Mexicana, S. A. de C. V.
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s
Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval
system, or transmitted in any form, or by any
means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,
recording or otherwise, without the prior written
permission of Nissan Mexicana, S. A. de C. V.
Information Provided by:
NISSAN CARES...
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are
our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.
However, if there is something that your NISSAN
dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to
provide NISSAN directly with comments or
questions, please contact the NISSAN Con-
sumer Affairs Department using our toll-free
number:
For U.S. customers
1-800-NISSAN-1
(1-800-647-7261)
For Canadian customers
1-800-387-0122
The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the
following information:
– Your name, address, and telephone number
– Vehicle identification number (attached to the
top of the instrument panel on the driver’s
side)
– Date of purchase
– Current odometer reading
– Your NISSAN dealer’s name
– Your comments or questions
OR
You can write to NISSAN with the information at:
For U.S. customers
Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
For Canadian customers
Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5
We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.
NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
Information Provided by:
Table of
Contents
Illustrated table of contents
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Instruments and controls
Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Starting and driving
In case of emergency
Appearance and care
Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Technical and consumer information
Index
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Information Provided by:
Information Provided by:
0 Illustrated table of contents
Air bags, seat belts and child restraints ..............0-2
Exterior front ......................................0-3
Exterior rear.......................................0-4
Passenger compartment ...........................0-5
Instrument panel...................................0-6
Engine compartment check locations . . . .............0-8
Warning/indicator lights ...........................0-10
Information Provided by:
1. Top tether anchor (P. 1-28)
2. Rear headrest (P. 1-5)
3. Rear seat belts (P. 1-13)
4. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bag (P. 1-43)
5. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag (P. 1-43)
6. Front-seat Active Head Restraint
(P. 1-10)
7. Front seat belts (P. 1-13)
8. Supplemental front-impact air bags
(P. 1-43)
9. Seats (P. 1-2)
10. Occupant classification sensor
(pressure sensor) (P.1-43)
11. Seat belt with pretensioner (P. 1-57)
12. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) (P. 1-26)
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
LII0088
AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD
RESTRAINTS
0-2 Illustrated table of contents
Information Provided by:
1. Engine hood (P. 3-23)
2. Windshield wiper and washer switch
(P. 2-20)
3. Windshield (P. 8-20)
4. Moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-37)
5. Power windows (if so equipped)
(P. 2-34)
6. Door locks, keyfob (if so equipped),
NISSAN Intelligent Key ™ (if so
equipped), keys (P. 3-4, 3-7, 3-11, 3-2)
7. Mirrors (P. 3-28)
8. Tire pressure (P. 8-31)
9. Flat tire (P. 6-2)
10. Tire chains (P. 8-38)
11. Headlight and turn signal switch
(P. 2-22)
12. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28)
13. Fog light switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-22)
14. Tie down hook (if so equipped)
(P. 6-14)
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
LII0089
EXTERIOR FRONT
Illustrated table of contents 0-3
Information Provided by:
1. Trunk lid (P.3-23 )
2. Vehicle loading (P. 9-12)
3. Interior trunk lid release (P. 3-24)
4. Rear window defroster switch (P. 2-21)
5. Child safety locks (P. 3-7)
6. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-25)
7. Fuel-filler cap, fuel recommendation
(P. 3-25, P. 9-3)
8. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28)
9. Rear tie down hook (if so equipped)
(P. 6-14)
10. Exterior trunk lid release/request button
(P. 3-17, 3-24)
11. Rear view camera (P. 4-8)
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
LII0176
EXTERIOR REAR
0-4 Illustrated table of contents
Information Provided by:
1. Rear seat (P. 1-3)
2. Moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-37)
3. Interior lights, illuminated entry,
moonroof switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-39, P. 2-22, P. 2-37)
4. Sun visors (P. 3-27)
5. Rearview mirror (P. 3-28)
6. Glove box (P. 2-31)
7. Cup holders (P. 2-30)
8. Parking brake, parking on hills
(P. 5-19, P. 5-23)
9. Front seat (P. 1-2)
10. Front console (P. 2-31)
11. Rear armrest, cup holders
(if so equipped) (P. 1-7, P 2-30)
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
LII0091
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Illustrated table of contents 0-5
Information Provided by:
1. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)
/turn signal switch (P. 2-22); Manual
shift paddles (if so equipped) (P.5-15)
2. Steering wheel switch for audio control
and Bluetooth姞Hands-Free Phone
System (if so equipped) (P. 4-60, 4-62)
3. Driver’s supplemental air bag/Horn
(P. 1-43, 2-25)
4. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)
5. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-23)
6. Cruise control main/set switches
(if so equipped) (P. 5-20)
7. Windshield wiper/washer switch
(P. 2-20)
8. Storage bin (if so equipped) (P. 2-27)
9. Audio system (P. 4-31, 4-34, 4-38)
10. Center ventilator (P. 4-14)
11. Passenger’s supplemental air bag
(P. 1-43)
12. Side ventilator (P. 4-14)
13. Storage bin (if so equipped) (P. 2-28)
14. Engine oil pressure gauge
(if so equipped) (P. 2-7)
15. g (gravity)-force gauge (if so equipped)
(P. 2-6)
16. Hazard warning flasher switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-24)
17. Hazard warning flasher switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-24); Manual shift
mode switch (if so equipped) (P.5-15)
18. Navigation system* (if so equipped)
(P. 4-44)
19. Glove box (P. 2-31)
20. Front passenger air bag status light
(P. 1-43)
21. Climate control (P. 4-14)
22. Shift selector (P. 5-12)
23. Power outlet (P. 2-26)
24. Ignition switch (P. 5-7)
WIC1600
INSTRUMENT PANEL
0-6 Illustrated table of contents
Information Provided by:
25. Tilt steering (P.3-27)
26. Storage bin (P. 2-28)
27. Hood release lever (P. 3-23)
28 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off
switch (if so equipped) (P.2-16)
* Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual (if so equipped).
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
Illustrated table of contents 0-7
Information Provided by:
MR20DE engine
1. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-8)
2. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-9)
3. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid
reservoir (M/T model) (P. 8-13)
4. Battery (P. 8-15)
5. Air cleaner (P. 8-18)
6. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-22)
7. Radiator cap (P. 8-8)
8. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-9)
9. Drive belt location (P.8-16)
10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-14)
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
LDI0709
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
0-8 Illustrated table of contents
Information Provided by:
QR25DE engine
1. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-8)
2. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-9)
3. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid
reservoir (M/T model) (P. 8-13)
4. Battery (P. 8-15)
5. Air cleaner (P. 8-18)
6. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-22)
7. Radiator cap (P. 8-8)
8. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-9)
9. Drive belt location (P.8-16)
10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-14)
*Engine cover removed for clarity.
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
WDI0637
Illustrated table of contents 0-9
Information Provided by:
Warning
light
Name Page
or
Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS) warn-
ing light (if so
equipped)
2-10
or
Brake warning light 2-10
Charge warning light 2-11
Door open warning
light
2-11
Electric power
steering warning
light
2-11
Engine oil pressure
warning light
2-11
Warning
light
Name Page
Low fuel warning
light
2-12
Low tire pressure
warning light (if so
equipped)
2-12
Low windshield-
washer fluid warning
light (if so equipped)
2-13
NISSAN Intelligent
Key™ warning light
(if so equipped)
3-3
P position selecting
warning light (CVT
models) (if so
equipped)
2-13
Seat belt warning
light and chime
2-13
Supplemental air
bag warning light
2-14
Indicator
light
Name Page
Continuously Vari-
able Transmission
(CVT) position indi-
cator light (CVT
models)
2-14
Cruise main switch
indicator light (if so
equipped)
2-14
Cruise set switch
indicator light (if so
equipped)
2-14
or
Front passenger air
bag status light
2-14
High beam indicator
light (blue)
2-14
Malfunction Indica-
tor Light (MIL)
2-15
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS
0-10 Illustrated table of contents
Information Provided by:
Indicator
light
Name Page
Overdrive off indica-
tor light (CVT mod-
els)
2-15
Security indicator
light
2-15
Side light and head-
light indicator light
(green)
2-16
Slip indicator light (if
so equipped)
2-16
Turn signal/hazard
indicator lights
2-16
Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) OFF
indicator light (if so
equipped)
2-16
Illustrated table of contents 0-11
Information Provided by:
MEMO
0-12 Illustrated table of contents
Information Provided by:
1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system
Seats ............................................1-2
Front manual seat adjustment ....................1-2
Rear folding seat system (if so equipped) .........1-3
Head restraints.................................1-7
Adjustable headrest (if so equipped).............1-10
Seat belts .......................................1-13
Precautions on seat belt usage..................1-13
Pregnant women ..............................1-16
Injured persons................................1-16
Three-point type seat belt with retractor..........1-16
Seat belt extenders ............................1-22
Seat belt maintenance .........................1-22
Child safety ......................................1-23
Infants........................................1-23
Small children.................................1-23
Larger children ................................1-24
Child restraints ...................................1-24
Precautions on child restraints ..................1-24
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) System .............................1-26
Rear-facing child restraint installation using
LATCH.......................................1-29
Rear-facing child restraint installation using
the seat belts .................................1-31
Forward-facing child restraint installation
using LATCH..................................1-33
Forward-facing child restraint installation
using the seat belts ............................1-35
Installing top tether strap .......................1-39
Booster seats .................................1-39
Supplemental restraint system .....................1-43
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system .......................................1-43
Supplemental air bag warning labels.............1-58
Supplemental air bag warning light ..............1-58
Information Provided by:
WARNING
●Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and receive
neck or other serious injuries. You
could also slide under the lap belt and
receive serious internal injuries.
●For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
be upright. Always sit well back in the
seat with both feet on the floor and
adjust the seat properly. See “Precau-
tions on seat belt usage” later in this
section.
●After adjustment, gently rock in the seat
to make sure it is securely locked.
●Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
tivate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in seri-
ous accidents.
●The seatback should not be reclined
any more than needed for comfort. Seat
belts are most effective when the pas-
senger sits well back and straight up in
the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the
risk of sliding under the lap belt and
being injured is increased.
CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions, be
sure not to contact any moving parts to
avoid possible injuries and/or damage.
FRONT MANUAL SEAT
ADJUSTMENT
ARS1152
SEATS
1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
Forward and backward
Pull the center of the bar up and hold it while you
slide the seat forward or backward to the desired
position. Release the bar to lock the seat in
position.
Reclining
To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean
back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever
up and lean your body forward. Release the lever
to lock the seatback in position.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage”later
in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined
to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is
stopped and the shift selector (CVT) is in P (Park)
or the manual transmission is in N (Neutral) with
the parking brake applied.
Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’s
seat)
Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to adjust
the seat height until the desired position is
achieved.
REAR FOLDING SEAT SYSTEM (if so
equipped)
WRS0719 WRS0720 WRS0721
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3
Information Provided by:
Interior trunk access (if so equipped)
The trunk can be accessed from the rear seat for
loading and unloading, as shown.
1. Stow outboard seat belts with clip before
folding rear seatbacks.
When folding the passenger’s side rear seat-
back, first disconnect and stow the center seat
belt. See “Stowing the rear center seat belt” later
in this section.
2. Pull up on the strap 䊊
Alocated on the top
outboard side of the seat to be folded.
3. Fold seatback down.
WARNING
●Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo
area or on the rear seat when it is in the
fold-down position. Use of these areas
by passengers without proper restraints
could result in serious injury in an acci-
dent or sudden stop.
●Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-
lision, unsecured cargo could cause
personal injury.
●When returning the seatbacks to the
upright position, be certain they are
completely secured in the latched posi-
tion. If they are not completely secured,
passengers may be injured in an acci-
dent or sudden stop.
●Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously in-
jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear
seatback and trunk lid securely latched
when not in use, and prevent children’s
access to car keys.
LRS0728 WRS0726
1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
Folding the rear cushions and
seatbacks (if so equipped)
1. Lift up on the front edge of the seat cushion
and fold it toward the front of the vehicle.
2. Fold down the rear headrest. Pull the head-
rest forward and rotate until it clicks into the
locked position 䊊
1.
WRS0827 LRS0730 LRS0733
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5
Information Provided by:
3. To return the headrest to the normal position,
push down 䊊
1and release then rotate up
until in position 䊊
2.
4. Fold down seatbacks. See “Interior trunk
access” earlier in this section.
WARNING
●Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo
area or on the rear seat when it is in the
fold-down position. Use of these areas
by passengers without proper restraints
could result in serious injury in an acci-
dent or sudden stop.
●Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-
lision, unsecured cargo could cause
personal injury.
●When returning the seatbacks to the
upright position, be certain they are
completely secured in the latched posi-
tion. If they are not completely secured,
passengers may be injured in an acci-
dent or sudden stop.
●Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously in-
jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear
seatback and trunk lid securely latched
when not in use, and prevent children’s
access to car keys.
LRS0734 LRS0731
1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
Center armrest (if so equipped)
Pull the armrest down until it is horizontal.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING
Head restraints supplement the other ve-
hicle safety systems. They may provide
additional protection against injury in cer-
tain rear end collisions. Adjust the head
restraints properly, as specified in this
section. Check the adjustment after
someone else uses the seat. Do not attach
anything to the head restraint stalks or
remove the head restraint. Do not use the
seat if the head restraint has been re-
moved. If the head restraint was removed,
reinstall and properly adjust the head re-
straint before an occupant uses the seat-
ing position. Failure to follow these in-
structions can reduce the effectiveness of
the head restraints. This may increase the
risk of serious injury or death in a
collision.
The illustration shows the seating positions
equipped with head restraints. All of the head
restraints are adjustable.
䉱Indicates the seating position is equipped with
a head restraint.
WIC1097 LRS0893
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7
Information Provided by:
Components
1. Head restraint
2. Adjustment notches
3. Lock knob
4. Stalks
Adjustment
Adjust the head restraint so the center is level
with the center of the seat occupant’s ears.
To raise the head restraint, pull it up.
LRS0887 WRS0134 LRS0888
1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push
the head restraint down. Removal
Use the following procedure to remove the ad-
justable head restraints.
1. Pull the head restraint up to the highest
position.
2. Push and hold the lock knob.
3. Remove the head restraint from the seat.
4. Store the head restraint properly so it is not
loose in the vehicle.
5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head re-
straint before an occupant uses the seating
position.
Install
1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holes
in the seat. Make sure the head restraint is
facing the correct direction. The stalk with
the adjustment notches 䊊
1must be installed
in the hole with the lock knob 䊊
2.
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the
head restraint down.
3. Properly adjust the head restraint before an
occupant uses the seating position.
LRS0889 LRS0890 LRS0891
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9
Information Provided by:
Front-seat Active Head Restraints
The Active Head Restraint moves forward utiliz-
ing the force that the seatback receives from the
occupant in a rear-end collision. The movement
of the head restraint helps support the occu-
pant’s head by reducing its backward movement
and helping absorb some of the forces that may
lead to whiplash-type injuries.
Active Head Restraints are effective for collisions
at low to medium speeds in which it is said that
whiplash injury occurs most.
Active Head Restraints operate only in certain
rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head
restraints return to their original position.
Adjust the Active Head Restraints properly as
described in this section.
ADJUSTABLE HEADREST (if so
equipped)
WARNING
The adjustable headrests supplement the
other vehicle safety systems. They may
provide additional protection against in-
jury in certain rear end collisions. Adjust
the headrests properly, as specified in this
section. Check the adjustment after
someone else uses the seat. Do not attach
anything to the adjustable headrest stalks
or remove the adjustable headrests. Do
not use the seat if the adjustable head-
rests have been removed. If the headrest
was removed, reinstall and properly adjust
the headrest before an occupant uses the
seating position. Failure to follow these
instructions can reduce the effectiveness
of the adjustable headrests. This may in-
crease the risk of serious injury or death in
a collision.
The illustration shows the seating positions
equipped with adjustable headrests. All of the
headrests are adjustable.
䡲Indicates the seating position is equipped with
an adjustable headrest.
+ Indicates the seating position is not equipped
with a head restraint or adjustable headrest.
SPA1025 LRS0898
1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
Components
1. Adjustable headrest
2. Adjustment notches
3. Lock knob
4. Stalks
Adjustment
Adjust the headrest so the center is level with the
center of the seat occupant’s ears.
To raise the headrest, pull it up.
LRS0887 WRS0134 LRS0888
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11
Information Provided by:
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push
the headrest down. Removal
Use the following procedure to remove the ad-
justable headrests.
1. Pull the headrest up to the highest position.
2. Push and hold the lock knob.
3. Remove the headrest from the seat.
4. Store the headrest properly so it is not loose
in the vehicle.
5. Reinstall and properly adjust the headrest
before an occupant uses the seating posi-
tion.
Install
1. Align the headrest stalks with the holes in
the seat. Make sure the headrest is facing
the correct direction. The stalk with the ad-
justment notches 䊊
1must be installed in the
hole with the lock knob 䊊
2.
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the
headrest down.
3. Properly adjust the headrest before an oc-
cupant uses the seating position.
LRS0889 LRS0890 LRS0891
1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-
justed and you are sitting upright and well back in
your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances
of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the
severity of injury may be greatly reduced.
NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your
passengers to buckle up every time you drive,
even if your seating position includes a supple-
mental air bag.
Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces
or territories specify that seat belts be worn
at all times when a vehicle is being driven.
SSS0136
SEAT BELTS
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13
Information Provided by:
WARNING
●Every person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should use a seat belt at all
times. Children should be properly re-
strained in the rear seat and, if appro-
priate, in a child restraint.
WARNING
●The seat belt should be properly ad-
justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may
reduce the effectiveness of the entire
restraint system and increase the
chance or severity of injury in an acci-
dent. Serious injury or death can occur
if the seat belt is not worn properly.
SSS0134 SSS0016
1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
WARNING
●Always route the shoulder belt over
your shoulder and across your chest.
Never put the belt behind your back,
under your arm or across your neck. The
belt should be away from your face and
neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
●Position the lap belt as low and snug as
possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE
WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could
increase the risk of internal injuries in
an accident.
●Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely
fastened to the proper buckle.
●Do not wear the seat belt inside out or
twisted. Doing so may reduce its
effectiveness.
●Do not allow more than one person to
use the same seat belt.
●Never carry more people in the vehicle
than there are seat belts.
●If the seat belt warning light glows con-
tinuously while the ignition is turned
ON with all doors closed and all seat
belts fastened, it may indicate a mal-
function in the system. Have the system
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
●No changes should be made to the seat
belt system. For example, do not modify
the seat belt, add material, or install
devices that may change the seat belt
routing or tension. Doing so may affect
the operation of the seat belt system.
Modifying or tampering with the seat
belt system may result in serious per-
sonal injury.
●Once a seat belt pretensioner has acti-
vated, it cannot be reused and must be
replaced together with the retractor.
See your NISSAN dealer.
●Removal and installation of preten-
sioner system components should be
done by a NISSAN dealer.
●All seat belt assemblies, including re-
tractors and attaching hardware,
should be inspected after any collision
by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recom-
mends that all seat belt assemblies in
use during a collision be replaced un-
less the collision was minor and the
belts show no damage and continue to
operate properly. Seat belt assemblies
not in use during a collision should also
be inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is noted.
●All child restraints and attaching hard-
ware should be inspected after any col-
lision. Always follow the restraint
manufacturer’s inspection instructions
and replacement recommendations.
The child restraints should be replaced
if they are damaged.
SSS0014
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15
Information Provided by:
PREGNANT WOMEN
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use
seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug and
always position the lap belt as low as possible
around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder
belt over your shoulder and across your chest.
Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your ab-
dominal area. Contact your doctor for specific
recommendations.
INJURED PERSONS
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use
seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific
recommendations.
THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
WITH RETRACTOR
WARNING
●Every person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should use a seat belt at all
times.
●Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and receive
neck or other serious injuries. You
could also slide under the lap belt and
receive serious internal injuries.
●For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
be upright. Always sit well back in the
seat with both feet on the floor and
adjust the seat belt properly.
Fastening the seat belts
1. Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in this
section.
Manual front seat shown
WRS0719
1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
䊊
2Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor
and insert the tongue into the buckle until
you hear and feel the latch engage.
●The retractor is designed to lock during
a sudden stop or on impact. A slow
pulling motion permits the seat belt to
move, and allows you some freedom of
movement in the seat.
●If the seat belt cannot be pulled from
its fully retracted position, firmly pull
the belt and release it. Then smoothly
pull the belt out of the retractor.
䊊
3Position the lap belt portion low and snug
on the hips as shown.
䊊
4Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the
retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the
shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder
and across your chest.
The front passenger seat and the rear seating
positions three-point seat belts have two modes
of operation:
●Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
●Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow
the driver and passengers some freedom of
movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt
when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during
certain impacts.
The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode
(child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child
restraint installation.
When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt
cannot be extended again until the seat belt
tongue is detached from the buckle and fully
retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode
after the seat belt fully retracts. See “Child re-
straints” later in this section for more information.
The ALR mode should be used only for
child restraint installation. During normal
seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode
should not be activated. If it is activated, it
may cause uncomfortable seat belt ten-
sion. It can also change the operation of
the front passenger air bag. See “Front
passenger air bag and status light” later in
this section.
WRS0137 WRS0138
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17
Information Provided by:
WARNING
When fastening the seat belts, be certain
that the seatbacks are completely se-
cured in the latched position. If they are
not completely secured, passengers may
be injured in an accident or sudden stop.
Unfastening the seat belts
䊊
1To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on
the buckle. The seat belt automatically re-
tracts.
Checking seat belt operation
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt
movement by two separate methods:
●When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the
retractor.
●When the vehicle slows down rapidly.
To increase your confidence in the seat belts,
check the operation as follows:
●Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward
quickly. The retractor should lock and re-
strict further belt movement.
If the retractor does not lock during this check or
if you have any questions about seat belt opera-
tion, see a NISSAN dealer.
LRS0767
1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
Center of the rear seat (except SE-R
model)
The rear seat center seat belt has a connector
tongue 䊊
1and a seat belt tongue 䊊
2. Both the
connector tongue and the seat belt tongue must
be securely latched for proper seat belt opera-
tion.
WARNING
●Always fasten the connector tongue
and the seat belt in the order shown.
●Always make sure both the connector
tongue and the seat belt tongue are
secured when using the seat belt or
installing a child restraint. Do not use
the seat belt or child restraint with only
the seat belt tongue attached. This
could result in serious personal injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop.
SSS0240 SSS0241
WRS0735
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19
Information Provided by:
Stowing the rear center seat belt
When folding down the rear seat, the center seat
belt can be retracted into a stowed position as
follows:
䊊
1Hold the connector tongue so that the seat
belt does not retract suddenly when the
tongue is released from the connector
buckle. Release the connector tongue by
inserting a suitable tool such as key into the
connector buckle 䊊
A.
䊊
2Retract the seat belt up to the retractor base.
䊊
3Insert the seat belt connector buckle into the
fabric sleeve to stow.
WARNING
●Do not unfasten the rear center seat
belt connector except when folding
down the rear seat.
●When attaching the rear center seat
belt connector, be certain that the seat-
backs are completely secured in the
latched position and the rear center
seat belt connector is completely
secured.
●If the rear center seat belt connector
and the seatbacks are not secured in
the correct position, serious personal
injury may result in an accident or sud-
den stop.
WRS0736
1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
Attaching the rear center seat belt
Always be sure the center seat belt connector
tongue and connector buckle are attached. Dis-
connect only when folding down the rear seat.
To connect the buckle:
䊊
1Pull out the connector buckle from the fabric
sleeve.
䊊
2Pull out the connector tongue.
䊊
3Pull the seat belt and secure the receiver
buckle until it clicks.
The center seat belt connector tongue and re-
ceiver buckle are indicated by the > and < marks.
The center seat belt connector tongue can be
attached only into the rear center seat belt con-
nector buckle.
To fasten the seat belt, see “Fastening the seat
belts” earlier in this section.
WARNING
●Do not unfasten the rear center seat
belt connector except when folding
down the rear seat.
●When attaching the rear center seat
belt connector, be certain that the seat-
backs are completely secured in the
latched position and the rear center
seat belt connector is completely
secured.
●If the rear center seat belt connector
and the seatbacks are not secured in
the correct position, serious personal
injury may result in an accident or sud-
den stop. Shoulder belt height adjustment (front
seats)
The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-
justed to the position best for you. See “Precau-
tions on seat belt usage” earlier in this section. To
adjust, pull out the adjustment button 䊊
1and
move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired
position 䊊
2, so the belt passes over the center of
the shoulder. The belt should be away from your
face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
Release the adjustment button to lock the shoul-
der belt anchor into position.
LRS0242
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21
Information Provided by:
WARNING
●After adjustment, release the adjust-
ment button and try to move the shoul-
der belt anchor up and down to make
sure it is securely fixed in position.
●The shoulder belt anchor height should
be adjusted to the position best for you.
Failure to do so may reduce the effec-
tiveness of the entire restraint system
and increase the chance or severity of
injury in an accident.
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
If, because of body size or driving position, it is
not possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder belt
and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with
the installed seat belts is available that can be
purchased. The extender adds approximately 8 in
(200 mm) of length and may be used for either
the driver or front passenger seating position.
See a NISSAN dealer for assistance with pur-
chasing an extender if an extender is required.
WARNING
●Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made
by the same company which made the
original equipment seat belts, should
be used with NISSAN seat belts.
●Adults and children who can use the
standard seat belt should not use an
extender. Such unnecessary use could
result in serious personal injury in the
event of an accident.
●Never use seat belt extenders to install
child restraints. If the child restraint is
not secured properly, the child could be
seriously injured in a collision or a sud-
den stop.
SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
●To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a
mild soap solution or any solution recom-
mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.
Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat
belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the
seat belts to retract until they are completely
dry.
●If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt
guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat
belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder
belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.
●Periodically check to see that the seat
belt and the metal components, such as
buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires
and anchors work properly. If loose parts,
deterioration, cuts or other damage on the
webbing is found, the entire seat belt as-
sembly should be replaced.
1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
Children need adults to help protect them.
They need to be properly restrained.
In addition to the general information in this
manual, child safety information is available from
many other sources, including doctors, teachers,
government traffic safety offices, and community
organizations. Every child is different, so be sure
to learn the best way to transport your child.
There are three basic types of child restraint
systems:
●Rear-facing child restraint
●Forward-facing child restraint
●Booster seat
The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.
Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less
than 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facing
child restraints. Forward-facing child restraints
are available for children who outgrow rear-
facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old.
Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle
lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer
use a forward-facing child restraint.
WARNING
Infants and children need special protec-
tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit
them properly. The shoulder belt may
come too close to the face or neck. The
lap belt may not fit over their small hip
bones. In an accident, an improperly fit-
ting seat belt could cause serious or fatal
injury. Always use appropriate child
restraints.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or terri-
tories require the use of approved child restraints
for infants and small children. See “Child Re-
straints” later in this section.
A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by
using either the LATCH (Lower Anchor and Teth-
ers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle seat
belt. See “Child Restraints” section for more in-
formation.
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens
and children be restrained in the rear seat.
Studies show that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear seat than in
the front seat.
This is especially important because your
vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-
tem (Air bag system) for the front passen-
ger. See “Supplemental restraint system”
later in this section.
INFANTS
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed
in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recom-
mends that infants be placed in child restraints
that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards. You should choose a child restraint
that fits your vehicle and always follow the manu-
facturer’s instructions for installation and use.
SMALL CHILDREN
Children that are over one year old and weigh at
least 20 lbs (9 kg) can be placed in a forward-
facing child restraint. Refer to the manufacturer’s
instructions for minimum and maximum weight
and height recommendations. NISSAN recom-
mends that small children be placed in child
restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards. You should choose a child
restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for installation
and use.
CHILD SAFETY
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23
Information Provided by:
LARGER CHILDREN
Children who are too large for child restraints
should be seated and restrained by the seat belts
which are provided. The seat belt may not fit
properly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 in (142.5
cm) tall and weighs between 40 lbs (18 kg) and
80 lbs (36 kg). A booster seat should be used to
obtain proper seat belt fit.
NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in a
commercially available booster seat if the shoul-
der belt fits close to the face or neck or if the lap
portion of the seat belt goes across the abdo-
men. The booster seat should raise the child so
that the shoulder belt is properly positioned
across the top, middle portion of the shoulder
and the lap belt is low on the hips. A booster seat
can only be used in seating positions that have a
three-point type seat belt. The booster seat
should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certi-
fying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards. Once the child has grown so
the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face
and neck, use the shoulder belt without the
booster seat.
WARNING
Never let a child stand or kneel on any
seat and do not allow a child in the cargo
area. The child could be seriously injured
or killed in a sudden stop or collision.
PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD
RESTRAINTS
ARS1098
CHILD RESTRAINTS
1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
WARNING
●Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for proper use and installa-
tion of child restraints could result in
serious injury or death of a child or
other passengers in a sudden stop or
collision:
– The child restraint must be used and
installed properly. Always follow all
of the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation and use.
– Infants and children should never be
held on anyone’s lap. Even the stron-
gest adult cannot resist the forces of
a collision.
– Do not put a seat belt around both a
child and another passenger.
– NISSAN recommends that all child
restraints be installed in the rear
seat. Studies show that children are
safer when properly restrained in the
rear seat than in the front seat. If you
must install a forward-facing child
restraint in the front seat, see
“Forward-facing child restraint in-
stallation using the seat belts” later
in this section.
– Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-
facing child restraint in the front
seat. An inflating air bag could seri-
ously injure or kill a child. A rear-
facing child restraint must only be
used in the rear seat.
– Be sure to purchase a child restraint
that will fit the child and vehicle.
Some child restraints may not fit
properly in your vehicle.
– Child restraint anchor points are de-
signed to withstand loads from child
restraints that are properly fitted.
– Never use the anchor points for adult
seat belts or harnesses.
– A child restraint with a top tether
strap should not be used in the front
passenger seat.
– Keep seatbacks as upright as pos-
sible after fitting the child restraint.
– Infants and children should always
be placed in an appropriate child re-
straint while in the vehicle.
●When the child restraint is not in use,
keep it secured with the LATCH system
or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or colli-
sion, loose objects can injure occu-
pants or damage the vehicle.
CAUTION
A child restraint in a closed vehicle can
become very hot. Check the seating sur-
face and buckles before placing a child in
the child restraint.
WRS0256
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25
Information Provided by:
This vehicle is equipped with a universal child
restraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-
tem. Some child restraints include rigid or
webbing-mounted attachments that can be con-
nected to these anchors. For details, see “LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-
tem” later in this section.
If you do not have a LATCH compatible child
restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.
Several manufacturers offer child restraints for
infants and children of various sizes. When se-
lecting any child restraint, keep the following
points in mind:
●Choose only a restraint with a label certifying
that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
●Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat
and seat belt system.
●If the child restraint is compatible with your
vehicle, place your child in the child restraint
and check the various adjustments to be
sure the child restraint is compatible with
your child. Choose a child restraint that is
designed for your child’s height and weight.
Always follow all recommended procedures.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved child
restraint at all times while the vehicle is
being operated. Canadian law requires the
top tether strap on forward-facing child
restraints be secured to the designated an-
chor point on the vehicle.
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren) SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor
points that are used with LATCH (Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren) system compatible
child restraints. This system may also be referred
to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system.
With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle
seat belt to secure the child restraint.
LATCH system lower anchor locations
LRS0724
1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
LATCH lower anchor
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-
tions for proper use and installation of
child restraints could result in serious in-
jury or death of a child or other passen-
gers in a sudden stop or collision:
– Attach LATCH system compatible
child restraints only at the locations
shown in the illustration.
– Do not secure a child restraint in the
center rear seating position using
the LATCH lower anchors. The child
restraint will not be secured properly.
– Inspect the lower anchors by insert-
ing your fingers into the lower anchor
area. Feel to make sure there are no
obstructions over the anchors such
as seat belt webbing or seat cushion
material. The child restraint will not
be secured properly if the lower an-
chors are obstructed.
LATCH lower anchor location
The LATCH lower anchors are located at the rear
of the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is
attached to the seatback to help you locate the
LATCH lower anchors.
Installing child restraint LATCH lower
anchor attachments
LATCH compatible child restraints include two
rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can
be connected to two anchors located at certain
seating positions in your vehicle. With this sys-
tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to
secure the child restraint. Check your child re-
straint for a label stating that it is compatible with
LATCH. This information may also be in the in-
structions provided by the child restraint manu-
facturer.
LATCH lower anchor location
WRS0700
LATCH webbing-mounted attachment
LRS0661
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27
Information Provided by:
The child restraint top tether strap must be used
when installing the child restraint with the LATCH
lower anchor attachments or seat belts. See “Top
tether anchor” for installation instructions.
When installing a child restraint, carefully read
and follow the instructions in this manual and
those supplied with the child restraint.
Top tether anchor
WARNING
Do not allow cargo to contact the top
tether strap when it is attached to the top
tether anchor. Properly secure the cargo
so it does not contact the top tether strap.
Cargo that is not properly secured or
cargo that contacts the top tether strap
may damage it during a collision. A child
could be seriously injured or killed in a
collision if the top tether strap is
damaged.
Top tether anchor point locations
Anchor points 䊊
1are located on the rear parcel
shelf.
LATCH rigid-mounted attachment
LRS0662 LRS0723
1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING LATCH
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
safety” and “Child restraints” sections before in-
stalling a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-
ways follow the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-
ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-
erly attached to the lower anchors.
Rear-facing web-mounted – step 2
WRS0801
Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
WRS0802
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29
Information Provided by:
3. For child restraints that are equipped with
webbing-mounted attachments, remove any
additional slack from the anchor attach-
ments. Press downward and rearward firmly
in the center of the child restraint with your
hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.
4. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the LATCH attachment path. The child re-
straint should not move more than 1 inch (25
mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward
and check to see if the LATCH attachment
holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is
not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment
as necessary, or put the restraint in another
seat and test it again. You may need to try a
different child restraint or try installing by
using the vehicle seat belt (if applicable).
Not all child restraints fit in all types of ve-
hicles.
5. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1
through 4.
Rear-facing – step 3
LRS0673
Rear-facing – step 4
LRS0674
1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT
BELTS
WARNING
●The three-point seat belt with Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be
used when installing a child restraint.
Failure to use the ALR mode will result
in the child restraint not being properly
secured. The restraint could tip over or
be loose and cause injury to a child in a
sudden stop or collision. Also, it can
change the operation of the front pas-
senger air bag. See “Front passenger
air bag and status light” later in this
section.
●When installing a child restraint system
in the rear center position, both the
center seat belt connector tongue and
buckle tongue must be secured. See
“Attaching the rear center seat belt” in
this section.
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
safety” and “Child restraints” sections before in-
stalling a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear
seats:
1. Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and
therefore must not be used in the front
seat. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
WRS0256
Rear-facing – step 1
WRS0256
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31
Information Provided by:
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-
structions for belt routing.
3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor
is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
when the seat belt is fully retracted.
4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.
Rear-facing – step 2
WRS0761
Rear-facing – step 3
LRS0669
Rear-facing – step 4
LRS0670
1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
5. Remove any additional slack from the seat
belt; press downward and rearward firmly in
the center of the child restraint to compress
the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while
pulling up on the seat belt.
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the seat belt path. The child restraint should
not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and check
to see if the belt holds the restraint in place.
If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat
belt as necessary, or put the restraint in
another seat and test it again. You may need
to try a different child restraint. Not all child
restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 1
through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint
mode) is canceled.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
LATCH
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
safety” and “Child restraints” sections before in-
stalling a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a forward-facing
child restraint using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-
ways follow the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
Rear-facing – step 5
WRS0762
Rear-facing – step 6
WRS0763
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33
Information Provided by:
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-
ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-
erly attached to the lower anchors.
If the child restraint is equipped with a top
tether strap, route the top tether strap and
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point. See “Installing top tether strap” in this
section. Do not install child restraints that
require the use of a top tether strap in seat-
ing positions that do not have a top tether
anchor.
3. The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the headrest
to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the
headrest is removed, store it in a secure
place. Be sure to reinstall the headrest
when the child restraint is removed.
See “Adjustable headrest” in this section for
headrest adjustment information.
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable headrest and it is interfering with
the proper child restraint fit, try another seat-
ing position or a different child restraint.
4. For child restraints that are equipped with
webbing-mounted attachments, remove any
additional slack from the anchor attach-
ments. Press downward and rearward firmly
in the center of the child restraint with your
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.
5. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.
Forward-facing web-mounted – step 2
WRS0799
Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
WRS0800
Forward-facing – step 4
LRS0671
1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the LATCH attachment path. The child re-
straint should not move more than 1 inch (25
mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward
and check to see if the LATCH attachment
holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is
not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment
as necessary, or put the restraint in another
seat and test it again. You may need to try a
different child restraint. Not all child re-
straints fit in all types of vehicles.
7. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1
through 6.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
THE SEAT BELTS
WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used
when installing a child restraint. Failure to
use the ALR mode will result in the child
restraint not being properly secured. The
restraint could tip over or be loose and
cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or
collision. Also, it can change the opera-
tion of the front passenger air bag. See
“Front passenger air bag and status light”
later in this section.
When installing a child restraint system in
the rear center position, both the center
seat belt connector tongue and buckle
tongue must be secured. See “Attaching
the rear center seat belt” in this section.
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
safety” and “Child restraints” sections before in-
stalling a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a forward-facing
child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the
rear seats or in the front passenger seat:
1. If you must install a child restraint in
the front seat, it should be placed in a
forward-facing direction only. Move
the seat to the rearmost position. Child
restraints for infants must be used in
the rear-facing direction and, there-
fore, must not be used in the front seat.
Forward-facing – step 6
WRS0697
Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –
step 1
WRS0699
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35
Information Provided by:
2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-
ways follow the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head re-
straint or headrest to obtain the correct child
restraint fit. If the head restraint or headrest
is removed, store it in a secure place. Be
sure to reinstall the head restraint or
headrest when the child restraint is
removed. See “Head restraints” or “Adjust-
able headrest” in this section for head re-
straint or headrest adjustment, removal and
installation information.
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint or headrest and it
is interfering with the proper child restraint
fit, try another seating position or a different
child restraint.
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-
structions for belt routing.
If the child restraint is equipped with a top
tether strap, route the top tether strap and
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point (rear seat installation only). See “In-
stalling top tether strap” in this section. Do
not install child restraints that require the use
of a top tether strap in seating positions that
do not have a top tether anchor.
4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor
is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
when the seat belt is fully retracted.
Forward-facing – step 3
WRS0680
Forward-facing – step 4
LRS0667
1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.
6. Remove any additional slack from the seat
belt; press downward and rearward firmly in
the center of the child restraint with your
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while pulling up on the seat
belt.
7. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.
8. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the seat belt path. The child restraint should
not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and check
to see if the belt holds the restraint in place.
If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat
belt as necessary, or put the restraint in
another seat and test it again. You may need
to try a different child restraint. Not all child
restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
Forward-facing – step 5
LRS0668
Forward-facing – step 6
WRS0681
Forward-facing – step 8
WRS0698
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37
Information Provided by:
9. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2
through 8.
10. If the child restraint is installed in the front
passenger seat, place the ignition switch in
the ON position. The front passenger air bag
status light or should illumi-
nate. If this light is not illuminated see, ⬙Front
passenger air bag and status light⬙in this
section. Move the child restraint to an-
other seating position. Have the system
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child re-
straint mode) is canceled.
Forward-facing – step 10 (Type A)
LRS0351
Forward-facing — step 10 (Type B)
LRS0316
1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP
First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH
lower anchors (rear outboard seat positions only)
or the seat belt, as applicable.
1. Flip up the anchor cover 䊊
1from the anchor
point which is located directly behind the
child seat.
2. If necessary, raise or remove the headrest to
position the top tether strap over the top of
the seatback. If the headrest is removed,
store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
the headrest when the child restraint is re-
moved. See “Adjustable headrest” in
this section for headrest adjustment,
removal and installation information.
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point on the rear parcel shelf.
4. Refer to the appropriate child restraint in-
stallation procedure steps in this section
before tightening the tether strap.
If you have any questions when installing a
top tether strap, consult your NISSAN
dealer for details.
BOOSTER SEATS
Precautions on booster seats
WARNING
If a booster seat and seat belt are not used
properly, the risk of a child being injured
in a sudden stop or collision greatly
increases:
– Make sure the shoulder portion of
the belt is away from the child’s face
and neck and the lap portion of the
belt does not cross the stomach.
– Make sure the shoulder belt is not
behind the child or under the child’s
arm.
– A booster seat must only be installed
in a seating position that has a
lap/shoulder belt.
LRS0723
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39
Information Provided by:
Booster seats of various sizes are offered by
several manufacturers. When selecting any
booster seat, keep the following points in mind:
●Choose only a booster seat with a label
certifying that it complies with Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
●Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat
and seat belt system.
●Make sure the child’s head will be properly
supported by the booster seat or vehicle
seat. The seatback must be at or above the
center of the child’s ears. For example, if a
low back booster seat 䊊
1is chosen, the
vehicle seatback must be at or above the
center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is
lower than the center of the child’s ears, a
high back booster seat 䊊
2should be used.
●If the booster seat is compatible with your
vehicle, place the child in the booster seat
and check the various adjustments to be
sure the booster seat is compatible with the
child. Always follow all recommended pro-
cedures.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved child
restraint at all times while the vehicle is
being operated.
The instructions in this section apply to booster
seat installation in the rear seats or the front
passenger seat.
LRS0455 LRS0453 LRS0464
1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
Booster seat installation
CAUTION
Do not use the lap/shoulder belt in the
Automatic Locking Retractor mode when
using a booster seat with the seat belts.
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
safety”, “Child restraints” and “Booster seats”
sections before installing a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the
rear seat or in the front passenger seat:
1. If you must install a booster seat in the
front seat, move the seat to the rear-
most position.
2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only
place it in a front-facing direction. Always
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-
structions.
3. The booster seat should be positioned on
the vehicle seat so that it is stable.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head re-
straint or headrest to obtain the correct
booster seat fit. If the head restraint or head-
rest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be
sure to reinstall the head restraint or
headrest when the booster seat is re-
moved. See “Head restraints” or “Adjust-
able headrest” in this section for head re-
straint or headrest adjustment, removal and
installation information.
WRS0699
Front passenger position
LRS0454
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41
Information Provided by:
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint or headrest and it
is interfering with the proper booster seat fit,
try another seating position or a different
booster seat.
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low
and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-
structions for adjusting the seat belt routing.
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt
toward the retractor to take up extra slack.
Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the top, middle portion of the child’s
shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat
manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the
seat belt routing.
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-
tions for properly fastening a seat belt
shown in “Three-point type seat belt with
retractor” earlier in this section.
7. If the booster seat is installed in the front
passenger seat, place the ignition switch in
the ON position. The front passenger air bag
status light or may or may not
illuminate, depending on the size of the child
and the type of booster seat being used. See
“Front passenger air bag and status light”
later in this section.
Type A
LRS0351
Type B
LRS0316
1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
PRECAUTIONS ON
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM
This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec-
tion contains important information concerning
the following systems:
●Driver and passenger supplemental front-
impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag
System)
●Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bag
●Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-
mental air bag
●Seat belt with pretensioner
Supplemental front-impact air bag system:
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help
cushion the impact force to the head and chest of
the driver and front passenger in certain frontal
collisions.
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bag system: This system can help
cushion the impact force to the chest and pelvic
area of the driver and front passenger in certain
side impact collisions. The side air bags are de-
signed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is
impacted.
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-
mental air bag system: This system can help
cushion the impact force to the head of occu-
pants in front and rear outboard seating positions
in certain side-impact collisions. The curtain air
bags are designed to inflate on the side where
the vehicle is impacted.
These supplemental restraint systems are de-
signed to supplement the crash protection pro-
vided by the driver and front passenger seat belts
and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts
should always be correctly worn and the occu-
pant seated a suitable distance away from the
steering wheel, instrument panel and door finish-
ers. (See “Seat belts” earlier in this section for
instructions and precautions on seat belt usage.)
The supplemental air bags operate only
when the ignition switch is in the ON or
START position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7
seconds if the system is operational.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43
Information Provided by:
WARNING
●The front air bags ordinarily will not
inflate in the event of a side impact, rear
impact, rollover, or lower severity fron-
tal collision. Always wear your seat
belts to help reduce the risk or severity
of injury in various kinds of accidents.
●The front passenger air bag will not
inflate if the passenger air bag status
light is lit or if the front passenger seat
is unoccupied. See “Front passenger air
bag and status light” later in this
section.
●The seat belts and the front air bags are
most effective when you are sitting well
back and upright in the seat. The front
air bags inflate with great force. Even
with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-
tem, if you are unrestrained, leaning
forward, sitting sideways or out of posi-
tion in any way, you are at greater risk of
injury or death in a crash. You may also
receive serious or fatal injuries from the
front air bag if you are up against it
when it inflates. Always sit back against
the seatback and as far away as practi-
cal from the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel. Always use the seat belts.
●The driver and front passenger seat belt
buckles are equipped with sensors that
detect if the seat belts are fastened. The
Advanced Air Bag System monitors the
severity of a collision and seat belt us-
age then inflates the air bags. Failure to
properly wear seat belts can increase
the risk or severity of injury in an
accident.
●The front passenger seat is equipped
with an occupant classification sensor
(pressure sensor) that turns the front
passenger air bag OFF under some
conditions. This sensor is only used in
this seat. Failure to be properly seated
and wearing the seat belt can increase
the risk or severity of injury in an acci-
dent. See “Front Passenger air bag and
status light” later in this section.
●Keep hands on the outside of the steer-
ing wheel. Placing them inside the
steering wheel rim could increase the
risk that they are injured when the front
air bag inflates.
WRS0031
1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
WARNING
●Never let children ride unrestrained or
extend their hands or face out of the
window. Do not attempt to hold them in
your lap or arms. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.
ARS1133 ARS1041
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45
Information Provided by:
ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044
1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
WARNING
●Children may be severely injured or
killed when the front air bags, side air
bags or curtain air bags inflate if they
are not properly restrained. Pre-teens
and children should be properly re-
strained in the rear seat, if possible.
●Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-facing
child restraint in the front seat. An in-
flating front air bag could seriously in-
jure or kill your child. See “Child re-
straints” earlier in this section for
details.
WARNING
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bags and roof-mounted curtain
side-impact supplemental air bags:
●The side air bags and curtain air bags
ordinarily will not inflate in the event of
a frontal impact, rear impact, rollover or
lower severity side collision. Always
wear your seat belts to help reduce the
risk or severity of injury in various kinds
of accidents.
ARS1045 WRS0256 SSS0101
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47
Information Provided by:
WARNING
●The seat belts, the side air bags and
curtain air bags are most effective when
you are sitting well back and upright in
the seat with both feet on the floor. The
side air bag and curtain air bag inflate
with great force. Do not allow anyone to
place their hand, leg or face near the
side air bag on the side of the seatback
of the front seat or near the side roof
rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the
front seats or rear outboard seats to
extend their hand out of the window or
lean against the door. Some examples
of dangerous riding positions are
shown in the previous illustrations. WARNING
●When sitting in the rear seat, do not
hold onto the seatback of the front seat.
If the side air bag inflates, you may be
seriously injured. Be especially careful
with children, who should always be
properly restrained. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.
●Do not use seat covers on the front
seatbacks. They may interfere with side
air bag inflation.
SSS0188 WRS0032
1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
SSS0159 SSS0162
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49
Information Provided by:
1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bags
2. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag modules
3. Supplemental front-impact air bag
modules
4. Crash zone sensor
5. Air Bag Control Unit (ACU)
6. Occupant classification sensor
(pressure sensor)
7. Pretensioner
8. Side satellite sensor
NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats)
This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Ad-
vanced Air Bag System for the driver and front
passenger seats. This system is designed to
meet certification requirements under U.S. regu-
lations. It is also permitted in Canada. However,
all of the information, cautions and warn-
ings in this manual still apply and must be
followed.
The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is
located in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is
mounted in the dashboard above the glove box.
The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher
severity frontal collisions, although they may in-
LRS0725
1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
flate if the forces in another type of collision are
similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact.
They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an
indication of proper front air bag system opera-
tion.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dual
stage inflators. It also monitors information from
the crash zone sensor, the Air bag Control Unit
(ACU), seat belt buckle sensors, occupant clas-
sification sensor (pressure sensor) and passen-
ger seat belt tension sensor. Inflator operation is
based on the severity of a collision and seat belt
usage for the driver. For the front passenger, it
additionally monitors the weight of an occupant
or object on the seat and seat belt tension. Based
on information from the sensors, only one front air
bag may inflate in a crash, depending on the
crash severity and whether the front occupants
are belted or unbelted. Additionally, the front
passenger air bag may be automatically turned
OFF under some conditions, depending on the
weight detected on the passenger seat and how
the seat belt is used. If the front passenger air bag
is OFF, the passenger air bag status light will be
illuminated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light will
not be illuminated, but the air bag will be off). See
“Front passenger air bag and status light” later in
this section for further details. One front air bag
inflating does not indicate improper performance
of the system.
If you have any questions about your air bag
system, please contact NISSAN or your NISSAN
dealer. If you are considering modification of your
vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact
NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the
front of this Owner’s Manual.
When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise
may be heard, followed by the release of smoke.
This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a
fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may
cause irritation and choking. Those with a history
of a breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.
Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
help to cushion the impact force on the face and
chest of the front occupants. They can help save
lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an
inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions
or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide
restraint to the lower body.
Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat belts
should be correctly worn and the driver and pas-
senger seated upright as far as practical away
from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The
front air bags inflate quickly in order to help
protect the front occupants. Because of this, the
force of the front air bag inflating can increase the
risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is
against, the front air bag module during inflation.
The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.
The front air bags operate only when the
ignition switch is in the ON or START posi-
tion.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7
seconds if the system is operational.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51
Information Provided by:
Front passenger air bag and status light
WARNING
The front passenger air bag is designed to
automatically turn OFF under some con-
ditions. Read this section carefully to
learn how it operates. Proper use of the
seat, seat belt and child restraints is nec-
essary for most effective protection. Fail-
ure to follow all instructions in this
manual concerning the use of seats, seat
belts and child restraints can increase the
risk or severity of injury in an accident.
Status light
The front passenger air bag status light
or is located near the climate controls. The
light operates as follows:
●Unoccupied passenger’s seat: The
or is OFF and the front passenger air
bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash.
●Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult,
child or child restraint as outlined in this
section: The or illuminates to
indicate that the front passenger air bag is
OFF and will not inflate in a crash.
●Occupied passenger seat and the passen-
ger meet the conditions outlined in this sec-
tion: The light or is OFF to in-
dicate that the front passenger air bag is
operational.
Front passenger air bag
The front passenger air bag is designed to auto-
matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated
under some conditions as described below in
accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front
passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a
crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your
vehicle are not part of this system.
The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce
the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag
to certain front passenger seat occupants, such
as children, by requiring the air bag to be auto-
matically turned OFF. Certain sensors are used
to meet the requirements.
One sensor used is the occupant classification
sensor (pressure sensor). It is in the bottom of the
front passenger seat cushion and is designed to
detect an occupant and objects on the seat by
weight. It works together with seat belt sensors
described later. For example, if a child is in the
front passenger seat, the Advanced Air Bag Sys-
tem is designed to turn the passenger air bag
OFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if a
child restraint of the type specified in the regula-
Type A
LRS0351
Type B
LRS0316
1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
tions is on the seat, its weight and the child’s
weight can be detected and cause the air bag to
turn OFF. Occupant classification sensor opera-
tion can vary depending on the front passenger
seat belt sensors.
The front passenger seat belt sensors are de-
signed to detect if the seat belt is buckled and the
amount of tension on the seat belt, such as when
it is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode (child restraint mode). Based on the
weight on the seat detected by the occupant
classification sensor and the belt tension de-
tected on the seat belt, the Advanced Air Bag
System determines whether the front passenger
air bag should be automatically turned OFF as
required by the regulations.
Front passenger seat adult occupants who are
properly seated and using the seat belt as out-
lined in this manual should not cause the passen-
ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For
small adults it may be turned OFF, however if the
occupant takes his/her weight off the seat cush-
ion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting
on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out
of position), this could cause the sensor to turn
the air bag OFF. In addition, if the occupant
improperly uses the seat belt in the ALR mode
(child restraint mode), this could cause the air
bag to be turned OFF. Always be sure to be
seated and wearing the seat belt properly for the
most effective protection by the seat belt and
supplemental air bag.
NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil-
dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.
NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child
restraints and booster seats be properly installed
in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant
classification sensor and seat belt sensors are
designed to operate as described above to turn
the front passenger air bag OFF for specified
child restraints as required by the regulations.
Failing to properly secure child restraints and to
use the ALR mode (child restraint mode) may
allow the restraint to tip or move in an accident or
sudden stop. This can also result in the passen-
ger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being
OFF. See “Child restraints” earlier in this section
for proper use and installation.
If the front passenger seat is not occupied the
passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a
crash. However, heavy objects placed on the
seat could result in air bag inflation, because of
the object’s weight detected by the occupant
classification sensor. Other conditions could also
result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is
standing on the seat, or if two children are on the
seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.
Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants
are seated and restrained properly.
Using the passenger air bag status light, you can
monitor when the front passenger air bag is au-
tomatically turned OFF with the seat occupied.
The light will not illuminate when the front pas-
senger seat is unoccupied.
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passen-
ger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating
that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the
person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat
properly or not using the seat belt properly.
If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,
the passenger air bag status light may or may not
be illuminated, depending on the size of the child
and the type of child restraint being used. If the air
bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that
the air bag might inflate in a crash), it could be
that the child restraint or seat belt is not being
used properly. Make sure that the child restraint is
installed properly, the seat belt is used properly
and the occupant is positioned properly. If the air
bag status light is not illuminated, reposition the
occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
If the passenger air bag status light will not illu-
minate even though you believe that the child
restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are
properly positioned, the system may be sensing
an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is
OFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that the
system is OFF by using a special tool. However,
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53
Information Provided by:
until you have confirmed with your dealer that
your air bag is working properly, reposition the
occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
The air bag system and passenger air bag status
light will take a few seconds to register a change
in the passenger seat status. For example, if a
large adult who is sitting in the front passenger
seat exits the vehicle, the passenger air bag
status light will go from OFF to ON for a few
seconds and then to OFF. This is normal system
operation and does not indicate a malfunction.
If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air
bag system, the supplemental air bag warning
light , located in the meter and gauges area
in the center of the instrument panel, will blink.
Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
Other supplemental front-impact air bag
precautions
WARNING
●Do not place any objects on the steer-
ing wheel pad or on the instrument
panel. Also, do not place any objects
between any occupant and the steering
wheel or instrument panel. Such ob-
jects may become dangerous projec-
tiles and cause injury if the front air
bags inflate.
●Immediately after inflation, several
front air bag system components will be
hot. Do not touch them; you may se-
verely burn yourself.
●No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the supplemental air bag system. This is
to prevent accidental inflation of the
supplemental air bag or damage to the
supplemental air bag system.
●Do not make unauthorized changes to
your vehicle’s electrical system, sus-
pension system or front end structure.
This could affect proper operation of
the front air bag system.
●Tampering with the front air bag system
may result in serious personal injury.
Tampering includes changes to the
steering wheel and the instrument
panel assembly by placing material
over the steering wheel pad and above
the instrument panel or by installing
additional trim material around the air
bag system.
●Modifying or tampering with the front
passenger seat may result in serious
personal injury. For example, do not
change the front seats by placing mate-
rial on the seat cushion or by installing
additional trim material, such as seat
covers, on the seat that are not specifi-
cally designed to assure proper air bag
operation. Additionally, do not stow any
objects under the front passenger seat
or the seat cushion and seatback. Such
objects may interfere with the proper
operation of the occupant classifica-
tion sensor (pressure sensor).
●No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the seat belt system. This may affect the
front air bag system. Tampering with
the seat belt system may result in seri-
ous personal injury.
1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
●Work on and around the front air bag
system should be done by a NISSAN
dealer. Installation of electrical equip-
ment should also be done by a NISSAN
dealer. The Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) wiring should not be
modified or disconnected. Unautho-
rized electrical test equipment and
probing devices should not be used on
the air bag system.
●A cracked windshield should be re-
placed immediately by a qualified re-
pair facility. A cracked windshield could
affect the function of the supplemental
air bag system.
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the supplemental front air
bag system and guide the buyer to the appropri-
ate sections in this Owner’s Manual.
Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag and roof-
mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bag systems
The side air bags are located in the outside of the
seatback of the front seats. The curtain air bags
are located in the side roof rails. These systems
are designed to meet voluntary guidelines to help
reduce the risk of injury to out-of-position occu-
pants. However, all of the information, cau-
tions and warnings in this manual still ap-
ply and must be followed. The side air bags
and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in
higher severity side collisions, although they may
inflate if the forces in another type of collision are
similar to those of a higher severity side impact.
They are designed to inflate on the side where the
vehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in cer-
tain side collisions.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an
indication of proper side air bag and curtain air
bag operation.
When the side air bags and curtain air bags
inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed
by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful
and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken
not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and
choking. Those with a history of a breathing con-
dition should get fresh air promptly.
Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
help to cushion the impact force on the chest of
the front occupants. Curtain air bags help to
cushion the impact force to the head of occu-
pants in the front and rear outboard seating po-
sitions. They can help save lives and reduce
serious injuries. However, an inflating side air bag
and curtain air bag may cause abrasions or other
injuries. Side air bags and curtain air bags do not
provide restraint to the lower body.
The seat belts should be correctly worn and the
driver and passenger seated upright as far as
practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat
passengers should be seated as far away as
LRS0259
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55
Information Provided by:
practical from the door finishers and side roof
rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate
quickly in order to help protect the front and rear
outboard occupants. Because of this, the force of
the side air bag and curtain air bag inflating can
increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too
close to, or is against, these air bag modules
during inflation. The side air bags and curtain air
bags will deflate quickly after the collision is over.
The side air bags and curtain air bags op-
erate only when the ignition switch is in the
ON or START position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7
seconds if the system is operational.
WARNING
●Do not place any objects near the seat-
back of the front seats. Also, do not
place any objects (an umbrella, bag,
etc.) between the front door finisher
and the front seat. Such objects may
become dangerous projectiles and
cause injury if a side air bag inflates.
●Right after inflation, several side air bag
and curtain air bag system components
will be hot. Do not touch them; you may
severely burn yourself.
●No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the side air bag and curtain air bag
systems. This is to prevent damage to or
accidental inflation of the side air bag
and curtain air bag or damage to the
side air bag and curtain air bag systems.
●Do not make unauthorized changes to
your vehicle’s electrical system, sus-
pension system or side panel. This
could affect proper operation of the
side air bag and curtain air bag systems.
●Tampering with the side air bag system
may result in serious personal injury.
For example, do not change the front
seats by placing material near the seat-
backs or by installing additional trim
material, such as seat covers, around
the side air bag.
●Work around and on the side air bag
and curtain air bag systems should be
done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation
of electrical equipment should also be
done by a NISSAN dealer. The SRS wir-
ing harnesses* should not be modified
or disconnected. Unauthorized electri-
cal test equipment and probing devices
should not be used on the side air bag
system.
* The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the side air bag and
curtain air bag systems and guide the buyer to
the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.
1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
Seat belts with pretensioners (front
seats)
WARNING
●The pretensioners cannot be reused af-
ter activation. They must be replaced
together with the retractor and buckle
as a unit.
●If the vehicle becomes involved in a
frontal collision but a pretensioner is
not activated, be sure to have the pre-
tensioner system checked and, if nec-
essary, replaced by your NISSAN
dealer.
●No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the pretensioner system. This is to pre-
vent damage to or accidental activation
of the pretensioners. Tampering with
the pretensioner system may result in
serious personal injury.
●Work around and on the pretensioner
system should be done by a NISSAN
dealer. Installation of electrical equip-
ment should also be done by a NISSAN
dealer. Unauthorized electrical test
equipment and probing devices should
not be used on the pretensioner system.
●If you need to dispose of a pretensioner
or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN
dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures
could cause personal injury.
The pretensioner system activates in conjunction
with the front air bag system. Working with the
seat belt retractor, it helps tighten the seat belt
when the vehicle becomes involved in certain
types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat
occupants.
The pretensioner is encased within the seat belt
retractor. These seat belts are used the same way
as conventional seat belts.
When a pretensioner activates, smoke is re-
leased and a loud noise may be heard. This
smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.
Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may
cause irritation and choking. Those with a history
of a breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.
After pretensioner activation, load limiters allow
the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to
reduce forces against the chest.
If any abnormality occurs in the pretensioner sys-
tem, the supplemental air bag warning
light will not come on, will flash intermit-
tently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on
after the ignition switch has been placed in the
ON or START position. In this case, the preten-
sioner system may not function properly. It must
be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the
nearest NISSAN dealer.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the pretensioner system
and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
in this Owner’s Manual.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57
Information Provided by:
1. SRS Front Air Bag Warning Labels
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
WARNING LABELS
Warning labels about the supplemental front-
impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as
shown in the illustration.
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
WARNING LIGHT
The supplemental air bag warning light,
displaying in the instrument panel, moni-
tors the circuits of the supplemental front-impact
air bag, front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bag, roof-mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bag and seat belt pretensioner
systems. The monitored circuits include the Air
bag Control Unit (ACU), crash zone sensor, sat-
ellite sensors, occupant classification system,
front air bag modules, side air bag modules,
curtain air bag modules, pretensioners and all
related wiring.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or
START position, the supplemental air bag warn-
ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then
turns off. This means the system is operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and preten-
sioner systems need servicing:
●The supplemental air bag warning light re-
mains on after approximately 7 seconds.
●The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
●The supplemental air bag warning light does
not come on at all.
Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air
bag, curtain air bag or pretensioner systems may
not operate properly. They must be checked and
repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest
NISSAN dealer.
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light
is on, it could mean that the front air bag,
side air bag, curtain air bag and/or preten-
sioner systems will not operate in an ac-
cident. To help avoid injury to yourself or
others, have your vehicle checked by a
NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.
WRS0897 LRS0100
1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Information Provided by:
Repair and replacement procedure
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags
and pretensioners are designed to inflate on a
one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is
damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light
remains illuminated after inflation has occurred.
Repair and replacement of these supplemental
air bag systems should be done only by a
NISSAN dealer.
When maintenance work is required on the ve-
hicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain air
bags, pretensioners and related parts should be
pointed out to the person performing the mainte-
nance. The ignition switch should always be
placed in the LOCK position when working under
the hood or inside the vehicle.
WARNING
●Once a front air bag, side air bag, or
curtain air bag has inflated, the air bag
module will not function again and
must be replaced. Additionally, if any of
the front air bags inflate, the activated
pretensioner must also be replaced.
The air bag module and pretensioner
should be replaced by a NISSAN dealer.
The air bag module and pretensioner
cannot be repaired.
●The front air bag, side air bag, curtain
air bag systems and the pretensioner
system should be inspected by a
NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to
the front end or side portion of the
vehicle.
●If you need to dispose of the supple-
mental air bag or pretensioner systems
or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN
dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures
could cause personal injury.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59
Information Provided by:
2 Instruments and controls
Instrument panel...................................2-2
Meters and gauges ................................2-3
Speedometer and odometer .....................2-4
Trip computer (if so equipped) ...................2-4
Tachometer ....................................2-5
g (gravity)-force gauge (if so equipped) ...........2-6
Fuel gauge ....................................2-6
Engine coolant temperature gauge ...............2-7
Engine oil pressure gauge (if so equipped) ........2-7
Outside temperature display (if so equipped) ......2-8
Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders .......2-9
Checking bulbs ...............................2-10
Warning lights ................................2-10
Indicator lights ................................2-14
Audible reminders .............................2-16
Security systems .................................2-17
Vehicle security system (if so equipped)..........2-17
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system .............2-19
Windshield wiper and washer switch ...............2-20
Switch operation ..............................2-20
Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)
defroster switch ..................................2-21
Headlight and turn signal switch....................2-22
Headlight control switch........................2-22
Daytime running light system (Canada only) ......2-23
Instrument brightness control ...................2-23
Turn signal switch .............................2-24
Fog light switch (if so equipped) ................2-24
Hazard warning flasher switch .....................2-24
Horn ............................................2-25
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch
(if so equipped) ..................................2-25
Heated seat (if so equipped).......................2-26
Power outlet .....................................2-26
Storage .........................................2-27
Map pockets..................................2-27
Storage bin ...................................2-28
Storage trays .................................2-28
Instrument panel storage (if so equipped) ........2-28
Seatback pockets (if so equipped) ..............2-29
Cup holders ..................................2-30
Glove box ....................................2-31
Console box ..................................2-31
Trunk divider (if so equipped) ...................2-31
Cargo net (if so equipped)......................2-32
Grocery hooks (if so equipped) .................2-33
Information Provided by:
Windows ........................................2-34
Power windows (if so equipped) ................2-34
Manual windows (if so equipped)................2-37
Moonroof (if so equipped) .........................2-37
Electric moonroof..............................2-37
Interior light ......................................2-39
Map lights (if so equipped) ........................2-40
Trunk light .......................................2-41
Information Provided by:
1. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)
/turn signal switch (P. 2-22); Manual
shift paddles (if so equipped) (P.5-15)
2. Steering wheel switch for audio control
and Bluetooth姞Hands-Free Phone
System (if so equipped) (P. 4-60, 4-62)
3. Driver’s supplemental air bag/Horn
(P. 1-43, 2-25)
4. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)
5. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-23)
6. Cruise control main/set switches
(if so equipped) (P. 5-20)
7. Windshield wiper/washer switch
(P. 2-20)
8. Storage bin (if so equipped) (P. 2-27)
9. Audio system (P. 4-31, 4-34, 4-38)
10. Center ventilator (P. 4-14)
11. Passenger’s supplemental air bag
(P. 1-43)
12. Side ventilator (P. 4-14)
13. Storage bin (if so equipped) (P. 2-28)
14. Engine oil pressure gauge
(if so equipped) (P. 2-7)
15. g (gravity)-force gauge (if so equipped)
(P. 2-6)
16. Hazard warning flasher switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-24)
17. Hazard warning flasher switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-24); Manual shift
mode switch (if so equipped) (P.5-15)
18. Navigation system* (if so equipped)
(P. 4-44)
19. Glove box (P. 2-31)
20. Front passenger air bag status light
(P. 1-43)
21. Climate control (P. 4-14)
22. Shift selector (P. 5-12)
23. Power outlet (P. 2-26)
24. Ignition switch (P. 5-7)
WIC1600
INSTRUMENT PANEL
2-2 Instruments and controls
Information Provided by:
25. Tilt steering (P.3-27)
26. Storage bin (P. 2-28)
27. Hood release lever (P. 3-23)
28 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off
switch (if so equipped) (P.2-16)
* Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual (if so equipped).
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
1. Tachometer
2. Fuel gauge/odometer/transmission
position indicator/engine coolant tem-
perature gauge/Instrument brightness
level/trip computer (if so equipped)
3. Speedometer
4. Instrument brightness control/change
button for twin trip odometer/change
button for trip computer
(if so equipped)
LIC1014
METERS AND GAUGES
Instruments and controls 2-3
Information Provided by:
SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the vehicle speed.
Odometer/Twin trip odometer
The odometer/twin trip odometer is displayed
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
The odometer records the total distance the ve-
hicle has been driven.
The twin trip odometer records the distance of
individual trips.
To switch between the odometer and the twin trip
odometers press the instrument brightness
control/change button.
Changing the display
Push the instrument brightness control/change
button to change the display as follows:
With twin trip odometer:
Odometer →Trip A →Trip B →Odometer
With trip computer:
Odometer →Trip A →Trip B →DTE →Instant
Fuel Economy →Average Fuel Economy →Av-
erage Speed →Journey time →Odometer
Resetting the trip odometer
Push the instrument brightness control/change
button for more than 1 second to reset the cur-
rently displayed trip odometer to zero.
TRIP COMPUTER (if so equipped)
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, modes of the trip computer can be
selected by pushing the trip computer change
button on the instrument panel located near the
speedometer. The following modes can be se-
lected in the display:
●Distance to empty
●Instant fuel economy
●Average fuel consumption
●Average speed
●Journey time
LIC1015 WIC1508
2-4 Instruments and controls
Information Provided by:
Distance to empty (dte—mile or km)
The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you
with an estimation of the distance that can be
driven before refueling. The dte is constantly be-
ing calculated, based on the amount of fuel in the
fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption.
The display is updated every 30 seconds.
NOTE:
When driving uphill or rounding curves, the
fuel in the tank shifts, which may momen-
tarily change the display.
Instant fuel economy
The instant fuel economy mode shows the instant
fuel consumption. The display updates instantly
when driving.
Average fuel consumption (Mpg or
l/100km)
The average fuel consumption mode shows the
average fuel consumption since the last reset.
Resetting is done by pressing the change button
for more than approximately 1 second. The dis-
play is updated every 30 seconds. At about the
first 1/3 miles (500 m) after a reset, the display
shows (----).
Average speed (mph or km/h)
The average speed mode shows the average
vehicle speed since last reset. Resetting is done
by pressing the trip or change button for more
than approximately 1 second. The display is up-
dated every 30 seconds. The first 30 seconds
after a reset, the display shows (----).
Journey time
The journey time mode shows the time since the
last reset. The displayed time can be reset by
pressing the change button for more than ap-
proximately 1 second.
Trip computer reset
Pushing the change button for more than 3 sec-
onds will reset all modes except Trip A and dis-
tance to empty (dte).
TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo-
lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev the engine
into the red zone 䊊
1.
CAUTION
When engine speed approaches the red
zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce en-
gine speed. Operating the engine in the
red zone may cause serious engine
damage.
LIC1021
Instruments and controls 2-5
Information Provided by:
g (gravity)-FORCE GAUGE (if so
equipped)
This gauge shows the straight-line acceleration
and deceleration g-forces while you are driving.
NOTE:
The g-force gauge does not indicate cor-
nering g-forces.
FUEL GAUGE
NOTE:
The ignition switch must be placed in the
ON position for the gauge to give a reading.
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level
in the tank.
The gauge may move slightly during braking,
turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.
The low fuel warning light comes on when the
amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-
ters E (Empty).
The indicates that the fuel-filler door is
located on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
CAUTION
●If the vehicle runs out of fuel,
the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as
possible. After a few driving trips,
the light should turn off. If the
light remains on after a few driving
trips, have the vehicle inspected by a
NISSAN dealer.
●For additional information, see “Mal-
function Indicator Light (MIL)” later in
this section.
LIC1113 LIC1529
2-6 Instruments and controls
Information Provided by:
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
NOTE:
The ignition switch must be placed in the
ON position for the gauge to give a reading.
The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera-
ture. The engine coolant temperature is within the
normal range when the reading is within the zone
䊊
Ashown in the illustration.
The engine coolant temperature varies with the
outside air temperature and driving conditions.
CAUTION
If the gauge indicates a coolant tempera-
ture near the hot (H) end of the normal
range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease
the temperature. If the gauge is over the
normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as
safely possible. If the engine is over-
heated, continued operation of the ve-
hicle may seriously damage the engine.
See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In
case of emergency” section for immediate
action required
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE (if
so equipped)
The gauge indicates the engine lubrication sys-
tem oil pressure while the engine is running.
When the engine speed is high, the engine oil
pressure is also high. When the engine speed is
low, the gauge indicates lower oil pressure.
Engine oil pressure also changes based on en-
gine temperature. The oil pressure will be higher
when the engine is cold and lower when the
engine is warm.
LIC1530 LIC1114
Instruments and controls 2-7
Information Provided by:
CAUTION
●This gauge is not designed to indicate
low engine oil level. Use the dipstick to
check the oil level. (See “Engine oil” in
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section.)
●If the gauge needle does not move with
the proper amount of engine oil, have
the vehicle checked by a NISSAN
dealer. Continued vehicle operation in
such a condition could cause serious
damage to the engine.
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
(if so equipped)
The outside temperature function provides a dis-
play of the outside temperature when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position.
The display of positive temperatures is unsigned
(blank), negative temperatures are prefixed with a
minus sign.
2-8 Instruments and controls
Information Provided by:
or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
warning light (if so equipped)
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ warning light (if so
equipped)
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
or Brake warning light P position selecting warning light (CVT mod-
els) (if so equipped)
Overdrive off indicator light (CVT models)
Charge warning light Seat belt warning light and chime Security indicator light
Door open warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Side light and headlight indicator light (green)
Electric power steering warning light Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) po-
sition indicator light (CVT models)
Slip indicator light (if so equipped)
Engine oil pressure warning light Cruise main switch indicator light (if so
equipped)
Turn signal/hazard indicator lights
Low fuel warning light Cruise set switch indicator light (if so equipped) Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator
light (if so equipped)
Low tire pressure warning light (if so equipped) or Front passenger air bag status
light
Low windshield-washer fluid warning light (if so
equipped)
High beam indicator light (blue)
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Instruments and controls 2-9
Information Provided by:
CHECKING BULBS
With all doors closed, apply the parking brake
and place the ignition switch in the ON position
without starting the engine. The following lights
will come on:
or , , , , ,
If equipped, the following lights come on briefly
and then go off:
or , , ,
If any light fails to come on, it may indicate
an open circuit in the electrical system.
Have the system repaired promptly.
WARNING LIGHTS
or Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS)
warning light (if so
equipped)
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
warning light illuminates and then turns off. This
indicates the ABS is operational.
If the ABS warning light illuminates while the
engine is running, or while driving, it may indicate
the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the
system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock func-
tion is turned off. The brake system then operates
normally, but without anti-lock assistance. See
⬙Brake system⬙in the ⬙Starting and driving⬙sec-
tion.
or Brake warning light
This light functions for both the parking brake and
the foot brake systems.
Parking brake indicator
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light comes on when the parking
brake is applied.
Low brake fluid warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level.
If the light comes on while the engine is running
with the parking brake not applied, stop the ve-
hicle and perform the following:
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid
as necessary. See “Brake fluid” in the “Main-
tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the
warning system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
WARNING
●Your brake system may not be working
properly if the warning light is on. Driv-
ing could be dangerous. If you judge it
to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest
service station for repairs. Otherwise,
have your vehicle towed because driv-
ing it could be dangerous.
●Pressing the brake pedal with the en-
gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid
level may increase your stopping dis-
tance and braking will require greater
pedal effort as well as pedal travel.
●If the brake fluid level is below the
MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake
fluid reservoir, do not drive until the
brake system has been checked at a
NISSAN dealer.
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
indicator
When the parking brake is released and the
brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake
warning light and the Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS) waning light illuminate, it may indicate the
2-10 Instruments and controls
Information Provided by:
ABS is not functioning properly. Have the brake
system checked, and if necessary, repaired by a
NISSAN dealer promptly. Avoid high-speed driv-
ing and abrupt braking. (See “Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS) warning light” in this section.)
Charge warning light
If this light comes on while the engine is running,
it may indicate the charging system is not func-
tioning properly. Turn the engine off and check
the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken,
missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSAN
dealer immediately.
CAUTION
Do not continue driving if the generator
belt is loose, broken or missing.
Door open warning light
This light comes on when any of the doors are not
closed securely while the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.
Electric power steering
warning light
WARNING
●If the engine is not running or is turned
off while driving, the power assist for
the steering will not work. Steering will
be harder to operate.
●When the power steering warning light
illuminates with the engine running,
there will be no power assist for the
steering. You will still have control of
the vehicle but the steering will be
harder to operate. Have the power
steering system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the power steering warning light illumi-
nates. After starting the engine, the power steer-
ing warning light turns off. This indicates the
power steering system is operational.
If the power steering warning light illuminates
while the engine is running, it may indicate the
power steering system is not functioning properly
and may need servicing. Have the power steering
system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
When the power steering warning light illumi-
nates with the engine running, there will be no
power assist for the steering but you will still have
control of the vehicle. At this time, greater steer-
ing effort is required to operate the steering
wheel, especially in sharp turns and at low
speeds.
See “Power steering” in the “Starting and driving”
section.
Engine oil pressure warning
light
This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the
light flickers or comes on during normal driving,
pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine
immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other
authorized repair shop.
The engine oil pressure warning light is not
designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the
dipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine oil” in
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.
CAUTION
Running the engine with the engine oil
pressure warning light on could cause se-
rious damage to the engine almost imme-
diately. Such damage is not covered by
warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it
is safe to do so.
Instruments and controls 2-11
Information Provided by:
Low fuel warning light
This light comes on when the fuel level in the fuel
tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is conve-
nient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E
(Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel
in the tank when the fuel gauge reaches E
(Empty), showing no more fuel bars.
Low tire pressure warning light
(if so equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire
pressure of all tires except the spare.
The low tire pressure warning light warns of low
tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not
functioning properly.
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this light illuminates for about 1 second
and turns off.
Low tire pressure warning:
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire
pressure, the warning light will illuminate.
When the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates, you should stop and adjust the
tire pressure of all 4 tires to the recom-
mended COLD tire pressure shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label located
in the driver’s door opening. The low tire
pressure warning light does not automati-
cally turn off when the tire pressure is ad-
justed. After the tire is inflated to the rec-
ommended pressure, the vehicle must be
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)
to activate the TPMS and turn off the low
tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pres-
sure gauge to check the tire pressure.
For additional information, see “Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and
driving” section and in the “In case of emergency”
section.
TPMS malfunction:
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low
tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-
mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position. The light will remain on
after the 1 minute. Have the system checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
For additional information, see “Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and
driving” section and “Tire pressure” in the “Main-
tenance and do-it-yourself” section.
WARNING
●If the light does not illuminate with the
ignition switch placed in the ON posi-
tion, have the vehicle checked by a
NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.
●If the light illuminates while driving,
avoid sudden steering maneuvers or
abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,
pull off the road to a safe location and
stop the vehicle as soon as possible.
Driving with under-inflated tires may
permanently damage the tires and in-
crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se-
rious vehicle damage could occur and
may lead to an accident and could re-
sult in serious personal injury. Check
the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust
the tire pressure to the recommended
COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label located
in the driver’s door opening to turn the
low tire pressure warning light OFF. If
the light still comes on while driving
after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire
may be flat. If you have a flat tire, re-
place it with a spare tire as soon as
possible.
2-12 Instruments and controls
Information Provided by:
●When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced the TPMS will not function
and the low tire pressure warning light
will flash for approximately 1 minute.
The light will remain on after 1 minute.
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting.
●Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
CAUTION
●The TPMS is not a substitute for the
regular tire pressure check. Be sure to
check the tire pressure regularly.
●If the vehicle is being driven at speeds
of less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), the
TPMS may not operate correctly.
●Be sure to install the specified size of
tires to the 4 wheels correctly.
Low windshield-washer fluid
warning light (if so equipped)
This light comes on when the windshield-washer
fluid is at a low level. Add windshield-washer fluid
as necessary. See “Windshield-washer fluid” in
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.
NISSAN Intelligent Key™
warning light (if so equipped)
The Intelligent Key warning light illuminates green
when the ignition switch can be turned. The
Intelligent Key warning light illuminates red when
the ignition switch cannot be turned.
The Intelligent Key warning light blinks red if the
Intelligent Key is taken outside of the vehicle
while the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or
ON position.
●If the Intelligent Key warning light blinks,
make sure of the location of the Intelligent
Key as soon as possible. The Intelligent Key
should be carried by the driver while operat-
ing the vehicle.
●The Intelligent Key warning light turns off
about 10 seconds after the Intelligent Key is
brought inside the vehicle.
The Intelligent Key warning light blinks green
indicating that the Intelligent Key battery is almost
discharged.
See “NISSAN Intelligent Key™ (if so equipped)”
in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec-
tion.
P position selecting warning
light (CVT models) (if so
equipped)
The light blinks red and the warning buzzer
sounds if you are outside of the vehicle with the
Intelligent Key and the engine is off, but the shift
selector is not in the P (Park) position.
When the warning light blinks, place the ignition
switch in the ON position, move the shift selector
to the P position, then place the ignition switch in
the LOCK position.
Seat belt warning light and
chime
The light and chime remind you to fasten your
seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the
ignition switch is placed in the ON or START
position and remains illuminated until the driver’s
seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime
sounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s
seat belt is securely fastened.
The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if
the front passenger’s seat belt is not fastened
when the front passenger’s seat is occupied . For
7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in
the ON position, the system does not activate the
warning light for the front passenger.
Instruments and controls 2-13
Information Provided by:
Refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat
belts and supplemental restraint system” section
for precautions on seat belt usage.
Supplemental air bag warning
light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or
START position, the supplemental air bag warn-
ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then
turns off. This means the system is operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, and preten-
sioner systems need servicing and your vehicle
must be taken to a NISSAN dealer:
●The supplemental air bag warning light re-
mains on after approximately 7 seconds.
●The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
●The supplemental air bag warning light does
not come on at all.
Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental
restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pre-
tensioners may not function properly. For addi-
tional details see “Supplemental restraint sys-
tem” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of this
manual.
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light
is on, it could mean that the front air bag,
side air bag, curtain air bag systems
and/or pretensioner systems will not op-
erate in an accident. To help avoid injury
to yourself or others, have your vehicle
checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible.
INDICATOR LIGHTS
Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) position
indicator light (CVT models)
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this indicator light shows the shift selec-
tor position. See “Driving the vehicle” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Cruise main switch indicator
light (if so equipped)
The light comes on when the cruise control main
switch is pushed. The light goes out when the
main switch is pushed again. When the cruise
main switch indicator light comes on, the cruise
control system is operational.
Cruise set switch indicator
light (if so equipped)
The light comes on while the vehicle speed is
controlled by the cruise control system. If the light
blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate
the cruise control system is not functioning prop-
erly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
or Front passenger air
bag status light
The front passenger air bag status light (
or ) will be lit and the passenger front air
bag will be OFF depending on how the front
passenger seat is being used.
For front passenger air bag status light operation,
see “Front passenger air bag and status light” in
the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system” section of this manual.
High beam indicator light
(blue)
This blue light comes on when the headlight high
beams are on and goes out when the low beams
are selected.
2-14 Instruments and controls
Information Provided by:
The high beam indicator light also comes on
when the passing signal is activated.
Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)
If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks
while the engine is running, it may indicate a
potential emission control malfunction.
The Malfunction Indicator Light may also come
on steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing,
or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make
sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed
tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons
(11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.
After a few driving trips, the light should
turn off if no other potential emission control
system malfunction exists.
If this indicator light comes on steady for 20
seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when
the engine is not running, it indicates that the
vehicle is not ready for an emission control sys-
tem inspection/maintenance test. See “Readi-
ness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of
this manual.
Operation
The Malfunction Indicator Light will come on in
one of two ways:
●Malfunction Indicator Light on steady — An
emission control system malfunction has
been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap. If
the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten
or install the cap and continue to drive the
vehicle. The light should turn off after
a few driving trips. If the light does not
turn off after a few driving trips, have the
vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You
do not need to have your vehicle towed to
the dealer.
●Malfunction Indicator Light blinking — An
engine misfire has been detected which may
damage the emission control system. To re-
duce or avoid emission control system dam-
age:
– do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH
(72 km/h).
– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.
– avoid steep uphill grades.
– if possible, reduce the amount of cargo
being hauled or towed.
The Malfunction Indicator Light may stop blinking
and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected
by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have
your vehicle towed to the dealer.
CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without hav-
ing the emission control system checked
and repaired as necessary could lead to
poor driveability, reduced fuel economy,
and possible damage to the emission con-
trol system.
Overdrive off indicator light
(CVT models)
The overdrive off indicator light illuminates when
the overdrive off mode is selected.
For additional information, see “Continuously
Variable Transmission (CVT)” in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.
Security indicator light
For vehicles without Intelligent Key: This light
blinks whenever the ignition switch is placed in
the LOCK, OFF or ACC position.
Instruments and controls 2-15
Information Provided by:
For vehicles with Intelligent Key: This light blinks
when the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK
position with the key removed from the ignition
switch.
The blinking security indicator light indicates that
the security systems equipped on the vehicle are
operational.
For additional information, see “Security sys-
tems” later in this section.
Side light and headlight
indicator light (green)
The side light and headlight indicator light illumi-
nates when the side light or headlight position is
selected. See “Headlight and turn signal switch”
later in this section for further details.
Slip indicator light (if so
equipped)
This indicator will blink when the VDC system is
operating, thus alerting the driver to the fact that
the road surface is slippery and the vehicle is
nearing its traction limits.
You may feel or hear the system working; this is
normal.
The light will blink for a few seconds after the
VDC system stops limiting wheel spin.
The indicator light also comes on when
you place the ignition switch in the ON position.
The light will turn off after approximately 2 sec-
onds if the system is operational. If the light does
not come on have the system checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
Turn signal/hazard indicator
lights
The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal
switch is activated.
Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned
on.
Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) OFF indicator light (if so
equipped)
This indicator light comes on when the Vehicle
Dynamic Control off switch is pushed to OFF.
This indicates the Vehicle Dynamic Control sys-
tem is not operating.
Push the Vehicle Dynamic Control off switch
again or restart the engine and the system will
operate normally. See “Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” sec-
tion of this manual.
The Vehicle Dynamic Control light also comes on
when you place the ignition switch in the ON
position. The light will turn off after about 2 sec-
onds if the system is operational. If the light stays
on or comes on along with the SLIP indicator light
while you are driving, have the Vehicle Dynamic
Control system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
While the Vehicle Dynamic Control system is
operating, you might feel slight vibration or hear
the system working when starting the vehicle or
accelerating, but this is normal.
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Brake pad wear warning
The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.
When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it
makes a high pitched scraping sound when the
vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake
pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as
soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.
Key reminder chime
A chime sounds if the driver’s door is opened
while the key is left in the ignition switch. Remove
the key and take it with you when leaving the
vehicle.
2-16 Instruments and controls
Information Provided by:
Light reminder chime
With the ignition switch placed in the OFF posi-
tion, a chime sounds when the driver’s door is
opened if the headlights or parking lights are on.
Turn the headlight control switch off before leav-
ing the vehicle.
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ door buzzer
(if so equipped)
The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if any one
of the following improper operations is found.
●The ignition switch is not returned to the
LOCK position when locking the doors.
●The Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle
when locking the doors.
●The Intelligent Key is taken outside the ve-
hicle when operating the vehicle.
●Any doors are not closed securely when
locking the doors.
When the buzzer sounds, be sure to check both
the vehicle and the Intelligent Key. See “NISSAN
Intelligent Key™” in the “Pre-driving checks and
adjustments” section.
Parking brake reminder chime
A chime sounds if the parking brake is set and the
vehicle is driven. The chime will stop if the parking
brake is released or the vehicle speed returns to
zero.
Your vehicle may have two types of security sys-
tems:
●Vehicle security system (if so equipped)
●NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM (if so
equipped)
The vehicle security system provides visual and
audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors
when the system is armed. It is not, however, a
motion detection type system that activates when
a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.
LIC0301
SECURITY SYSTEMS
Instruments and controls 2-17
Information Provided by:
The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot
prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or
exterior vehicle components in all situations. Al-
ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a
brief period. Never leave your keys in the ignition,
and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Be
aware of your surroundings, and park in secure,
well-lit areas whenever possible.
Many devices offering additional protection, such
as component locks, identification markers, and
tracking systems, are available at auto supply
stores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealer
may also offer such equipment. Check with your
insurance company to see if you may be eligible
for discounts for various theft protection features.
How to arm the vehicle security
system
1. Close all windows. (The system can be
armed even if the windows are open.)
2. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-
tion and remove the key.
3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The doors
can be locked with:
●the power door lock switch (if the door is
opened, locked and then closed).
●the key — master or mechanical (Intelli-
gent Key models).
●any request switch (Intelligent Key mod-
els).
●the keyfob or Intelligent Key.
Keyfob and Intelligent Key operation:
●Push the button. All doors lock.
The hazard lights flash twice and the horn
beeps once to indicate all doors are
locked.
●When the button is pushed with
all doors locked, the hazard lights flash
twice and the horn beeps once as a re-
minder that the doors are already locked.
The horn may or may not beep. Refer to
“Silencing the horn beep feature” in the
“Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec-
tion later in this manual.
4. Confirm that the indicator light comes
on. The light stays on for about 30
seconds. The vehicle security system is now
pre-armed. After about 30 seconds the ve-
hicle security system automatically shifts
into the armed phase. The light begins
to flash once every 3 seconds. If, during the
30-second pre-arm time period, the driver’s
door is unlocked by the key, a request
switch, the keyfob or Intelligent Key, or if the
ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON
position, the system will not arm.
●If the key is turned slowly when locking
the driver’s door, the system may not
arm. Furthermore, if the key is turned
beyond the vertical position toward the
unlock position to remove the key, the
system may be disarmed when the key
is removed. If the indicator light fails to
glow for 30 seconds, unlock the door
once and lock it again.
●Even when the driver and/or passen-
gers are in the vehicle, the system will
arm with all doors closed and locked
with the ignition switch placed in the
OFF position.
Vehicle security system activation
The vehicle security system will give the following
alarm:
●The headlights blink and the horn sounds
intermittently.
2-18 Instruments and controls
Information Provided by:
●The alarm automatically turns off after ap-
proximately 50 seconds. However, the alarm
reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with
again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking
the driver’s door with the key, a request
switch or by pressing the button on
the keyfob or Intelligent Key.
The alarm is activated by:
●opening a door without using the key, a
request switch, keyfob or Intelligent Key
(even if the door is unlocked by using the
inside lock knob or the power door lock
switch).
How to stop an activated alarm
The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’s
door with the key, pressing the button on
the keyfob or Intelligent Key, or by unlocking all
doors with any request switch (Intelligent Key
models).
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not
allow the engine to start without the use of a
registered key.
If the engine fails to start using a registered key
(for example, when interference is caused by
another registered key, an automated toll road
device or automatic payment device on the key
ring), restart the engine using the following pro-
cedures:
1. Leave the ignition switch placed in the ON
position for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position and wait approximately 10
seconds.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device
(which may have caused the interference)
separate from the registered key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-
ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-
rate key ring to avoid interference from other
devices.
Statement related to Section 15 of FCC
Rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-
tem (CONT ASSY — IMMOBILIZER, ANT
ASSY — IMMOBILIZER)
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the follow-
ing two conditions;
(1) This device may not cause harmful in-
terference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired opera-
tion of the device.
CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-
PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE-
SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD
VOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPER-
ATE THE EQUIPMENT.
Instruments and controls 2-19
Information Provided by:
Security indicator light
For vehicles without Intelligent Key: This light
blinks whenever the ignition switch is placed in
the LOCK, OFF or ACC position.
For vehicles with Intelligent Key: This light blinks
when the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK
position with the key removed from the ignition
switch.
This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle Im-
mobilizer System is operational.
If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal-
functioning, the light will remain on while the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
If the light still remains on and/or the en-
gine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer for
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser-
vice as soon as possible. Please bring all
registered keys that you have when visiting
your NISSAN dealer for service.
SWITCH OPERATION
The windshield wiper and washer operates when
the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the
following speed:
䊊
1Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation
can be adjusted by turning the knob toward
䊊
A(Slower) or 䊊
B(Faster).
䊊
2Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation
䊊
3High (HI) — continuous high speed opera-
tion
LIC0474 WIC0854
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
SWITCH
2-20 Instruments and controls
Information Provided by:
Push the lever up 䊊
4to have one sweep opera-
tion (MIST) of the wiper.
Pull the lever toward you 䊊
5to operate the
washer. The wiper will also operate several times.
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer solu-
tion may freeze on the windshield and
obscure your vision which may lead to an
accident. Warm the windshield with the
defroster before you wash the windshield.
CAUTION
●Do not operate the washer continu-
ously for more than 30 seconds.
●Do not operate the washer if the reser-
voir tank is empty.
●Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir tank with windshield-washer
fluid concentrates at full strength.
Some methyl alcohol based
windsheild-washer fluid concentrates
may permanently stain the grille if
spilled while filling the windshield-
washer fluid reservoir tank.
●Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con-
centrates with water to the manufactur-
er’s recommended levels before pour-
ing the fluid into the windshield-washer
fluid reservoir tank. Do not use the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir tank
to mix the windshield-washer fluid con-
centrate and water.
To defrost the rear window glass and outside
mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine and
push the rear window defroster switch on. The
rear window defroster indicator light on the
switch comes on. Push the switch again to turn
the defroster off.
The rear window defroster automatically turns off
after approximately 15 minutes.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or dam-
age the rear window defroster.
LIC0720
REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE
MIRROR (if so equipped)
DEFROSTER SWITCH
Instruments and controls 2-21
Information Provided by:
HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
Lighting
䊊
1When turning the switch to the posi-
tion, the front parking, tail, license plate and
instrument panel lights come on.
䊊
2When turning the switch to the posi-
tion, the headlights come on and all the other
lights remain on.
CAUTION
Use the headlights with the engine run-
ning to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.
Headlight beam select
䊊
1To select the high beam function, push the
lever forward. The high beam lights come on
and the light illuminates.
䊊
2Pull the lever back to select the low beam.
䊊
3Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the
headlight high beams on and off.
Battery saver system
If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position
while the headlight switch is in the
or position, the headlights will turn off after
5 minutes.
Type A
LIC0706
Type B
LIC0688 WIC0859
HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH
2-22 Instruments and controls
Information Provided by:
CAUTION
Even though the battery saver feature au-
tomatically turns off the headlights after a
period of time, you should turn the head-
light switch to the OFF position when the
engine is not running to avoid discharging
the vehicle battery.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM
(Canada only)
The headlights automatically illuminate at a re-
duced intensity when the engine is started with
the parking brake released. The daytime running
lights operate with the headlight switch in the
OFF position or in the position. Turn the
headlight switch to the position for full
illumination when driving at night.
If the parking brake is applied before the engine is
started, the daytime running lights do not illumi-
nate. The daytime running lights illuminate when
the parking brake is released. The daytime run-
ning lights will remain on until the ignition switch
is placed in the OFF position.
WARNING
When the daytime running light system is
active, tail lights on your vehicle are not
on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your
headlights. Failure to do so could cause
an accident injuring yourself and others.
INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL
The instrument brightness control operates when
the headlight control switch is in the
or position and the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.
The brightness level will be shown briefly in the
meter’s display area whenever the control is op-
erated.
Turn the control to adjust the brightness of instru-
ment panel lights when driving at night. When
the maximum or minimum intensity is met,
a short chime will sound.
WIC1294
Instruments and controls 2-23
Information Provided by:
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Turn signal
䊊
1Move the lever up or down to signal the
turning direction. When the turn is com-
pleted, the turn signals cancel automatically.
Lane change signal
䊊
2To signal a lane change, move the lever up or
down to the point where the indicator light
begins to flash, but the lever does not latch.
FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)
To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch
to the position, then turn the fog light
switch to the position.
To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switch
to the OFF position.
The headlights must be on and the low beams
selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog
lights automatically turn off when the high beam
headlights are selected.
Push the switch on to warn other drivers when
you must stop or park under emergency condi-
tions. All turn signal lights flash.
WARNING
●If stopping for an emergency, be sure to
move the vehicle well off the road.
●Do not use the hazard warning flashers
while moving on the highway unless
unusual circumstances force you to
drive so slowly that your vehicle might
become a hazard to other traffic.
●Turn signals do not work when the haz-
ard warning flasher lights are on.
WIC0860 WIC0861 LIC0394
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
SWITCH
2-24 Instruments and controls
Information Provided by:
The flashers will operate with the ignition switch
placed in any position.
Some state laws may prohibit the use of
the hazard warning flasher switch while
driving.
To sound the horn, push the top portion of the
steering wheel’s center pad.
WARNING
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so
could affect proper operation of the
supplemental front air bag system. Tam-
pering with the supplemental front air bag
system may result in serious personal
injury.
The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle
Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driv-
ing conditions.
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC
system reduces the engine output to reduce
wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced
even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If
maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck
vehicle, turn the VDC system off.
To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF
switch. The indicator will come on.
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the
engine to turn on the system. See “Vehicle Dy-
namic Control (VDC) system”in the “Starting and
driving” section.
WIC1324 WIC0534
HORN VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
OFF SWITCH (if so equipped)
Instruments and controls 2-25
Information Provided by:
The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters.
1. Start the engine.
2. Push the low or high position of the switch,
as desired, depending on the temperature.
The indicator light in the switch will illumi-
nate.
The heater is controlled by a thermostat,
automatically turning the heater on and off.
The indicator light will remain on as long as
the switch is on.
3. When the seat is warmed or before you
leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch
off.
CAUTION
●Do not use the seat heater for extended
periods or when no one is using the
seat.
●Do not put anything on the seat which
insulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-
ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat
may become overheated.
●Do not place anything hard or heavy on
the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar
object. This may result in damage to the
heater.
●Any liquid spilled on the heated seat
should be removed immediately with a
dry cloth.
●When cleaning the seat, never use
gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi-
lar materials.
●If any abnormalities are found or the
heated seat does not operate, turn the
switch off and have the system checked
by your NISSAN dealer.
●The battery could run down if the seat
heater is operated while the engine is
not running.
The power outlets are for powering electrical
accessories such as cellular telephones. They
are rated at 12 Volt, 120W (10A) maximum.
The power outlet located on the bottom center
portion of the instrument panel is powered di-
rectly by the vehicle’s battery. The power outlet
located in the console (if so equipped) is pow-
ered only when the ignition switch is placed in the
ACC or ON position.
WIC1441
Instrument panel
LIC1022
HEATED SEAT (if so equipped) POWER OUTLET
2-26 Instruments and controls
Information Provided by:
CAUTION
●The outlet and plug may be hot during
or immediately after use.
●The power outlets are not designed for
use with a cigarette lighter.
●Do not use with accessories that ex-
ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.
Do not use double adapters or more
than one electrical accessory.
●Use power outlets with the engine run-
ning to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.
●Avoid using power outlets when the air
conditioner, headlights or rear window
defroster is on.
●Before inserting or disconnecting a
plug, be sure the electrical accessory
being used is turned OFF.
●Push the plug in as far as it will go. If
good contact is not made, the plug may
overheat or the internal temperature
fuse may open.
●When not in use, be sure to close the
cap. Do not allow water to contact the
outlet.
MAP POCKETS
Console (if so equipped)
LIC1478 LIC1023
STORAGE
Instruments and controls 2-27
Information Provided by:
STORAGE BIN
Pull the lid down to open the storage bin.
Some models are equipped with a soft lining in
the storage bin for storing sunglasses.
WARNING
Keep the storage bin closed while driving
to prevent an accident.
STORAGE TRAYS
WARNING
Do not place sharp objects in the trays to
help prevent injury in an accident or sud-
den stop.
INSTRUMENT PANEL STORAGE (if
so equipped)
To open the storage tray, push and release. The
storage tray will automatically move to the open
position.
LIC1025 WIC1036
LIC1024
2-28 Instruments and controls
Information Provided by:
●The inside of the storage tray can get hot. Do
not place objects inside which can melt or
be easily deformed.
WARNING
Keep the tray lid closed while driving to
help prevent contents from becoming pro-
jectiles causing injury in an accident or
during a sudden stop.
SEATBACK POCKETS (if so
equipped)
The seatback pockets are located on the back of
the driver’s and passenger’s seats. The pockets
can be used to store maps.
Type A
LIC1116
Type B
LIC1328
Instruments and controls 2-29
Information Provided by:
CUP HOLDERS
Adjust the cup holder size by turning the adjust-
ment knob and sliding the cup holder divider to
the desired position.
CAUTION
●Avoid abrupt starting and braking when
the cup holder is being used to prevent
spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it
can scald you or your passenger.
●Use only soft cups in the cup holder.
Hard objects can injure you in an
accident.
Lower the rear center armrest to access the cup
holders.
Front
WIC1531
Rear (if so equipped)
WIC1097
2-30 Instruments and controls
Information Provided by:
GLOVE BOX
Open the glove box by pulling the handle.
WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving to
help prevent injury in an accident or a
sudden stop.
CONSOLE BOX
To open the console box, press in on the lever 䊊
1
and raise the lid 䊊
2.
To close, push the lid down until the lock latches.
TRUNK DIVIDER (if so equipped)
CAUTION
The trunk divider does not contain any
secure locking mechanisms so it should
not be used as a secure storage for
valuables.
The trunk divider allows for the creation of a
hidden storage compartment in the trunk or when
lowered, a temporary storage surface for wet
items.
The trunk divider can be accessed through the
lowering of the rear seats or through the trunk.
WIC1487 WIC1504
Instruments and controls 2-31
Information Provided by:
Once the rear seats have been lowered, the trunk
divider can be opened by pressing down on the
securing latch and pushing the divider toward the
rear of the vehicle. For more information on the
lowering of rear seats, see “Interior trunk access”
in the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supple-
mental restraint system” section of this manual.
Access the trunk divider by opening the trunk. To
remove the trunk divider, press down on securing
latch 䊊
1and lower the trunk divider to about 45°.
Pull and lift the divider out of the holding brackets
䊊
2to remove from the trunk.
CARGO NET (if so equipped)
WARNING
●Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. In a sudden stop or collision,
unsecured cargo could cause personal
injury.
●Be sure to secure all four hooks into the
retainers. The cargo restrained in the
net must not exceed 30 lbs. (13.6 kg) or
the net may not stay secured.
Accessing through rear seats
LIC1030
Accessing through trunk
LIC1031 WIC1032
2-32 Instruments and controls
Information Provided by:
The cargo net helps keep packages in the cargo
area from moving around while the vehicle is in
motion.
To install the cargo net, attach the net to the
retainers.
To remove the cargo net, detach the net from the
cargo net retainers.
GROCERY HOOKS (if so equipped)
The grocery hooks are located in the trunk and
can be used to hang a standard size plastic
grocery bag.
CAUTION
Do not apply a total load of more than 20
lbs (9 kg) to a single grocery hook.
LIC0802 LIC0748
Instruments and controls 2-33
Information Provided by:
POWER WINDOWS (if so equipped)
WARNING
●Make sure that all passengers have
their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while
it is in motion and before closing the
windows. Use the window lock switch
to prevent unexpected use of the power
windows.
●Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
tivate switches or controls and become
trapped in a window. Unattended chil-
dren could become involved in serious
accidents.
The power windows operate when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position, or for about
45 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in
the OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s
door is opened during this period of about 45
seconds, power to the windows is canceled.
1. Window lock button
2. Power door lock switch
3. Front passenger’s side window switch
4. Right rear passenger’s window switch
5. Left rear passenger’s window switch
6. Driver’s side automatic switch
Driver’s side power window switch
The driver’s side control panel is equipped with
switches to open or close the front and rear
passenger windows.
To open a window, push the switch to the first
detent and continue to hold it down until the
desired window position is reached. To close a
window, pull the switch to the first detent and
continue to hold up until the desired window
position is reached.
WIC1100
WINDOWS
2-34 Instruments and controls
Information Provided by:
Front passenger’s power window
switch
The passenger’s window switch operates only
the corresponding passenger’s window. To open
the window, push the switch to the first detent
and continue to hold it down until the desired
window position is reached 䊊
1. To close the
window, pull the switch to the first detent and
continue to hold it up until the desired window
position is reached 䊊
2.
Rear power window switch
The rear power window switches open or close
only the corresponding windows. To open the
window, push the switch and hold it down 䊊
1.To
close the window, pull the switch up 䊊
2.
Locking passengers’ windows
When the window lock button is depressed, only
the driver’s side window can be opened or
closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock
function.
Automatic operation
To fully open a window equipped with automatic
operation, press the window switch down to the
second detent and release it; it need not be held.
The window automatically opens all the way. To
stop the window, lift the switch up while the
window is opening.
To fully close a window equipped with automatic
operation, pull the switch up to the second detent
and release it; it need not be held. The window
automatically closes all the way. To stop the win-
dow, press the switch down while the window is
closing.
WIC1129 LIC0718 LIC0410
Instruments and controls 2-35
Information Provided by:
Auto-reverse function
The auto-reverse function can be activated when
a window is closed by automatic operation.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto-reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the window oc-
curs.
WARNING
There are some small distances immedi-
ately before the closed position which
cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., inside
the vehicle before closing the window.
If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, replaced,
or jump started, the power window auto-reverse
function may not operate properly. If this occurs,
please contact the dealer to re-initialize the
power window auto-reverse system.
If the control unit detects something caught in a
window equipped with automatic operation as it
is closing, the window will be immediately low-
ered.
When the automatic operation for the
driver’s power window switch does
not operate
If the automatic operation for the driver’s power
window switch does not operate properly, per-
form the following procedure to initialize the
power window switch.
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
2. Press and hold the driver’s window switch
down until the window opens completely.
3. Release the switch.
4. Pull and hold the driver’s window switch up
to the second detent until the window glass
has reached the full close position. Con-
tinue to hold the window switch in the
up position for 5 seconds after the win-
dow glass has reached the full close
position. (It is necessary for this entire step
to be completed with one continuous pull of
the window switch.)
5. Release the switch.
Initialization is now complete. The automatic op-
eration for the driver’s power window switch
should now operate.
If the automatic operation does not operate prop-
erly after performing the above procedure, see a
NISSAN dealer for assistance.
No initialization is required for all the other win-
dow switches.
2-36 Instruments and controls
Information Provided by:
MANUAL WINDOWS (if so equipped)
The side windows can be opened or closed by
turning the hand crank on each door.
ELECTRIC MOONROOF
This moonroof only operates with the ignition
switch placed in the ON position.
NOTE:
If the battery is discharged or is discon-
nected, the moonroof may not operate cor-
rectly, and must be reset.
See “Resetting the moonroof switch” later in this
section.
Sliding the moonroof
To open the moonroof, push and hold the switch
toward DOWN/OPEN. The moonroof will stop
when the switch is released or when the moon-
roof is fully open.
To close the moonroof, push and hold the switch
toward UP/CLOSE. The moonroof will stop when
the switch is released or when the moonroof is
fully closed.
Tilting the moonroof
Close the moonroof by pushing and holding the
switch toward UP/CLOSE. Release the switch,
then push and hold the UP/CLOSE switch to tilt
the moonroof up. The moonroof will stop when
the switch is released or when the moonroof
reaches the maximum tilt position.
To tilt the moonroof down, push and hold the
switch toward DOWN/OPEN. The moonroof will
stop when the switch is released or when the
moonroof is fully closed.
WIC0263 WIC1482
MOONROOF (if so equipped)
Instruments and controls 2-37
Information Provided by:
WARNING
●In an accident you could be thrown from
the vehicle through an open moonroof.
Always use seat belts and child
restraints.
●Do not allow anyone to stand up or
extend any portion of their body out of
the moonroof opening while the vehicle
is in motion or while the moonroof is
closing.
CAUTION
●Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand
from the moonroof before opening.
●Do not place heavy objects on the
moonroof or surrounding area.
Resetting the moonroof switch
The moonroof switch may not operate properly
and may need to be reset if any of the following
conditions have occurred:
●the battery terminal has been disconnected,
●the moonroof has been manually moved,
●the moonroof motor has been removed and
reinstalled after the moonroof has been re-
positioned or adjusted,
●the moonroof glass panel has been adjusted
or changed, or
●the electrical supply interrupted and/or
some malfunction has been detected.
Use the following reset procedure to return
moonroof operation to normal.
1. Press the UP/CLOSE side of the moonroof
switch, until it stops and then release the
switch.
2. Push and hold the UP/CLOSE side of the
moonroof switch. The moonroof panel will
begin to move in about 10 seconds.
3. Continue to hold the UP/CLOSE side of the
moonroof switch while the panel moves in a
jogging motion to the full tilt position. When
the panel reaches the full tilt position it will
back up a little and stop.
4. Release the UP/CLOSE side of the moon-
roof switch.
5. Within 5 seconds of completing step 4,
press and continuously hold the UP/CLOSE
side of the moonroof switch. After a delay of
5 seconds, the panel will move from the tilt
position to the open position and back to the
close position.
6. Release the UP/CLOSE side of the moon-
roof switch. Do not disconnect the power for
at least 2 seconds. The moonroof is now
restarted.
NOTE:
If the UP/CLOSE side of the moonroof
switch is released anytime during the re-
starting process, all learned profile data
will be discarded and the procedure will
have to be started over.
If the moonroof still does not operate properly,
have the moonroof system checked, and if nec-
essary repaired, by a NISSAN dealer.
Auto-reverse function (when closing or
tilting down the moonroof)
The auto-reverse function can be activated when
the moonroof is closed or tilted down by auto-
matic operation when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position or for about 45 sec-
onds after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto-reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the moonroof
occurs.
2-38 Instruments and controls
Information Provided by:
WARNING
There are some small distances immedi-
ately before the closed position which
cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., inside
the vehicle before closing the moonroof.
When closing:
If the control unit detects something caught in the
moonroof as it moves to the front, the moonroof
will immediately open backward.
When tilting down:
If the control unit detects something caught in the
moonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will im-
mediately tilt up.
If the auto-reverse function malfunctions and re-
peats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keep
pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds
after it happens; the moonroof will fully close
gradually. Make sure nothing is caught in the
moonroof.
WARNING
●In an accident you could be thrown from
the vehicle through an open moonroof.
Always use seat belts and child
restraints.
●Do not allow anyone to stand up or
extend any portion of their body out of
the moonroof opening while the vehicle
is in motion or while the moonroof is
closing.
CAUTION
●Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand
from the moonroof before opening.
●Do not place heavy objects on the
moonroof or surrounding area.
Sunshade
Open and close the sunshade by sliding it for-
ward or backward.
If the moonroof does not close
Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the
moonroof.
The interior light has a three-position switch and
operates regardless of ignition switch position.
When the switch is in the ON position 䊊
1, the
interior light illuminates, regardless of door posi-
tion.
When the switch is in the center O position, the
interior light illuminates by opening a door.
The interior light will stay on for about 30 seconds
when:
●The doors are unlocked while the ignition
switch is placed in the OFF position and all
doors are closed.
WIC0264
INTERIOR LIGHT
Instruments and controls 2-39
Information Provided by:
●The driver’s door is opened and then closed
while the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position.
●The ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position while all doors are closed.
The interior light will turn off while the 30 second
timer is activated when:
●The driver’s door is locked by the keyfob, a
key or the lock-unlock switch.
●The ignition switch is placed in the ON po-
sition.
When the switch is in the OFF position 䊊
2, the
interior light does not illuminate, regardless of
door position.
Some vehicles are equipped with a battery saver
feature that will automatically turn off the interior
lights after approximately 10 minutes if:
●doors are open, or
●the interior light switch is in the ON position.
NOTE:
If the interior lights are turned off automati-
cally by the battery saver feature, the igni-
tion switch must be placed in the ON posi-
tion before the interior lights will illuminate
again.
For information regarding the interior light bulb
replacement, refer to “Exterior and interior lights”
in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section of
this manual.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result
in a discharged battery. To turn the map lights on, press the button. To
turn them off, press the button again.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result
in a discharged battery.
WIC1540
MAP LIGHTS (if so equipped)
2-40 Instruments and controls
Information Provided by:
The light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened.
When the trunk lid is closed, the light goes off.
For bulb replacement procedures, refer to “Exte-
rior and interior lights” in the “Maintenance and
do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
TRUNK LIGHT
Instruments and controls 2-41
Information Provided by:
MEMO
2-42 Instruments and controls
Information Provided by:
3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Keys.............................................3-2
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys .........3-2
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ (if so equipped) .........3-3
Doors ............................................3-4
Locking with key................................3-5
Locking with inside lock knob . ...................3-5
Locking with power door lock switch .............3-6
Automatic door locks . . .........................3-6
Child safety rear door lock.......................3-7
Remote keyless entry system (models without
NISSAN Intelligent Key™) (if so equipped)............3-7
How to use remote keyless entry system ..........3-8
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ (if so equipped) ...........3-11
Operating range...............................3-13
Door locks/unlocks precaution ..................3-13
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ Operation..............3-14
How to use the remote keyless entry
function ......................................3-17
Warning lights and audible reminders ............3-20
Warning signals ...............................3-21
Troubleshooting guide .........................3-22
Hood ...........................................3-23
Trunk lid .........................................3-23
Trunk lid release ...............................3-24
Key operation (if so equipped) ..................3-24
Interior trunk lid release ........................3-24
Fuel-filler door ...................................3-25
Opener operation..............................3-25
Fuel-filler cap .................................3-25
Steering wheel ...................................3-27
Tilt operation..................................3-27
Sun visors .......................................3-27
Vanity mirrors (if so equipped)...................3-27
Mirrors ..........................................3-28
Rearview mirror ...............................3-28
Outside mirrors ...............................3-28
Information Provided by:
1. Two master keys (black) with transpon-
der chip and chrome NISSAN brand
symbol on one side
2. Transponder chip
3. Key number plate
A key number plate is supplied with your keys.
Record the key number and keep it in a safe place
(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose
your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by
using the key number. NISSAN does not record
key numbers so it is very important to keep track
of your key number plate.
A key number is only necessary when you have
lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate
from. If you still have a key, your NISSAN dealer
can duplicate it.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM KEYS
You can only drive your vehicle using the master
keys which are registered to the NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System components in your vehicle.
These keys have a transponder chip in the key
head.
The master key can be used for all the locks.
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
Additional or replacement keys:
If you still have a key, the key number is not
necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System keys. Your dealer can dupli-
cate your existing key. As many as 5 NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used
with one vehicle. You should bring all NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to
your NISSAN dealer for registration. This is be-
cause the registration process will erase the
memory of all key codes previously registered
into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.
After the registration process, these components
will only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration.
Any key that is not given to your dealer at the time
of registration will no longer be able to start your
vehicle.
Do not allow the immobilizer system key, which
contains an electrical transponder, to come into
contact with salt water. This could affect system
function.
LPD0348
KEYS
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Information Provided by:
1. Two Intelligent Keys
2. Mechanical keys (inside Intelligent
Keys)
3. Key number plate
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™ (if so
equipped)
Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent
Keys which are registered to your vehicle’s Intel-
ligent Key components and NISSAN Vehicle Im-
mobilizer System components.
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered
and used with one vehicle. The new keys must be
registered by a NISSAN dealer prior to use with
the Intelligent Key and NISSAN Vehicle Immobi-
lizer System of your vehicle. Since the registra-
tion process requires erasing all memory in the
Intelligent Key components when registering new
keys, be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that you
have to the NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occur-
rences which will damage the Intelligent
Key:
●Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which
contains electrical components, to
come into contact with water or salt
water. This could affect the system
function.
●Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
●Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply
against another object.
●Do not change or modify the Intelligent
Key.
●Wetting may damage the Intelligent
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-
mediately wipe until it is completely dry.
●Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in an area where tem-
peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).
●Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a
key holder that contains a magnet.
●Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a magnetic
field, such as a TV, audio equipment and
personal computers.
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen,
NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code
of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle.
This may prevent the unauthorized use of
the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle.
For information regarding the erasing
procedure, contact a NISSAN dealer.
WPD0363
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3
Information Provided by:
Mechanical key
The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key,
which can be used in case of a discharged bat-
tery.
To remove the mechanical key, release the lock
knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.
To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into
the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to
the lock position.
The mechanical key can be used for operation in
the same way as an ordinary key.
CAUTION
Always carry the mechanical key installed
in the Intelligent Key slot.
See “Doors” in this section and “Storage” in the
“Instruments and Controls” section of this
manual.
When the doors are locked using one of the
following methods, the doors can not be opened
using the inside or outside door handles. The
doors must be unlocked to open the doors.
WARNING
●Always have the doors locked while
driving. Along with the use of seat belts,
this provides greater safety in the event
of an accident by helping to prevent
persons from being thrown from the
vehicle. This also helps keep children
and others from unintentionally open-
ing the doors, and will help keep out
intruders.
●Before opening any door, always look
for and avoid oncoming traffic.
●Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
tivate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in seri-
ous accidents.
SPA1951
DOORS
3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Information Provided by:
LOCKING WITH KEY
Manual (if so equipped)
To lock a door, turn the key toward the front of the
vehicle 䊊
1. To unlock, turn the key toward the rear
䊊
2.
Power (if so equipped)
The power door lock system allows you to lock or
unlock all doors at the same time.
Turning the key toward the front 䊊
1of the vehicle
locks all doors.
Turning the key one time toward the rear 䊊
2of the
vehicle unlocks that door. From that position,
returning the key to neutral 䊊
3(where the key can
only be removed and inserted) and turning it
toward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocks
all doors 䊊
4.
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK
KNOB
To lock the door without the key, move the inside
lock knob to the lock position 䊊
1, then close the
door.
To unlock the door without the key, move the
inside lock knob to the unlock position 䊊
2.
Driver’s side
LPD0349 LPD0483
Inside lock
WPD0291
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5
Information Provided by:
LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR
LOCK SWITCH
To lock all the doors without a key, push the door
lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) to
the lock position 䊊
1. When locking the door this
way, be certain not to leave the key inside the
vehicle.
To unlock all the doors without a key, push the
door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s
side) to the unlock position 䊊
2.
Lockout protection
When the power door lock switch (driver’s or
front passenger’s side) is moved to the lock
position with the key in the ignition switch and any
door open, all doors will lock and then unlock
automatically. This helps to prevent the keys from
being accidently locked inside the vehicle.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS
●All doors lock automatically when the vehicle
speed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h).
●All doors unlock automatically when the ig-
nition switch is placed in the OFF position
(models with Intelligent Key system) or when
the key is removed from the ignition switch
(models without Intelligent Key system).
The automatic unlock function can be de-
activated or activated. To deactivate or acti-
vate the automatic door unlock system, perform
the following procedure:
1. Close all doors.
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
3. Within 20 seconds of performing Step 2,
push and hold the power door lock switch to
the position (UNLOCK) for more than
5 seconds.
4. When activated, the hazard indicator will
flash twice. When deactivated, the hazard
indicator will flash once.
5. The ignition switch must be placed in the
OFF and ON position again between each
setting change.
When the automatic door unlock system is deac-
tivated, the doors do not unlock when the ignition
switch is placed in the OFF position (models with
Intelligent Key system) or when the key is re-
moved from the ignition switch (models without
Intelligent Key system). To unlock the door manu-
ally, use the inside lock knob or the power door
lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side).
Door lock switch
WPD0381
3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Information Provided by:
CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK
Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors
from being opened accidentally, especially when
small children are in the vehicle.
The child safety lock levers are located on the
edge of the rear doors.
When the lever is in the unlock position 䊊
1, the
door can be opened from the outside or the
inside.
When the lever is in the lock position 䊊
2,
the door can be opened only from the out-
side.
WARNING
●Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those who
use a pacemaker should contact the
electric medical equipment manufac-
turer for the possible influences before
use.
●The remote keyless entry keyfob trans-
mits radio waves when the buttons are
pressed. The FAA advises radio waves
may affect aircraft navigation and com-
munication systems. Do not operate the
remote keyless entry keyfob while on
an airplane. Make sure the buttons are
not operated unintentionally when the
unit is stored for a flight.
It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn the
interior lights on, and activate the panic alarm by
using the keyfob from outside the vehicle.
Be sure to remove the key from the vehicle
before locking the doors.
The keyfob can operate at a distance of approxi-
mately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. The effective
distance depends on the conditions around the
vehicle.
As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with one
vehicle. For information concerning the purchase
and use of additional keyfobs, contact a NISSAN
dealer.
The keyfob will not function when:
●the battery is discharged
●the distance between the vehicle and the
keyfob is over 33 ft (10 m)
The panic alarm will not activate when the
key is in the ignition switch.
CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occur-
rences which will damage the keyfob:
●Do not allow the keyfob, which contains
electrical components, to come into
contact with water or salt water. This
could affect the system function.
●Do not drop the keyfob.
●Do not strike the keyfob sharply against
another object.
●Do not change or modify the keyfob.
●Wetting may damage the keyfob. If the
keyfob gets wet, immediately wipe until
it is completely dry.
LIC0716
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
(models without NISSAN Intelligent
Key™) (if so equipped)
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7
Information Provided by:
●Do not place the keyfob for an extended
period in an area where temperatures
exceed 140°F (60°C).
●Do not attach the keyfob with a key
holder that contains a magnet.
●Do not place the keyfob near equip-
ment that produces a magnetic field,
such as a TV, audio equipment and per-
sonal computers.
If a keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec-
ommends erasing the ID code of that key-
fob. This will prevent the keyfob from un-
authorized use to unlock the vehicle. For
information regarding the erasing proce-
dure, please contact a NISSAN dealer. HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS
ENTRY SYSTEM
Locking doors
1. Close all windows.
2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
3. Close the hood, trunk lid, and all doors.
4. Press the button on the keyfob. All
the doors lock. The hazard lights flash twice
and the horn beeps once to indicate all
doors are locked.
●When the button is pressed with all
doors locked, the hazard lights flash twice
and the horn beeps once as a reminder that
the doors are already locked.
●If a door is open and you press the
button, the doors will lock but the horn will
not beep and the hazard lights will not flash.
The horn may or may not beep once. Refer to
“Silencing the horn beep feature” in this section
for details.
LPD0209
3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Information Provided by:
Unlocking doors
Press the button on the keyfob once.
●Only the driver’s door unlocks.
●The hazard warning lights flash once if all
doors are completely closed with the ignition
switch in any position except the ON posi-
tion.
●The interior light turns on and the light timer
activates for 30 seconds when the switch is
in the center O position with the ignition
switch in any position except the ON posi-
tion.
Press the button on the keyfob again
within 5 seconds.
●All doors unlock.
●The hazard warning lights flash once if all
doors are completely closed.
The interior lights can be turned off without wait-
ing 30 seconds by inserting the key into the
ignition and turning it to the ON or START posi-
tion, locking the doors with the keyfob or pushing
the interior light switch to the OFF position.
Auto relock
When the button on the keyfob is pressed,
all doors will lock automatically within 1 minute
unless one of the following operations is per-
formed:
●Any door is opened.
●A key is inserted into the ignition switch and
the switch is cycled from OFF to ON.
Releasing the trunk lid (if so equipped)
Press the button on the keyfob for longer
than 0.5 seconds to open the trunk lid. The trunk
release button on the keyfob will not operate
when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
LPD0210 WPD0319
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9
Information Provided by:
Using the panic alarm (if so equipped)
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,
you may activate the panic alarm to call attention
by pressing and holding the button on the
keyfob for longer than 0.5 seconds.
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25
seconds.
The panic alarm stops when:
●it has run for 25 seconds, or
●any button is pressed on the keyfob.
Using the interior light
Press the button on the keyfob once to
turn on the interior lights.
For additional information, refer to “Interior light”
in the “Instruments and controls” section in this
manual.
Silencing the horn beep feature
If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-
vated using the keyfob.
To deactivate: Press and hold the
and buttons for at least 2 seconds.
The hazard warning lights will flash three times to
confirm that the horn beep feature has been
deactivated.
To activate: Press and hold the
and buttons for at least 2 seconds
once more.
LPD0211 LPD0262
3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Information Provided by:
The hazard warning lights will flash once and the
horn will sound once to confirm that the horn
beep feature has been reactivated.
Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-
lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.
WARNING
●Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those who
use a pacemaker should contact the
electric medical equipment manufac-
turer for the possible influences before
use.
●The Intelligent Key transmits radio
waves when the buttons are pressed.
The FAA advises the radio waves may
affect aircraft navigation and communi-
cation systems. Do not operate the In-
telligent Key while on an airplane. Make
sure the buttons are not operated unin-
tentionally when the unit is stored for a
flight.
The Intelligent Key can operate all the door locks
using the remote controller function or pushing
the request switch on the vehicle without taking
the key out from a pocket or purse. The operating
environment and/or conditions may affect the
Intelligent Key operation.
Be sure to read the following before using the
Intelligent Key.
CAUTION
●Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with
you when operating the vehicle.
●Never leave the Intelligent Key in the
vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
The Intelligent Key is always communicating with
the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intel-
ligent Key transmits weak radio waves. Environ-
mental conditions may interfere with the opera-
tion of the Intelligent Key under the following
operating conditions:
●When operating near a location where
strong radio waves are transmitted, such as
a TV tower, power station and broadcasting
station.
●When in possession of wireless equipment,
such as a cellular telephone, transceiver,
and CB radio.
●When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or
covered by metallic materials.
●When any type of radio wave remote control
is used nearby.
●When the Intelligent Key is placed near an
electric appliance such as a personal com-
puter.
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™ (if so
equipped)
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11
Information Provided by:
●When the vehicle is parked near a parking
meter.
In such cases, correct the operating conditions
before using the Intelligent Key function or use
the mechanical key.
Although the life of the battery varies depending
on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is
approximately 2 years. If the battery is dis-
charged, replace it with a new one.
When the Intelligent Key battery is low, the Intel-
ligent Key system warning light ( ) will blink
green for about 30 seconds after the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position.
Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving
radio waves, if the key is left near equipment
which transmits strong radio waves, such as sig-
nals from a TV and personal computer, the bat-
tery life may become shorter.
For information regarding replacement of a bat-
tery, see “Battery replacement” in the “Mainte-
nance and do-it-yourself” section.
For models with a steering wheel lock mecha-
nism: Because the steering wheel is locked elec-
trically, unlocking the steering wheel with the
ignition switch in the Lock position is impossible
when the vehicle battery is completely dis-
charged. Unlocking the steering wheel is impos-
sible even if the Intelligent key is inserted into the
Intelligent Key port. Pay special attention that the
vehicle battery is not completely discharged.
As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered
and used with one vehicle. For information about
the purchase and use of additional Intelligent
Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occur-
rences which will damage the Intelligent
Key:
●Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which
contains electrical components, to
come into contact with water or salt
water. This could affect the system
function.
●Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
●Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply
against another object.
●Do not change or modify the Intelligent
Key.
●Wetting may damage the Intelligent
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-
mediately wipe until it is completely dry.
●Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in an area where tem-
peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).
●Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a
key holder that contains a magnet.
●Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a magnetic
field, such as a TV, audio equipment and
personal computers.
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN
recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli-
gent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the
unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate
the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing
procedure, contact a NISSAN dealer.
3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Information Provided by:
OPERATING RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used
when the Intelligent Key is within the specified
operating range from the request switch 䊊
1.
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or
strong radio waves are present near the operat-
ing location, the Intelligent Key operating range
becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may
not function properly.
The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm)
from each request switch 䊊
1.
If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass,
handle or rear bumper, the request switches may
not function.
When the Intelligent Key is within the operating
range, it is possible for anyone, even someone
who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the
request switch to lock/unlock the doors.
DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS
PRECAUTION
●Do not push the door handle request switch
with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as
illustrated. The close distance to the door
handle will cause the Intelligent Key system
to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelli-
gent Key is outside the vehicle.
●After locking with the door handle request
switch, verify the doors are securely locked
by testing them.
SPA2038 WPD0375
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13
Information Provided by:
●To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left
inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the
Intelligent Key with you and then lock the
doors.
●Do not pull the door handle before pushing
the door handle request switch. The door
will be unlocked but will not open. Release
the door handle once and pull it again to
open the door.
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™
OPERATION
You can lock or unlock the doors without taking
the Intelligent Key out of your pocket or bag.
When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you
can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door
handle request switch within the range of opera-
tion.
Locking doors
1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-
tion. (Remove the key if any key is in the
ignition switch.)
2. Close all doors.
3. Push any door handle request switch 䊊
1
while carrying the Intelligent Key with you.
4. All doors and the trunk will lock.
5. The hazard warning lights flash twice and
the outside buzzer sounds twice.
WPD0376 WPD0377
3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
●Doors lock with the door handle request
switch while a mechanical key is in the igni-
tion switch or the ignition switch is pushed
in.
●Doors lock with the door handle request
switch while the ignition switch is not in the
LOCK position.
●Doors do not lock by pushing the door
handle request switch while any door is
open. However, doors lock with the me-
chanical key even if any door is open.
●Doors do not lock with the door handle
request switch with the Intelligent Key inside
the vehicle and a beep sounds to warn you.
However, when an Intelligent Key is inside
the vehicle, doors can be locked with an-
other Intelligent Key.
CAUTION
●After locking the doors using the re-
quest switch, make sure that the doors
have been securely locked by operating
the door handles or the trunk opener
switch.
●When locking the doors using the re-
quest switch, make sure to have the
Intelligent Key in your possession be-
fore operating the request switch to
prevent the Intelligent Key from being
left in the vehicle.
●The request switch is operational only
when the Intelligent Key has been de-
tected by the Intelligent Key system.
Lockout protection
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci-
dentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protection
is equipped with the Intelligent Key.
When the driver’s side door is open, the doors
are locked, and then the Intelligent Key is put
inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed;
the lock will automatically unlock and the door
buzzer sounds.
NOTE:
The doors may not lock when the Intelli-
gent Key is in the same hand that is oper-
ating the request switch to lock the door.
Put the Intelligent Key in a purse, pocket or
your other hand.
CAUTION
The lockout protection may not function
under the following conditions:
●When the Intelligent Key is placed on
top of the instrument panel.
●When the Intelligent Key is placed on
top of the rear parcel shelf.
●When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
side the glove box or a storage bin.
●When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
side the door pockets.
●When the Intelligent Key is placed on or
under the spare tire area.
●When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
side or near metallic materials.
WPD0369
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15
Information Provided by:
Unlocking doors
1. Carry the Intelligent Key.
2. Push the door handle request switch 䊊
1.
3. The hazard warning lights flash once and the
outside buzzer sounds once.
4. Push the door handle request switch 䊊
1
again within 60 seconds to unlock all doors.
If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the
doors, that door may not be unlocked. Returning
the door handle to its original position will unlock
the door. If the door does not unlock after return-
ing the door handle, push the door handle re-
quest switch to unlock the door.
All doors will be locked automatically unless one
of the following operations is performed within 60
seconds after pushing the request switch.
●Opening any door.
●Pushing the ignition switch.
●Inserting the mechanical key into the ignition
switch.
The interior light timer illuminates for a maximum
of 30 seconds when a door is unlocked and the
room light switch is in the DOOR position.
The interior light can be turned off without waiting
for 30 seconds by performing one of the follow-
ing operations.
●Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-
tion.
●Locking the doors with the remote controller.
●Switching the room light switch to the OFF
position.
WPD0377 WPD0369
3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Information Provided by:
Opening the trunk lid
1. Push the trunk opener request switch 䊊
Afor
more than 1 second while carrying the Intel-
ligent Key with you.
2. The trunk will unlatch. A chime will sound 4
times.
3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.
Lockout protection
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci-
dentally locked in the trunk, lockout protection is
equipped with the Intelligent Key.
When all doors are locked and the trunk lid is
closed with the Intelligent Key inside the trunk,
the outside buzzer will sound and the trunk will
open.
HOW TO USE THE REMOTE
KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION
The remote keyless entry function can operate all
door locks using the remote keyless function of
the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function
can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away
from the vehicle. The operating distance de-
pends upon the conditions around the vehicle.
The remote keyless entry function will not func-
tion under the following conditions:
●When the Intelligent Key is not within the
operational range.
●When the doors or the trunk are open or not
closed securely.
●When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-
charged.
CAUTION
When locking the doors using the Intelli-
gent Key, be sure not to leave the key in
the vehicle.
Locking doors
1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-
tion.
2. Close all doors.
3. Press the button on the Intelligent
Key.
4. The hazard warning lights flash twice and
the horn beeps once.
5. All doors will be locked.
LPD0478 WPD0359
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17
Information Provided by:
CAUTION
After locking the doors using the Intelli-
gent Key, be sure that the doors have been
securely locked by operating the door
handles.
Unlocking doors
1. Press the button on the Intelligent
Key.
2. The hazard warning lights flash once.
3. Press the button again within 60 sec-
onds to unlock all doors.
All doors will be locked automatically unless one
of the following operations is performed within 1
minute after pressing the button.
●Opening any doors.
●Pushing the ignition switch.
●Inserting the mechanical key into the ignition
switch.
The interior light illuminates for a maximum of 30
seconds when a door is unlocked and the room
light switch is in the DOOR position.
The light can be turned off without waiting for 30
seconds by performing one of the following op-
erations.
●Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-
tion.
●Locking the doors with the remote controller.
●Switching the room light switch to the OFF
position.
WPD0360
3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Information Provided by:
Releasing the trunk lid
Press the button for longer than 0.5 sec-
onds to open the trunk lid. The trunk release
button will not operate when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.
Using the panic alarm
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,
you may activate the panic alarm to call attention
by pressing and holding the button on the
Intelligent Key for longer than 0.5 seconds.
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25
seconds.
The panic alarm stops when:
●It has run for 25 seconds, or
●Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key.
●Pushing the request switch on the driver or
passenger door with the Intelligent Key in
range of the door handle.
WPD0364 WPD0361
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19
Information Provided by:
Silencing the horn beep feature
If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-
vated using the Intelligent Key.
To deactivate: Press and hold the
and buttons for at least 2 seconds.
The hazard warning lights will flash 3 times to
confirm that the horn beep feature has been
deactivated.
To activate: Press and hold the
and buttons for at least 2 seconds
once more.
The hazard warning lights will flash once and the
horn will sound once to confirm that the horn
beep feature has been reactivated.
Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-
lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.
䊊
1P (Park) position selecting warning
light
䊊
2NISSAN Intelligent Key™ warning light
WARNING LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE
REMINDERS
The Intelligent Key is equipped with a function
that is designed to minimize improper operations
and to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen.
The warning buzzer sounds and the warning light
illuminates when improper operations are de-
tected.
WPD0362 WPD0382
3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Information Provided by:
CAUTION
When the buzzer sounds and the warning
light illuminates, be sure to check both
the vehicle and the Intelligent Key.
WARNING SIGNALS
To help prevent the vehicle from moving unex-
pectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent
Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being
stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and
outside the vehicle and a warning light comes on
in the instrument panel.
When a chime or beep sounds or the warning
light comes on, be sure to check the vehicle and
the Intelligent Key.
Audible reminder and warning when
locking the doors
When the chime or buzzer sounds from inside
and outside the vehicle, check for the following:
●The ignition switch is placed in the LOCK
position.
●The Intelligent Key is not left inside the ve-
hicle.
●The shift selector is in the P (Park) position.
Audible reminder and warning when
the engine stops
When the P position selecting warning light
() in the instrument panel blinks in red:
●Make sure the shift selector is in the P (Park)
position.
When the chime sounds intermittently:
●Make sure the shift selector is in the P (Park)
position and the ignition switch is placed in
the LOCK position.
If the chime sounds continuously when the driv-
er’s door is opened, check the following:
●The shift selector is placed in the P (Park)
position and the ignition switch is placed in
the LOCK position.
●The mechanical key is not inserted into the
ignition switch.
●The warning chime may stop when one of
the following is performed:
– Returning the ignition switch to the LOCK
position.
– Removing the mechanical key.
– Closing the doors.
Alarm and warning when the engine
starts
When the Intelligent Key system warning light
() blinks red and the outside buzzer
sounds, make sure the Intelligent Key is inside the
vehicle.
Warning for low battery power
When the Intelligent Key battery is low, the Intel-
ligent Key system warning light ( ) will blink
green for about 30 seconds after the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position. This warning
is to let you know that the battery of the Intelligent
Key will run down soon. Replace it with a new
one. Refer to “Battery replacement” in the “Main-
tenance and do-it-yourself” section.
NISSAN recommends replacing the battery at a
NISSAN dealer.
Preventing the Intelligent Key from
being left in the vehicle
If you lock all doors using the power door lock
switch with the Intelligent Key in the vehicle, all of
the doors unlock immediately and the buzzer will
warn you when the door is closed.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21
Information Provided by:
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Symptom Possible Cause Remedy
When pushing the door handle request
switch The front door beep sounds for approxi-
mately 2 seconds. The doors cannot be locked. Take out the Intelligent Key from the vehicle
and push the door handle request switch.
When closing the doors
The front door beep sounds for approxi-
mately 10 seconds. The ignition knob is not placed in the LOCK
position. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK
position.
The key warning light in the instrument
panel blinks in red and the front door warn-
ing beep sounds for approximately 3
seconds.
The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you.
The front door beep sounds for approxi-
mately 3 seconds and all doors unlock. The Intelligent Key is left in the vehicle. Take out the Intelligent Key from the vehicle
and close the door.
When opening the driver’s door A warning chime sounds continuously. The ignition switch is not in the LOCK
position, or the mechanical key is inserted
into the ignition switch.
Place the ignition switch in the LOCK
position.
Remove the mechanical key from the igni-
tion switch.
When stopping the engine The P (Park) position warning light in the
instrument panel blinks in red. The shift selector is not in the P (Park)
position. Make sure that the shift selector is in the P
(Park) position and place the ignition switch
in the LOCK position.
When starting the engine The key warning light in the instrument
panel blinks in green. The battery charge is low. Replace the battery with a new one. See
“Battery replacement” in the “Maintenance
and do-it-yourself” section.
When turning the ignition switch A warning chime sounds continuously. The ignition switch is not placed in the
LOCK position. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK
position.
When pushing the ignition switch The Intelligent Key warning light in the in-
strument panel illuminates red. The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle. If the Intelligent Key warning light illumi-
nates red even while you are carrying the
Intelligent Key, the battery is completely
discharged. Replace the battery with a new
one. See “Battery replacement” in the
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.
3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Information Provided by:
1. Pull the hood lock release handle 䊊
1located
below the instrument panel until the hood
springs up slightly.
2. Locate the lever 䊊
2in between the hood and
grille and push the lever sideways with your
fingertips.
3. Raise the hood 䊊
3.
4. Remove the support rod 䊊
4and insert it into
the slot on the underside of the hood 䊊
5.
When closing the hood, return the support rod to
its original position, lower the hood to approxi-
mately 12 inches (30 cm) above the latch and
release it. This allows proper engagement of the
hood latch.
WARNING
●Make sure the hood is completely
closed and latched before driving. Fail-
ure to do so could cause the hood to fly
open and result in an accident.
●If you see steam or smoke coming from
the engine compartment, to avoid injury
do not open the hood.
WARNING
●Do not drive with the trunk lid open. This
could allow dangerous exhaust gases
to be drawn into the vehicle. See “Ex-
haust gas” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
●Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously in-
jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear
seatback and trunk lid securely latched
when not in use, and prevent children’s
access to car keys.
WPD0383
HOOD TRUNK LID
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23
Information Provided by:
TRUNK LID RELEASE
The trunk lid release is located on the floor to the
left of the driver’s seat. To open the trunk lid, pull
the trunk lid release.
To close the trunk lid, lower and push the trunk lid
down securely.
You can also open the trunk lid with the keyfob (if
so equipped) or Intelligent Key (if so equipped).
Refer to “Remote keyless entry system” or
“NISSAN Intelligent Key™” in this section.
KEY OPERATION (if so equipped)
To open the trunk lid, turn the key clockwise. To
close the trunk lid, lower and push the trunk lid
down securely.
INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE
WARNING
Closely supervise children when they are
around cars to prevent them from playing
and becoming locked in the trunk where
they could be seriously injured. Keep the
car locked, with the rear seatback and
trunk lid securely latched when not in use,
and prevent children’s access to car keys.
The interior trunk lid release mechanism provides
a means of escape for children and adults in the
event they become locked inside the trunk.
Driver’s side
WPD0390 WPD0384 WPD0385
3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Information Provided by:
To open the trunk from the inside, pull the illumi-
nated release handle until the lock releases and
push up on the trunk lid. The release handle is
made of a material that glows in the dark after a
brief exposure to ambient light.
The handle is located inside the trunk compart-
ment on the interior of the trunk lid.
OPENER OPERATION
The fuel-filler door release is located on the floor
to the left of the driver’s seat. To open the fuel-
filler door, push the release. To lock, close the
fuel-filler door securely.
FUEL-FILLER CAP
The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn the
cap counterclockwise to remove. To tighten, turn
the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are
heard.
Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder 䊊
1while
refueling.
LPD0386 LPD0387
FUEL-FILLER DOOR
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25
Information Provided by:
WARNING
●Gasoline is extremely flammable and
highly explosive under certain condi-
tions. You could be burned or seriously
injured if it is misused or mishandled.
Always stop the engine and do not
smoke or allow open flames or sparks
near the vehicle when refueling.
●Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank
after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off
automatically. Continued refueling may
cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel
spray and possibly a fire.
●Use only an original equipment type
fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a
built-in safety valve needed for proper
operation of the fuel system and emis-
sion control system. An incorrect cap
can result in a serious malfunction and
possible injury. It could also cause the
malfunction indicator light to come on.
●Never pour fuel into the throttle body to
attempt to start your vehicle.
●Do not fill a portable fuel container in
the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity
can cause an explosion of flammable
liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or
trailer. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death when filling portable fuel
containers:
– Always place the container on the
ground when filling.
– Do not use electronic devices when
filling.
– Keep the pump nozzle in contact
with the container while you are fill-
ing it.
– Use only approved portable fuel con-
tainers for flammable liquid.
CAUTION
●If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,
flush it away with water to avoid paint
damage.
●Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the
fuel-filler tube, then tighten until the
fuel-filler cap clicks. Failure to tighten
the fuel-filler cap properly may cause
the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) to illuminate. If the light
illuminates because the fuel-filler cap
is loose or missing, tighten or install the
cap and continue to drive the vehicle.
The light should turn off after a
few driving trips. If the light
does not turn off after a few driving
trips, have the vehicle inspected by a
NISSAN dealer
●For additional information, see the
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in
the “Instruments and Controls” section
in this manual.
3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Information Provided by:
TILT OPERATION
Push the lock lever 䊊
1down and adjust the
steering wheel up or down 䊊
2to the desired
position.
Pull the lock lever up to lock the steering wheel in
place.
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving. You could lose control of your
vehicle and cause an accident.
To block out glare from the front, swing down the
sun visor 䊊
1.
To block glare from the side, disconnect the sun
visor from the center mount and swing it to the
side 䊊
2.
VANITY MIRRORS (if so equipped)
To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor
down and flip open the mirror cover. Some vanity
mirrors are illuminated and turn on when the
mirror cover is open.
LPD0388
SIC2872
LPD0389
STEERING WHEEL SUN VISORS
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27
Information Provided by:
REARVIEW MIRROR
The night position 䊊
1reduces glare from the
headlights of vehicles behind you at night.
Use the day position 䊊
2when driving in daylight
hours.
WARNING
Use the night position only when neces-
sary, because it reduces rear view clarity.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
WARNING
Objects viewed in the outside mirror on
the passenger side are closer than they
appear. Be careful when moving to the
right. Using only this mirror could cause
an accident. Use the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder to properly
judge distances to other objects.
Manual control type (if so equipped)
The outside mirror can be moved in any direction
for a better rear view.
WPD0126 LPD0029
MIRRORS
3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Information Provided by:
Electric control type (if so equipped)
The outside mirror remote control only operates
when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position.
Rotate the control lever to select the right or left
mirror. Adjust the mirror to the desired position by
moving the control lever.
Heated mirrors (Canada only) (if so
equipped)
Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost,
defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. Push the
rear window defroster switch to activate the heat-
ing function. Push the switch again to deactivate,
or the heating function will automatically turn off
after approximately 15 minutes.
WPD0274
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29
Information Provided by:
4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner,
audio and phone systems
Control panel buttons — color screen with
Navigation System (if so equipped) ..................4-2
How to use the touch screen ....................4-3
How to use the back button .....................4-5
How to use the SETUP button ...................4-5
button...................................4-8
RearView Monitor (if so equipped)...................4-8
How to read the displayed lines ..................4-9
Difference between predicted and actual
distances ......................................4-9
Adjusting the screen
(models without Navigation System) .............4-12
Adjusting the screen
(models with Navigation System) ................4-12
Operating tips.................................4-13
Vents ...........................................4-14
Heater and air conditioner (manual).................4-14
Controls......................................4-16
Heater operation ..............................4-17
Air conditioner operation (if so equipped) ........4-18
Air flow charts.................................4-19
Servicing air conditioner (if so equipped) ............4-22
Audio system ....................................4-23
Radio ........................................4-23
FM radio reception ............................4-23
AM radio reception ............................4-23
Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) .........4-24
Audio operation precautions ....................4-24
FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) player
(Type A) (if so equipped) .......................4-31
FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) player
(Type B) (if so equipped) .......................4-34
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
player (Type A) (if so equipped) .................4-38
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
player (Type B) (if so equipped) .................4-44
USB interface (models without Navigation
System) (if so equipped) .......................4-50
USB interface (models with Navigation
System) ......................................4-52
iPod姞* Player Operation without Navigation
System (Type A) (if so equipped) ................4-54
iPod姞* Player Operation without Navigation
System (Type B) (if so equipped) ................4-55
iPod姞* Player Operation with Navigation
System (if so equipped) ........................4-57
Information Provided by:
CD care and cleaning..........................4-59
Steering wheel switch for audio control
(if so equipped) ...............................4-60
Antenna ......................................4-61
Car phone or CB radio............................4-62
Bluetooth姞Hands-Free Phone System
(if so equipped) ..................................4-62
Regulatory Information . ........................4-64
Using the system ..............................4-64
Control buttons ...............................4-66
Getting started ................................4-67
List of voice commands ........................4-69
Speaker adaptation (SA) mode..................4-73
Manual Control................................4-75
Troubleshooting guide . . . ......................4-76
Information Provided by:
WARNING
●Do not disassemble or modify this sys-
tem. If you do, it may result in accidents,
fire, or electrical shock.
●In case you notice any foreign object in
the system hardware, spill liquid on it,
or notice smoke or smell coming from
it, stop using the system immediately
and contact your nearest NISSAN
dealer. Ignoring such conditions may
lead to accidents, fire or electrical
shock.
CAUTION
Do not use this system if you notice any
abnormality, such as a frozen screen or
lack of sound. Continued use of the sys-
tem may result in accident, fire or electric
shock.
1. (brightness control) button
2. Display screen
3. MAP button*
4. NAV button*
5. TRAF button*
6. SETUP button (P. 4-5)
7. BACK button
8. TUNE/SCROLL knob
LHA1474
CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —
COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
4-2 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Information Provided by:
9. Power button/Volume control knob
*For Navigation system control buttons, refer to
the separate Navigation System Owner’s
Manual.
When you use this system, make sure the engine
is running.
If you use the system with the engine not
running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long
time, it will discharge the battery, and the
engine will not start.
Reference symbols:
“Example” — Words marked in quotes refer to a
key shown only on the display. These keys can be
selected by touching the screen.
HOW TO USE THE TOUCH
SCREEN
CAUTION
●The glass screen on the liquid crystal
display may break if it is hit with a hard
or sharp object. If the glass breaks, do
not touch the liquid crystalline material,
which contains a small amount of mer-
cury. In case of contact with skin, wash
immediately with soap and water.
●To clean the display, never use a rough
cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any
kind of solvent or paper towel with a
chemical cleaning agent. They will
scratch or deteriorate the panel.
●Do not splash any liquid such as water
or car fragrance on the display. Contact
with liquid will cause the system to
malfunction.
To help ensure safe driving, some functions can-
not be operated while driving.
The on-screen functions that are not available
while driving will be “grayed out” or muted.
Park the vehicle in a safe location and then oper-
ate the navigation system.
WARNING
●ALWAYS give your full attention to
driving.
●Avoid using vehicle features that could
distract you. If distracted, you could
lose control of your vehicle and cause
an accident.
Touch screen operation
Selecting the item:
Touch an item to select. For example, to select
the “Audio” key, touch the “Audio” key 䊊
1on the
screen.
LHA1476
Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-3
Information Provided by:
Adjusting the item:
For screens where an item can be adjusted incre-
mentally, such as when adjusting the bass and
treble for the audio system, touch the “+” key 䊊
1
or the “⫺” key 䊊
2to adjust the settings of an item.
When there are more items than can be dis-
played on one screen, touch the up arrow 䊊
3to
scroll up the page or touch the down arrow 䊊
4to
scroll down the page.
Other items are adjusted by selecting one of a set
number of conditions. For example, the Display
Mode can be set to “Automatic”, “Day”or “Night”.
To adjust this type of item, touch the item 䊊
1. The
item will cycle through the available settings and
the red indicator lights to the left of the setting
condition 䊊
2will come on or turn off accordingly.
Inputting characters:
Touch the letter key 䊊
1.
There are some options available when inputting
characters.
●123 / ABC:
Changes the available character set to num-
bers.
●Space:
Inserts a space.
●Delete:
Deletes the last inputted character with one
touch. Touch and hold the “Delete” key to
delete all of the characters.
LHA1477 LHA1478 LHA1479
4-4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Information Provided by:
●OK:
Completes the character input.
Touch screen maintenance
If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft
cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a
small amount of neutral detergent with a soft
cloth. Never spray the screen with water or de-
tergent. Dampen the cloth first and then wipe the
screen.
HOW TO USE THE BACK BUTTON
Press the BACK button to return to the
previous screen.
HOW TO USE THE SETUP BUTTON
When the SETUP button is pressed, the Setup
screen will appear on the display. You can select
and/or adjust several functions, features and
modes that are available for your vehicle.
Audio setup
For audio setup, refer to “Audio System” in this
section.
Navigation setup
Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual for information regarding this item.
XM setup
For XM setup, refer to “Audio System” in this
section.
LHA1480
Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-5
Information Provided by:
System setup
Select the “System” key to select and/or adjust
various functions of the system. A screen with
additional options will appear.
Display:
Select the “Display” key to adjust the appearance
of the display. The following settings can be
adjusted:
Brightness
The brightness of the display can be set to Very
Bright, Bright, Default, Dark or Very Dark. Touch
the “Brightness” key to cycle through the options.
Display Mode
The display can be adjusted to fit the level of
lighting in the vehicle. Touch the “Display Mode”
key to cycle through the options. “Day” and
“Night” modes are suited for the respective times
of day, while “Automatic” controls the display
automatically.
Scroll Direction
The direction that menus scroll can be adjusted.
Choose either “up” or “down”.
LHA1481 LHA1482
4-6 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Information Provided by:
Clock:
Select the “Clock” key to adjust the time and the
appearance of the clock on the display. The fol-
lowing settings can be adjusted:
Time Format
The clock can be set to 12 hours or 24 hours.
Use GPS Clock
When this setting is activated, the clock is set
and continually updated via the GPS used by the
Navigation System.
Set Clock Manually
When this setting is activated, the clock can be
set manually. Touch the “+”or “-” key to adjust the
hours and minutes up or down.
Daylight Savings Time
When this setting is activated, daylight savings
time is on. Touch the “Daylight Savings Time” key
to toggle the setting on or off.
Time Zone
Choose the applicable time zone from the list.
Language:
Select the “Language” key to adjust the language
used by the system. The language can be set to
English, Français or Español.
Touch click:
Select the “Touch Click” key to toggle the touch
click feature on or off. When activated, a click
sound will be heard every time a key on the
screen is touched.
LHA1483 LHA1484 LHA1485
Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-7
Information Provided by:
Beep tones:
Select the “Beep Tones” key to toggle the beep
tones feature on or off. When activated, a beep
sound will be heard when a pop-up message
appears on the screen or a button on the unit
(such as the button) is pressed and held
for two seconds.
Reset all settings/memory:
Select the “Reset All Settings/Memory” key to
return all settings to default and to clear the
memory.
Traffic setup
Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual for information regarding this item.
BUTTON
To change the display brightness, press
the button. Pressing the button again will
change the display to the day or the night display.
If no operation is performed within 5 seconds, the
display will return to the previous display.
Press and hold the button for more than
two seconds to turn the display off. Press the
button again to turn the display on.
When the shift selector is shifted into the R
(Reverse) position, the monitor display shows the
view directly to the rear of the vehicle.
WARNING
●The system is designed as an aid to the
driver in detecting large stationary ob-
jects to help avoid damaging the ve-
hicle. The system will not detect small
objects below the bumper, and may not
detect objects close to the bumper or
on the ground.
●The RearView Monitor is a convenience
but it is not a substitute for proper back-
ing. Always turn and check that it is safe
to do so before backing up. Always
back up slowly.
●Objects viewed in the RearView Moni-
tor differ from actual distance because
a wide-angle lens is used.
●Make sure that the trunk is securely
closed when backing up.
●Underneath the bumper and the corner
areas of the bumper cannot be viewed
on the RearView Monitor because of its
monitoring range limitation.
●Do not put anything on the rearview
camera. The rearview camera is in-
stalled beside the license plate light.
●When washing the vehicle with high-
pressure water, be sure not to spray it
around the camera. Otherwise, water
may enter the camera unit causing wa-
ter condensation on the lens, a mal-
function, fire or an electric shock.
●Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-
sion instrument. Otherwise, it may mal-
function or cause damage resulting in a
fire or an electric shock.
CAUTION
There is a plastic cover over the camera.
Do not scratch the cover when cleaning
dirt or snow from the cover.
REARVIEW MONITOR (if so
equipped)
4-8 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Information Provided by:
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED
LINES
Lines which indicate the vehicle clearance and
distances to objects with reference to the
bumper line 䊊
Aare displayed on the monitor.
They are indicated as reference distances to
objects. The lines and colors in the display indi-
cate distances from the back bumper line 䊊
Ain
the illustration.
䊊
11.5 ft (0.5 m) red
䊊
23 ft (1 m) yellow
䊊
37 ft (2 m) green
䊊
410 ft (3 m) green (models without Navigation
System only)
The vehicle clearance lines are wider than
the actual clearance.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN
PREDICTED AND ACTUAL
DISTANCES
The distance guide line and the vehicle width
guide line should be used as a reference only
when the vehicle is on a level, paved surface. The
distance viewed on the monitor is for reference
only and may be different than the actual distance
between the vehicle and displayed objects.
Without Navigation System
LHA0437
With Navigation System
WHA1531
Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-9
Information Provided by:
Backing up on a steep uphill
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the dis-
tance guide lines and the vehicle width guide
lines are shown closer than the actual distance.
For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to the
place 䊊
A, but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m) distance on
the hill is the place 䊊
B. Note that any object on
the hill is viewed in the monitor farther than it
appears.
Backing up on a steep downhill
When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide
lines are shown farther than the actual distance.
For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to the
place 䊊
A, but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m) distance on
WHA1504 WHA1505
4-10 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Information Provided by:
the hill is the place 䊊
B. Note that any object on
the hill is viewed in the monitor closer than it
appears.
Backing up behind a projecting object
The position 䊊
Cis shown farther than the position
䊊
Bin the display. However, the position 䊊
Cis
actually at the same distance as the position 䊊
A.
The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to
the position 䊊
Aif the object projects over the
actual backing up course.
WHA1506
Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-11
Information Provided by:
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN (models
without Navigation System)
To adjust the quality of the screen, press the
setting control knob on the audio system.
●To adjust the Brightness or Contrast, press
the setting control knob repeatedly until the
setting you wish to adjust is displayed. Use
the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust the dis-
play to the desired level.
●Do not adjust the Brightness or Contrast of
the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is
moving.
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN (models
with Navigation System)
To adjust the quality of the screen, perform the
following:
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Touch “System”.
3. Touch “Display”.
4. To adjust the brightness, touch the “Bright-
ness” key repeatedly to set the display to
Very Bright, Bright, Default, Dark or Very
Dark. Touch “Display Mode” to cycle be-
tween day, night and automatic display
modes.
Do not adjust the screen settings of the RearView
Monitor while the vehicle is moving.
LHA1272 LHA1480 LHA1482
4-12 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Information Provided by:
OPERATING TIPS
●When the shift selector is shifted to R (Re-
verse), the monitor screen automatically
changes to the RearView Monitor mode.
However, the radio can be heard.
●It may take some time until the RearView
Monitor is displayed after the shift selector
has been shifted to R (Reverse). Objects
may be distorted momentarily until the Rear-
View Monitor screen is displayed com-
pletely. When the shift selector is returned to
a position other than R (Reverse), it may take
some time until the screen changes. Objects
on the screen may be distorted until they are
completely displayed.
●When the temperature is extremely high or
low, the screen may not clearly display ob-
jects. This is not a malfunction.
●When strong light directly enters the cam-
era, objects may not be displayed clearly.
●Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the
screen. This is due to strong reflected light
from the bumper. This is not a malfunction.
●The screen may flicker under fluorescent
light. This is not a malfunction.
●The colors of objects on the RearView Moni-
tor may differ somewhat from those of the
actual object.
●When the contrast of objects is low at night,
pressing the setting control knob or SETUP
button may not change the brightness.
●Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a
dark place or at night.
●If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera,
the RearView Monitor may not display ob-
jects. Clean the camera.
●Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to
clean the camera. This will cause discolora-
tion. To clean the camera, wipe with a cloth
dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent
and then wipe with a dry cloth.
●Do not damage the camera as the monitor
screen may be adversely affected.
●Do not use body wax on the camera window.
If body wax does get on the camera window,
wipe off the wax with a clean cloth damp-
ened with mild detergent diluted with water.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-13
Information Provided by:
Adjust air flow direction for the driver’s and pas-
senger’s side 䊊
1, and center 䊊
2ventilators by
moving the ventilator slide and/or ventilator as-
semblies.
Open or close the ventilators 䊊
1by using the dial.
Move the dial toward the to open the ven-
tilators or toward the to close them.
WARNING
●The air conditioner cooling function op-
erates only when the engine is running.
●Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.
●Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior
air to become stale and the windows to
fog up.
WHA0772
VENTS HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(manual)
4-14 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Information Provided by:
1. Fan control dial
2. Air recirculation button
3. Temperature control dial
4. Air flow control dial
5. Rear window defroster
Type A
WHA0470
Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-15
Information Provided by:
1. Fan control dial
2. Air recirculation button
3. Temperature control dial
4. Air conditioner button
5. Air flow control dial
6. Rear window defroster
CONTROLS
Fan control dial
The fan control dial turns the fan on and off, and
controls fan speed.
Air flow control dial
The air flow control dial allows you to select the
air flow outlets.
MAX A/C — Air flows from center and side
vents with maximum cooling
(air conditioning if so
equipped).
— Air flows from center and side
vents.
— Air flows from center and side
vents and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from foot
outlets.
— Air flows from defroster outlets
and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from defroster
outlets.
●
You can also select the middle position
between and or between
and .
●When the , or position is
selected, the air recirculation mode
cannot be turned on. This prevents the win-
dows from fogging.
Temperature control dial
The temperature control dial allows you to adjust
the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the
temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase
the temperature, turn the dial to the right.
Air recirculation button
NOTE:
The air recirculation feature is available
only on those vehicles equipped with air
conditioning.
Type B
LHA0440
4-16 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Information Provided by:
On position (Indicator light on):
Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.
Press the button to the on position when:
●driving on a dusty road.
●to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas-
senger compartment.
●for maximum cooling when using the air con-
ditioner.
When the button is pressed, the air con-
ditioner automatically turns on and the indicator
illuminates. When the button is pressed
again, the air recirculation mode turns off, but the
air conditioner remains on.
Off position (Indicator light off):
Outside air is drawn into the passenger compart-
ment and distributed through the selected outlet.
Use the off position for normal heater or air con-
ditioner operation.
Air conditioner button (if so
equipped)
The button is provided only on vehicles equipped
with an air conditioner.
Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the
desired position and push the button to
turn on the air conditioner. The indicator light
comes on when the air conditioner is operating.
To turn off the air conditioner, push the
button again.
The air conditioner cooling function oper-
ates only when the engine is running.
Rear window defroster switch
For more information about the rear window de-
froster switch, see “Rear window and outside
mirror defroster switch” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.
HEATER OPERATION
Heating
This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot
outlets. Some air also flows from the defrost
outlets and outboard vents.
1. Push the button to the off position for
normal heating.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position between the middle and the
hot position.
Ventilation
This mode directs outside air to the side and
center vents.
1. Push the button to the off position.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position.
Defrosting or defogging
This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets
and outboard vents to defrost/defog the win-
dows.
1. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position between the middle and the
hot position.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-17
Information Provided by:
●To quickly remove ice or fog from the win-
dows, turn the fan control dial to HI and the
temperature control lever to the full HOT
position.
●When the or position is se-
lected, the air conditioner automatically
turns on (however, the indicator light will not
illuminate). In this position, the A/C cannot
be turned off. When the air flow control dial
is turned to any position other than
or , the A/C light will illuminate (the
A/C will continue operating) and can be
turned off using the A/C button. This dehu-
midifies the air which helps defog the wind-
shield. The mode automatically turns
off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the
passenger compartment to further improve
the defogging performance.
Bi-level heating
This mode directs air from the side, center and
the foot outlets.
1. Push the button to the off position.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position.
Heating and defogging
This mode heats the interior and defogs the wind-
shield.
1. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position between the middle and the
hot position.
●When the or position is se-
lected, the air conditioner automatically
turns on (however, the indicator light will not
illuminate). In this position, the A/C cannot
be turned off. When the air flow control dial
is turned to any position other than
or the A/C light will illuminate (the
A/C will continue operating) and can be
turned off using the A/C button. This dehu-
midifies the air which helps defog the wind-
shield. The mode automatically turns
off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the
passenger compartment to further improve
the defogging performance.
Operating tips
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades
and air inlet in front of the windshield. This
improves heater operation.
AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION (if
so equipped)
Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the
desired position, and push in the button to
activate the air conditioner. When the air condi-
tioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions
are added to the heater operation.
The air conditioner cooling function oper-
ates only when the engine is running.
Cooling
This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.
1. Push the button to the off position.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the MAX A/C
or position.
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
4. Push the button. The indicator light
comes on.
5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position.
4-18 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Information Provided by:
●For quick cooling when the outside tem-
perature is high, push the button to
the on position (indicator light on). Be sure
to return the button to the off position
for normal cooling. MAX A/C may be used
for quick cooling.
Dehumidified heating
This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.
1. Push the button to the off position.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
4. Push the button. The indicator light
comes on.
5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position.
Dehumidified defogging
This mode is used to defog the windows and
dehumidify the air.
1. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
3. Push the button. The indicator light
comes on.
When the or position is selected,
the air conditioner automatically turns on (how-
ever, the indicator light will not illuminate). In this
position, the A/C cannot be turned off. When the
air flow control is turned to any position other
than or the A/C light will illuminate
(the A/C will continue operating) and can be
turned off using the A/C button. This dehumidi-
fies the air which helps defog the windshield.
The mode automatically turns off, allowing
outside air to be drawn into the passenger com-
partment to further improve the defogging perfor-
mance.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position.
Operating tips
●Keep the windows and moonroof closed
while the air conditioner is in operation.
●After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3
minutes with the windows open to vent hot
air from the passenger compartment. Then,
close the windows. This allows the air con-
ditioner to cool the interior more quickly.
●The air conditioning system should be
operated for approximately 10 minutes
at least once a month. This helps pre-
vent damage to the system due to lack
of lubrication.
●A visible mist may be seen coming from the
vents in hot, humid conditions as the air is
cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a mal-
function.
●If the engine coolant temperature
gauge indicates engine coolant tem-
perature over the normal range, turn
the air conditioner off. See “If your
vehicle overheats” in the “In case of
emergency” section of this manual.
AIR FLOW CHARTS
The following charts show the button and dial
positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,
cooling or defrosting. The air recirculation
button should always be in the OFF posi-
tion for heating and defrosting.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-19
Information Provided by:
WHA1116 WHA1117
4-20 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Information Provided by:
WHA1118 WHA1119
Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-21
Information Provided by:
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve-
hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with
the environment in mind.
This refrigerant does not harm the earth’s
ozone layer.
Special charging equipment and lubricant is re-
quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi-
tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants
will cause severe damage to your air conditioner
system. See “Air conditioner system refrigerant
and oil recommendations” in the “Technical and
consumer information” section of this manual.
A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environ-
mentally friendly” air conditioning system.
WARNING
The air conditioner system contains re-
frigerant under high pressure. To avoid
personal injury, any air conditioner ser-
vice should be done only by an experi-
enced technician with proper equipment.
WHA1121
SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER (if so
equipped)
4-22 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Information Provided by:
RADIO
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and press the POWER/VOLUME con-
trol knob to turn the radio on. If you listen to the
radio with the engine not running, the ignition
switch should be placed in the ACC position.
Radio reception is affected by station signal
strength, distance from radio transmitter, build-
ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ-
ences. Intermittent changes in reception quality
normally are caused by these external influences.
Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-
hicle may influence radio reception quality.
Radio reception
Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with
state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra-
dio reception. These circuits are designed to
extend reception range, and to enhance the qual-
ity of that reception.
However, there are some general characteristics
of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect
radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even
when the finest equipment is used. These char-
acteristics are completely normal in a given re-
ception area and do not indicate any malfunction
in your NISSAN radio system.
Reception conditions will constantly change be-
cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,
signal distance and interference from other ve-
hicles can work against ideal reception. De-
scribed below are some of the factors that can
affect your radio reception.
Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to come
from the audio system speakers. Storing the de-
vice in a different location may reduce or elimi-
nate the noise.
FM RADIO RECEPTION
Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30 mi
(40 – 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM
having slightly more range than stereo FM. Exter-
nal influences may sometimes interfere with FM
station reception even if the FM station is within
25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is
directly related to the distance between the
transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-
of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same char-
acteristics as light. For example, they will reflect
off objects.
Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from
a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade
and/or drift.
Static and flutter: During signal interference from
buildings, large hills or due to antenna position
(usually in conjunction with increased distance
from the station transmitter), static or flutter can
be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the
treble control to reduce treble response.
Multipath reception: Because of the reflective
characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected
signals reach the receiver at the same time. The
signals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-
mentary flutter or loss of sound.
AM RADIO RECEPTION
AM signals, because of their low frequency, can
bend around objects and skip along the ground.
In addition, the signals can be bounced off the
ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of
these characteristics, AM signals are also sub-
ject to interference as they travel from transmitter
to receiver.
Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing
through freeway underpasses or in areas with
many tall buildings. It can also occur for several
seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in
areas where no obstacles exist.
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical
power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.
AUDIO SYSTEM
Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-23
Information Provided by:
SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so
equipped)
When the satellite radio is used for the first time
or the battery has been replaced, the satellite
radio may not work properly. This is not a mal-
function. Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite
radio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal or
large building for satellite radio to receive all of
the necessary data.
No satellite radio reception is available when the
RADIO button is pressed to access satellite radio
stations unless optional satellite receiver and an-
tenna are installed and an XM姞satellite radio
service subscription is active. Satellite radio is
not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
Satellite radio performance may be affected if
cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio
signal.
If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite
antenna.
A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can
affect satellite radio performance. Remove the
ice to restore satellite radio reception. AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS
Compact disc (CD) player
CAUTION
●Do not force a compact disc into the CD
insert slot. This could damage the CD
and/or CD player.
●Trying to load a CD with the CD door
closed could damage the CD and/or CD
player.
●Only one CD can be loaded into the CD
player at a time.
●Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)
round discs that have the “COMPACT
disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc
or packaging.
●During cold weather or rainy days, the
player may malfunction due to the hu-
midity. If this occurs, remove the CD
and dehumidify or ventilate the player
completely.
●The player may skip while driving on
rough roads.
●The CD player sometimes cannot func-
tion when the compartment tempera-
ture is extremely high or low.
Decrease/increase the temperature
before use.
LHA0099
4-24 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Information Provided by:
●Do not expose the CD to direct sun-
light.
●CDs that are in poor condition or are
dirty, scratched or covered with finger-
prints may not work properly.
●The following CDs may not work prop-
erly:
●Copy control compact discs (CCCD)
●Recordable compact discs (CD-R)
●Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)
●Do not use the following CDs as they
may cause the CD player to malfunc-
tion:
●3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter
●CDs that are not round
●CDs with a paper label
●CDs that are warped, scratched, or
have abnormal edges
●This audio system can only play pre-
recorded CDs. It has no capability to
record or burn CDs.
●If the CD cannot be played, one of the
following messages will be displayed.
CHECK DISC:
●Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-
rectly (the label side is facing up,
etc.).
●Confirm that the CD is not bent or
warped and it is free of scratches.
PRESS EJECT:
This is an error due to excessive tem-
perature inside the player. Remove the
CD by pressing the EJECT button. After
a short time, reinsert the CD. The CD
can be played when the temperature of
the player returns to normal.
UNPLAYABLE:
The file is unplayable in this audio sys-
tem (only MP3 or WMA (if so equipped)
CD).
Compact Disc with MP3 or WMA (if
so equipped)
Terms:
●MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the
most well-known compressed digital audio
file format. This format allows for near “CD
quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of
normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an
audio track from CD-ROM can reduce the
file size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with
virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3
compression removes the redundant and
irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the
human ear doesn’t hear.
●WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is a
compressed audio format created by Mi-
crosoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA
codec offers greater file compression than
the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more
digital audio tracks in the same amount of
space when compared to MP3s at the same
level of quality.
●Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of
bits per second used by a digital music file.
The size and quality of a compressed digital
audio file is determined by the bit rate used
when encoding the file.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-25
Information Provided by:
●Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency
is the rate at which the samples of a signal
are converted from analog to digital (A/D
conversion) per second.
●Multisession — Multisession is one of the
methods for writing data to media. Writing
data once to the media is called a single
session, and writing more than once is called
a multisession.
●ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the
part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that
contains information about the digital music
file such as song title, artist, encoding bit
rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag infor-
mation is displayed on the Artist/song title
line on the display.
* Windows姞and Windows Media姞are regis-
tered trademarks and trademarks in the United
States of America and other countries of Mi-
crosoft Corporation of the USA.
Playback order:
Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or WMA
files is as illustrated.
●The names of folders not containing MP3 or
WMA files are not shown in the display.
●If there is a file in the top level of the disc,
“Root Folder” is displayed.
●The playback order is the order in which the
files were written by the writing software.
Therefore, the files might not play in the
desired order.
Playback order chart
WHA1078
4-26 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Information Provided by:
Specification chart:
Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW
Supported file systems ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
Supported
versions*1
MP3
Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5
Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz
Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR
WMA Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9
Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz
Bit rate 48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR
Tag information ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)
Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
Text character number limitation 128 characters
Displayable character codes*2 01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05:
UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)
*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-27
Information Provided by:
Troubleshooting guide:
Symptom Cause and Countermeasure
Cannot play
Check if the disc was inserted correctly.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”,“.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for
folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the disc is protected by copyright.
Poor sound quality Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Bit rate may be too low.
It takes a relatively long time
before the music starts
playing.
If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing.
Music cuts off or skips The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the
specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping with high bit rate
files
Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
Moves immediately to the
next song when playing
When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, there
will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.
Songs do not play back in
the desired order
The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.
4-28 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Information Provided by:
Universal Serial Bus (USB) memory (if
so equipped)
This system supports various USB memory
sticks, USB hard drives and iPod姞players. There
are some USB devices which may not be sup-
ported with this system.
●Make sure that the USB device is connected
correctly into the USB connector.
●Do not force the memory stick or USB cable
into the USB connector.
●During cold weather or rainy days, the player
may malfunction due to the humidity. If this
occurs, remove the USB memory stick and
dehumidify or ventilate the player com-
pletely.
●The player sometimes cannot function when
the passenger compartment temperature is
extremely high. Decrease the temperature
before use.
●Do not leave the USB memory in a place
prone to static electricity or where the air
conditioner blows directly. The data in the
USB memory may be damaged.
●Prepare the USB device by yourself be-
cause it is not equipped with the vehicle.
●The USB device cannot be formatted with
this system. If you want to format the USB
memory, use your personal computer.
●Partitioned USB devices may not be played
correctly.
●Some characters used in other languages
(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not displayed
properly on the vehicle center screen.
NISSAN recommends using English lan-
guage characters with USB devices.
●Do not connect the USB device if the con-
nector or cable is wet. Allow the cable
and/or connectors to dry completely before
connecting the USB device.
●Large video podcast files cause slow re-
sponses in the iPod姞. The vehicle center
display may momentarily black out, but it will
soon recover.
●If the iPod姞automatically selects large video
podcast files while in the shuffle mode, the
vehicle center display may momentarily
black out, but it will soon recover.
●Audiobooks may not play in the same order
as they appear on the iPod姞.
●The iPod姞nano (1st Generation) may re-
main in fast forward or rewind mode if it is
connected during a seek operation. In this
case, please manually reset the iPod姞.
●The iPod姞nano (2nd Generation) will con-
tinue to fast forward or rewind if it is discon-
nected during a seek operation.
●An incorrect song title may appear when the
Play Mode is changed while using the iPod姞
nano (2nd generation).
●If you are using an iPod姞(3rd Generation
with Dock connector), do not use very long
names for the song title, album name or artist
name to avoid the iPod姞resetting itself.
iPod姞is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
iPod姞* player (if so equipped)
●Some characters used in other languages
(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not displayed
properly on the vehicle center screen. We
recommend using English language charac-
ters with an iPod姞.
●Large video podcast files cause slow re-
sponses in the iPod姞. The vehicle center
display may momentarily black out, but it will
soon recover.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-29
Information Provided by:
●If the iPod姞automatically selects large video
podcast files while in the shuffle mode, the
vehicle center display may momentarily
black out, but it will soon recover.
●Improperly plugging in the iPod姞may cause
a checkmark to be displayed on and off
(flickering). Always make sure that the iPod姞
is connected properly.
●The iPod姞nano (2nd Generation) will con-
tinue to fast forward or rewind if it is discon-
nected during a seek operation.
●An incorrect song title may appear when the
Play Mode is changed while using the iPod姞
nano (2nd Generation).
●Audiobooks may not play in the same order
as they appear on the iPod姞.
●The iPod姞nano (1st Generation) may re-
main in fast forward or rewind mode if it is
connected during a seek operation. In this
case, please manually reset the iPod姞.
●If you are using an iPod姞(3rd Generation
with Dock connector), do not use very long
names for the song title, album name or artist
name to prevent the iPod姞from resetting
itself.
●Be careful not to do the following, or the
cable could be damaged and a loss of func-
tion may occur:
●Bend the cable excessively (1.6 in (40
mm) radius maximum).
●Twist the cable excessively (more than
180 degrees).
●Pull or drop the cable.
●Close the center console lid on the cable
or connectors.
●Store objects with sharp edges in the
storage where the cable is stored.
●Spill liquids on the cable and connectors.
●Do not connect the cable to the iPod姞if the
cable and/or connectors are wet. It may
damage the iPod姞.
●If the cable and connectors are exposed to
water, allow the cable and/or connectors to
dry completely before connecting the cable
to the iPod姞(wait 24 hours for it to dry).
●If the connector is exposed to fluids other
than water, evaporative residue may cause a
short between the connector pins. In this
case, replace the cable, otherwise damage
to the iPod姞and a loss of function may
occur.
●If the cable is damaged (insulation cut, con-
nectors cracked, contamination such as liq-
uids, dust, dirt, etc. in the connectors), do
not use the cable and contact a NISSAN
dealer to replace the cable with a new one.
●When not in use for extended periods of
time, store the cable in a clean, dust free
environment at room temperature and with-
out direct sun exposure.
●Do not use the cable for any other purposes
other than its intended use in the vehicle.
*iPod姞is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
4-30 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Information Provided by:
1. FM-AM button
2. CD eject button
3. SEEK button
4. CD button
5. CD insert slot
6. AUX button
7. TUNE button
8. MENU button
9. RPT button
10. AUX IN jack
11. VOLUME control knob
12. PWR button
13. SCAN button
14. RDM button
15. Station select (1 - 6) buttons
FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACT
DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type A) (if so
equipped)
For all operation precautions, see ⬙Audio opera-
tion precautions⬙in this section.
Audio main operation
POWER/VOLUME control:
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position. Press the PWR button while the system
is off to call up the mode (radio, CD or AUX) that
was playing immediately before the system was
turned off. While the system is on, pressing the
PWR button turns the system off.
Turn the VOL control knob to adjust the volume.
MENU button (Bass, Treble, Fade, Balance
and Clock):
Press the MENU button to change the mode as
follows:
BAS (Bass) →TRE (Treble) →FAD (Fade) →
BAL (Balance) →Clock →Normal mode
Type A
LHA1224
Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-31
Information Provided by:
Press the SEEK or or TUNE
or button to adjust the Bass, Treble, Fade
and Balance to the desired level. Fade adjusts
the sound level between the front and rear speak-
ers and Balance adjusts the sound between the
right and left speakers.
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the
desired level, press the MENU button repeatedly
until the radio or CD display reappears. If no
action is taken, the radio or CD display will auto-
matically reappear after approximately 10 sec-
onds.
Clock set
If the clock is not displayed with the ignition
switch in the ACC or ON position, you need to
select the CLK-ON mode. Press the MENU but-
ton repeatedly until CLK-OFF mode is displayed.
Use the TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER button to en-
able CLK-ON mode.
1. Press the MENU button repeatedly until
“Clock:” appears. The hours will begin flash-
ing.
2. Press the SEEK button or or
the TUNE button or to adjust
the hours.
3. Press the MENU button again. The minutes
will begin flashing.
4. Press the SEEK button or or
the TUNE button or to adjust
the minutes.
5. Press the MENU button again to exit the
clock set mode.
If no action is taken, the display will return to the
regular clock display after 10 seconds.
FM/AM radio operation
FM·AM button:
Press the FM·AM button to change the band as
follows:
AM →FM1 →FM2 →AM
If another audio source is playing when the
FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source play-
ing will automatically be turned off and the last
radio station played will begin playing.
The FM stereo indicator (ST) illuminates during
FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast
signal is weak, the radio automatically changes
from stereo to monaural reception.
TUNE button (Tuning):
Press the TUNE button or for
manual tuning.
SEEK tuning:
Press the SEEK button or to tune
from low to high or high to low frequencies and to
stop at the next broadcasting station.
SCAN tuning:
Press the SCAN button to stop at each broad-
casting station for 5 seconds. Pressing the but-
ton again during this 5 second period will stop
SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to
that station. If the SCAN button is not pressed
within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the
next station.
1 to 6 Station memory operations:
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6 for
FM1, 6 for FM2) and six stations can be set for
the AM band.
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the AM·FM select button.
2. Tune to the desired station using manual,
SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any
of the desired station memory buttons (1 –
6) until a beep sound is heard.
3. The channel indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Programming is now
complete.
4.
Other buttons can be set in the same manner.
4-32 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Information Provided by:
If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that
case, reset the desired stations.
Compact disc (CD) player operation
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and carefully insert the compact disc
into the slot with the label side up. The compact
disc is automatically pulled into the slot and starts
to play.
If the radio is already operating, it automatically
turns off and the compact disc begins to play.
CD button:
When the CD button is pressed with the system
off and the compact disc loaded, the system will
turn on and the compact disc will start to play.
When the CD button is pressed with a compact
disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio will
automatically be turned off and the compact disc
will start to play.
TUNE (Rewind or Fast
Forward) button:
When the TUNE button or is
pressed while the compact disc is playing, the
compact disc plays at an increased speed while
reversing or fast forwarding. When the button is
released, the compact disc returns to normal play
speed.
SEEK button:
When the SEEK button is pressed while
the compact disc is playing, the next track follow-
ing the present one starts to play from the begin-
ning. Press the SEEK button several times
to skip several tracks. Each time the button is
pressed, the CD advances one additional track.
The track number appears in the display window.
(When the last track on the compact disc is
skipped, the first track is played.)
When the SEEK button is pressed, the
track being played returns to the beginning.
Press the SEEK button several times to
skip back several tracks. Each time the button is
pressed the CD moves back one track.
RDM button:
When the RDM button is pressed while a com-
pact disc is playing, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:
1CDRDM←→ 1CDRPT
1 CD RDM: all tracks on the disc will be played
randomly.
1 CD RPT: play pattern returns to normal.
RPT button:
When the RPT button is pressed while a com-
pact disc is playing, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:
1TRRPT←→ 1CDRPT
1 TR RPT: the current track will be repeated.
1 CD RPT: play pattern returns to normal.
AUX (Auxiliary) button:
The AUX IN jack is located on the front of the
radio. The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any
standard analog audio input such as from a por-
table cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or a
laptop computer.
Press the AUX button to play a compatible device
when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack.
EJECT button:
When the button is pressed with a com-
pact disc loaded, the compact disc will eject and
the last source will be played.
When the button is pressed twice with a
compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be
ejected further for easier CD removal. If the disc
is not removed within 15 seconds, the disc will
reload.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-33
Information Provided by:
1. MUTE button
2. DISP/TEXT button
3. FM-AM button
4. CD button
5. CD insert slot
6. iPod button
7. AUX button
8. CLOCK button
9. CD eject button
10. TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER button
11. SCAN/RPT button
12. AUDIO button
13. AUX IN jack
14. Station select (1 - 6) buttons
15. VOLUME control knob
16. PWR button
17. iPod MENU button
18. BACK button
19. ENTER button
20. SEEK/TRACK button
FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACT
DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type B) (if so
equipped)
For all operation precautions, see ⬙Audio opera-
tion precautions⬙in this section.
Audio main operation
POWER/VOLUME control:
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position. Press the PWR button while the system
is off to call up the mode (radio, CD or AUX) that
was playing immediately before the system was
turned off. While the system is on, pressing the
PWR button turns the system off.
Turn the VOL control knob to adjust the volume.
Type B
LHA1225
4-34 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Information Provided by:
MUTE button:
Press the button to mute the audio sound.
Press the button again to resume playing
the audio at its previous volume.
AUDIO button (Bass, Treble, Fade, Bal-
ance, SSV, Beep):
Press the AUDIO button to change the mode as
follows:
Bass →Treble →Fade →Balance →Speed
Sensitive Volume (SSV) →Beep ON/OFF →
Normal mode
To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance, press
the AUDIO button until the desired mode ap-
pears in the display. Press the TUNE
or or SEEK or button to ad-
just the selected mode to the desired level. Fade
adjusts the sound level between the front and
rear speakers and Balance adjusts the sound
between the right and left speakers.
To change the Beep to ON or OFF, press the
TUNE button up or down until the desired mode
is displayed. This will enable or disable the beep
sound heard during menu selection.
To change the Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV)
mode to OFF, LOW, MID or HIGH, press the
TUNE button or until the desired
setting is displayed.
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the
desired level, press the AUDIO button repeatedly
until the radio or CD display reappears. If no
action is taken, the radio or CD display will auto-
matically reappear after approximately 5 sec-
onds.
Clock set
If the clock is not displayed with the ignition
switch in the ACC or ON position, you need to
select the CLK-ON mode. Press the MENU but-
ton repeatedly until CLK-OFF mode is displayed.
Use the TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER button to en-
able CLK-ON mode.
1. Press and hold the CLOCK button until the
clock display starts to flash.
2. Press the SEEK/TRACK button
or to adjust the hours.
3. Press the TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER
button or to adjust the minutes.
4. Press the CLOCK button again to exit the
clock set mode.
If no action is taken, the display will return to the
regular clock display after 10 seconds.
DISP (display) button
This button works during FM, CD and iPod姞
operation. See the detailed function for this but-
ton in the section for each mode.
iPOD姞MENU, ENTER and BACK buttons
These buttons can only be used for iPod姞opera-
tions. See “iPod姞Player Operation without Navi-
gation System (Type A)” in this section for details
about the functions of these buttons.
FM/AM radio operation
FM·AM button:
Press the FM·AM button to change the band as
follows:
AM →FM1 →FM2 →AM
If another audio source is playing when the
FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source play-
ing will automatically be turned off and the last
radio station played will begin playing.
The FM stereo indicator (ST) illuminates during
FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast
signal is weak, the radio automatically changes
from stereo to monaural reception.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-35
Information Provided by:
TUNE button (Tuning):
Press the TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER
button or for manual tuning.
SEEK tuning:
Press the SEEK/TRACK button or
to tune from low to high or high to low frequen-
cies and to stop at the next broadcasting station.
SCAN tuning:
Press the SCAN/RPT button to stop at each
broadcasting station for 5 seconds. Pressing the
button again during this 5 second period will stop
SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to
that station. If the SCAN/RPT button is not
pressed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves
to the next station.
1 to 6 Station memory operations:
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6 for
FM1, 6 for FM2) and six stations can be set for
the AM band.
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the AM·FM select button.
2. Tune to the desired station using manual,
SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any
of the desired station memory buttons (1 –
6) until a beep sound is heard.
3. The channel indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Programming is now
complete.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-
ner.
If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that
case, reset the desired stations.
DISP/TEXT button:
When the DISP/TEXT button is pressed while in
FM radio mode, the radio display will change as
follows:
Frequency →PTY →PS →Frequency
Compact disc (CD) player operation
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and carefully insert the compact disc
into the slot with the label side up. The compact
disc is automatically pulled into the slot and starts
to play.
If the radio is already operating, it automatically
turns off and the compact disc begins to play.
CD button:
When the CD button is pressed with the system
off and the compact disc loaded, the system will
turn on and the compact disc will start to play.
When the CD button is pressed with a compact
disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio will
automatically be turned off and the compact disc
will start to play.
DISP/TEXT button:
When the DISP/TEXT button is pressed while a
CD is playing, the display will change as follows:
CD:
Track number →Disc title →Song title →Track
number
CD with MP3 or WMA:
Track number →Folder title →Album title →
Artist →Song title →Track number
TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER
(Reverse or Fast Forward)
button:
CD:
When the TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER
button (fast forward) or (reverse) is
pressed while the compact disc is playing, the
compact disc plays at an increased speed while
reversing or fast forwarding. When the button is
released, the compact disc returns to normal play
speed.
4-36 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Information Provided by:
CD with MP3 or WMA:
When the TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER button
(fast forward) or (reverse) is
pressed for less than 1.5 seconds while the
compact disc is playing, the folders in the CD will
change.
When the TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER button
(fast forward) or (reverse) is
pressed for more than 1.5 seconds while the
compact disc is playing, the compact disc plays
at an increased speed while reversing or fast
forwarding. When the button is released, the
compact disc returns to normal play speed.
SEEK/TRACK button:
When the SEEK/TRACK button is
pressed while the compact disc is playing, the
next track following the present one starts to play
from the beginning. Press the SEEK/TRACK
button several times to skip several tracks.
Each time the button is pressed, the CD ad-
vances one additional track. The track number
appears in the display window. (When the last
track on the compact disc is skipped, the first
track is played.)
When the SEEK/TRACK button is
pressed, the track being played returns to the
beginning. Press the SEEK/TRACK
button several times to skip back several
tracks. Each time the button is pressed the CD
moves back one track.
SCAN/RPT button:
When the SCAN/RPT button is pressed while a
compact disc is playing, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:
CD:
REPEAT TRACK →RANDOM TRACK →RE-
PEAT DISC
CD with MP3 or WMA:
REPEAT FOLDER →REPEAT TRACK →RAN-
DOM TRACK →RANDOM FOLDER →REPEAT
DISC
REPEAT TRACK: the current track will be re-
peated.
RANDOM TRACK: all tracks on the disc will be
played randomly.
REPEAT DISC: play pattern returns to normal.
REPEAT FOLDER: the current folder will be re-
peated.
RANDOM FOLDER: all tracks in the current
folder will be played randomly.
AUX (Auxiliary) button:
The AUX IN jack is located on the front of the
radio. The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any
standard analog audio input such as from a por-
table cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or a
laptop computer.
Press the AUX button to play a compatible device
when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack.
EJECT button:
When the button is pressed with a com-
pact disc loaded, the compact disc will eject and
the last source will be played.
When the button is pressed twice with a
compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be
ejected further for easier CD removal. If the disc
is not removed within 15 seconds, the disc will
reload.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-37
Information Provided by:
1. SCAN button
2. Station select (1 - 6) buttons
3. CD insert slot
4. iPod MENU button
5. CD eject button
6. TUNE/FOLDER knob/Setting control
button
7. SEEK/TRACK buttons
8. AUX IN jack
9. AUX button*
10. CD button
11. FM-AM button
12. RPT button
13. POWER/VOLUME control knob
14. RDM button
*No satellite radio reception is available
when the AUX button is pressed to ac-
cess satellite radio stations unless op-
tional satellite receiver and antenna are
installed and an XM姞satellite radio ser-
vice subscription is active. Satellite ra-
dio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii
and Guam.
FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH
COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER
(Type A) (if so equipped)
For all operation precautions, see ⬙Audio opera-
tion precautions⬙in this section.
Audio main operation
VOL/ON·OFF control:
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and push the VOL/ON·OFF control knob
while the system is off to call up the mode (radio
or CD) that was playing immediately before the
system was turned off.
Type A
LHA1269
4-38 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Information Provided by:
To turn the system off, press the VOL/ON·OFF
control knob.
Turn the VOL/ON·OFF control knob to adjust the
volume.
This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen-
sitive Volume (SSV) for audio. When this feature
is active, the audio volume changes as the driving
speed changes.
Setting control knob (Audio, Display and
Clock):
Press the ENTER button to adjust the audio,
display and clock settings as follows:
Bass →Treble →Fade →Balance →Speed
Sensitive Volume (SSV) (if so equipped) →
Brightness →Contrast →On-screen Clock →
Clock Adjust →Bass
Once the desired setting is displayed on the
screen, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob left or right
to adjust the chosen setting. Press the ENTER
button to move to the next setting or wait approxi-
mately five seconds to exit the setting adjustment
mode.
Audio settings:
Adjust the bass, treble, fade and balance by
selecting the desired setting with the ENTER
button and then adjusting the level with the
TUNE/SCROLL knob. Balance adjusts the
sound between the left and right speakers. Fade
adjusts the sound between the front and rear
speakers.
Speed Sensitive Volume (if so equipped):
To change the Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV)
level from 1 to 5, or to turn the feature off entirely,
choose the Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV) set-
ting with the ENTER button and then adjust the
level with the TUNE/SCROLL knob. Speed Sen-
sitive Volume (SSV) adjusts the volume of the
audio system as the vehicle’s driving speed
changes.
LHA1270 LHA1271
Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-39
Information Provided by:
Display settings:
To adjust the brightness or contrast of the display
screen, press the ENTER button until the chosen
setting is displayed. Use the TUNE/SCROLL
knob to adjust the display to the desired level.
On-screen Clock:
The clock is shown in the upper right corner of
the screen. To turn this feature off or to re-enable
the clock display after it has been turned off,
press the ENTER button until the On-screen
Clock mode is displayed. Use the
TUNE/SCROLL knob to toggle the feature on or
off.
Clock adjust:
To adjust the time, perform the following steps:
1. Press the ENTER button repeatedly until the
Clock Adjust mode is displayed on the
screen.
2. The hours will begin blinking. Adjust the
hours by turning the TUNE/SCROLL knob
left or right and press the ENTER button.
3. The minutes will begin blinking. Adjust the
minutes by turning the TUNE/SCROLL knob
left or right and press the ENTER button.
LHA1272 LHA1273 LHA1274
4-40 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Information Provided by:
iPod姞MENU button
This button can only be used for iPod姞opera-
tions. See “iPod姞Player Operation without Navi-
gation System (Type B)” in this section for details
about the function of this button.
FM/AM/SAT radio operation
FM·AM button:
Press the FM·AM button to change the band as
follows:
AM →FM1 →FM2 →AM
If another audio source is playing when the
FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source play-
ing will automatically be turned off and the last
radio station played will begin playing.
The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shown on
the screen during FM stereo reception. When the
stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio auto-
matically changes from stereo to monaural re-
ception.
SAT band select:
Pressing the AUX button will change the band as
follows:
AUX →XM1* →XM2* →AUX (satellite, if so
equipped)
When the AUX button is pressed while the igni-
tion switch is in the ACC or ON position, the
radio will come on at the station last played.
The last station played will also come on when
the VOL/ON-OFF control knob is pressed to turn
the radio on.
*When the AUX button is pressed, the satellite
radio mode will be skipped unless an optional
satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an
XM姞satellite radio service subscription is active.
Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii
and Guam.
If a compact disc is playing when the AUX button
is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be
turned off and the last radio station played will
come on.
TUNE/SCROLL knob (Tuning):
Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to the left or right
for manual tuning.
SEEK tuning:
Press the SEEK buttons or to tune
from low to high or high to low frequencies and to
stop at the next broadcasting station.
SCAN tuning:
Press the SCAN button to stop at each broad-
casting station for 5 seconds. SCAN will appear
on the screen while the radio is scan tuning.
Pressing the button again during this 5 second
period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will
remain tuned to that station. If the SCAN button is
not pressed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning
moves to the next station.
1 to 6 Station memory operations:
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6 for
FM1, 6 for FM2) and six stations can be set for
the AM band.
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the FM·AM select button.
2. Tune to the desired station using manual,
SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any
of the desired station memory buttons (1 –
6) until a beep sound is heard.
3. The channel indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Programming is now
complete.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-
ner.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-41
Information Provided by:
If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that
case, reset the desired stations.
Compact disc (CD) player operation
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and carefully insert the compact disc
into the slot with the label side up. The compact
disc is automatically pulled into the slot and starts
to play.
If the radio is already operating, it automatically
turns off and the compact disc begins to play.
CD button:
When the CD button is pressed with the system
off and the compact disc loaded, the system will
turn on and the compact disc will start to play.
When the CD button is pressed with a compact
disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio will
automatically be turned off and the compact disc
will start to play.
CD/MP3 display mode:
While listening to an MP3/WMA CD, certain text
may be displayed on the screen if the CD has
been encoded with text information. Depending
on how the MP3/WMA CD is encoded, informa-
tion such as Artist, Song and Folder will be dis-
played.
The track number and the total number of tracks
in the current folder or on the current disc are
displayed on the screen as well. For example, the
first track out of fourteen total is currently playing.
SEEK/CAT (Reverse or
Fast Forward) buttons:
Press and hold the SEEK/CAT buttons
or for 1.5 seconds while the compact disc
is playing to reverse or fast forward the track
being played. The compact disc plays at an in-
creased speed while reversing or fast forwarding.
When the button is released, the compact disc
returns to normal play speed.
SEEK/CAT buttons:
Press the SEEK/CAT button while a CD or
MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the begin-
ning of the current track. Press the SEEK/CAT
button several times to skip backward sev-
eral tracks.
Press the SEEK/CAT button while a CD or
MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance one track.
Press the SEEK/CAT button several times
to skip forward several tracks. If the last track on
a CD is skipped, the first track on the disc is
played. If the last track in a folder of an
MP3/WMA CD is skipped, the first track of the
next folder is played.
LHA1275
4-42 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Information Provided by:
TUNE/SCROLL knob (MP3/WMA CD
only):
If an MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is play-
ing, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to change
folders. Turn the knob to the left to skip back a
folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip ahead a
folder.
RPT button:
When the RPT button is pressed while a com-
pact disc is playing, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:
CD:
1 TRK RPT ←→ OFF
CD with MP3 or WMA:
1 FOLDER RPT →1 TRK RPT →OFF
1 TRK RPT: the current track will be repeated.
1 FOLDER RPT: the current folder will be re-
peated.
OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The indi-
cator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on
the screen unless no pattern is applied.
RDM button:
When the RDM button is pressed while a com-
pact disc is playing, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:
CD:
1 DISC RDM ←→ OFF
CD with MP3 or WMA:
1 DISC RDM →1 FOLDER RDM →OFF
1 DISC RDM: all tracks on the disc will be played
randomly.
1 FOLDER RDM: all tracks in the current folder
will be played randomly.
OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on
the screen unless no pattern is applied.
AUX button:
The AUX IN jack is located on the CD player. The
AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard
analog audio input such as from a portable cas-
sette tape/CD player, MP3 player or a laptop
computer.
Press the AUX button to play a compatible device
plugged into the AUX IN jack. The AUX button is
also used to switch the audio system to a source
plugged into the USB input jack in the center
console. When a device is plugged into the AUX
IN jack while another device is plugged into the
USB input jack, the AUX button is used to toggle
between the two functions.
For more information about the USB input jack,
see “USB interface” in this section.
EJECT button:
When the button is pressed with a com-
pact disc loaded, the compact disc will eject and
the last source will be played.
When the button is pressed twice with a
compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be
ejected further for easier CD removal. If the disc
is not removed within 20 seconds, the disc will
reload.
Additional features
For more information about the iPod姞player
available with this system, see “iPod姞player op-
eration without Navigation System (Type B)” in
this section.
For more information about the USB interface
available with this system, see “USB interface
(models without Navigation System)” in this sec-
tion.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-43
Information Provided by:
1. XM button
2. CD insert slot
3. Display screen
4. CD eject button
5. SETUP button
6. BACK button
7. TUNE/SCROLL knob, AUDIO button
8. Station select (1 - 6) buttons
9. AUX button
10. VOL/ON-OFF control knob
11. SEEK/CATEGORY button
12. CD button
13. FM-AM button
*No satellite radio reception is available
when the XM button is pressed to ac-
cess satellite radio stations unless op-
tional satellite receiver and antenna are
installed and an XM姞satellite radio ser-
vice subscription is active. Satellite ra-
dio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii
and Guam.
FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH
COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER
(Type B) (if so equipped)
For all operation precautions, see “Audio opera-
tion precautions” in this section.
Audio main operation
VOL/ON·OFF control:
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and push the VOL/ON·OFF control knob
while the system is off to call up the mode (radio,
CD, AUX, USB or iPod姞) that was playing imme-
diately before the system was turned off.
To turn the system off, press the VOL/ON·OFF
control knob.
Type B
LHA1473
4-44 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Information Provided by:
Turn the VOL/ON·OFF control knob to adjust the
volume.
This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Vol-
ume for audio. When this feature is active, the
audio volume changes as the driving speed
changes.
Audio settings:
Press the SETUP button to display the audio
settings on the screen. These settings can also
be displayed by pressing the AUDIO button
(TUNE/SCROLL knob). Use the touchscreen to
adjust the following items to the desired setting:
Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade:
Controls the sound of the audio system. Balance
adjusts the sound between the left and right
speakers. Fade adjusts the sound between the
front and rear speakers.
Speed Volume:
Controls the level to which the volume is adjusted
as the vehicle’s driving speed changes. Choose a
setting between 1 and 5 or choose 0 to disable
the feature entirely.
AUX Level:
Controls the volume level of incoming sound
when an auxiliary device is connected to the
system. Available options are Quiet, Medium and
Loud.
LHA1486 LHA1487
Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-45
Information Provided by:
FM/AM/SAT radio operation
FM·AM button:
Press the FM·AM button to change the band as
follows:
AM →FM1 →FM2 →AM
If another audio source is playing when the
FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source play-
ing will automatically be turned off and the last
radio station played will begin playing.
The FM stereo indicator (ST) is shown on the
screen during FM stereo reception. When the
stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio auto-
matically changes from stereo to monaural re-
ception.
XM band select:
Pressing the XM button will change the band as
follows:
XM1* →XM2* →XM3* →XM1* (satellite, if so
equipped)
When the XM button is pressed while the ignition
switch is in the ACC or ON position, the radio will
come on at the last station played.
The last station played will also come on when
the VOL/ON-OFF control knob is pressed to turn
the radio on.
*When the XM button is pressed, the satellite
radio mode will be skipped unless an optional
satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an
XM姞satellite radio service subscription is active.
Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii
and Guam.
If a compact disc is playing when the XM button
is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be
turned off and the last radio station played will
come on.
While the radio is in XM mode, the operation can
be controlled through the touchscreen. Touch
the “Channels” key to display a list of channels.
Touch a channel displayed on the list to change
to that channel. Touch the “Categories” key to
display a list of categories. Touch a category
displayed on the list to display options within that
category.
LHA1492
4-46 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Information Provided by:
Tuning with the touchscreen:
When in AM or FM mode, the radio can be tuned
using the touchscreen. To bring up the visual
tuner, touch the “Tune” key on the lower right
corner of the screen. A screen appears with a bar
running from low frequencies on the left to high
frequencies on the right. Touch the screen at the
location of the frequency you wish to tune and the
station will change to that frequency. To return to
the regular radio display screen, touch the “OK”
key.
Tuning with the TUNE/SCROLL knob:
The radio can also be manually tuned using the
TUNE/SCROLL knob. When in FM or AM mode,
turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to the left for lower
frequencies or to the right for higher frequencies.
When in XM mode, turn the TUNE/SCROLL
knob to change the channel.
SEEK tuning:
When in FM or AM mode, press the
SEEK/CATEGORY button or to
tune from low to high or high to low frequencies
and to stop at the next broadcasting station.
When in XM mode, press the SEEK/CATEGORY
button or to change the category.
1 to 6 Station memory operations:
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6 for
FM1, 6 for FM2) and six stations can be set for
the AM band. Eighteen stations can be set for the
XM band (6 for XM1, 6 for XM2, 6 for XM3).
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the FM·AM select button or choose
the radio band XM1, XM2 or XM3 using the
XM button.
2. Tune to the desired station using manual or
seek tuning. Press and hold any of the de-
sired station memory buttons (1 – 6) until a
beep sound is heard.
3. The channel indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Programming is now
complete.
4.
Other buttons can be set in the same manner.
If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that
case, reset the desired stations.
Compact disc (CD) player operation
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position
and carefully insert the compact disc into the slot
with the label side up. The compact disc is auto-
matically pulled into the slot and starts to play.
If the radio is already operating, it automatically
turns off and the compact disc begins to play.
CD button:
When the CD button is pressed with the system
off and the compact disc loaded, the system will
turn on and the compact disc will start to play.
When the CD button is pressed with a compact
disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio will
automatically be turned off and the compact disc
will start to play.
LHA1489
Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-47
Information Provided by:
CD/MP3 display mode
While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CD,
certain text may be displayed (when a CD en-
coded with text is being used). Depending on
how the CD or MP3/WMA CD is encoded, the
text is displayed listing the artist, album and song
title.
There are other keys displayed on the screen
when a CD is playing:
Random:
Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play
pattern to the CD. When the random mode is
active, the icon will be displayed to the left
of the song title. If an MP3 CD is playing, touch-
ing “Random” alternates between randomly play-
ing songs within the current folder and songs
from the CD as a whole. The icon is dis-
played to the left of the song title or folder name
to denote which pattern is applied. To cancel
Random mode, touch the “Random” key until
no icon is displayed.
Repeat:
Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play
pattern to the CD. When the repeat mode is
active, the icon will be displayed to the left
of the song title. If an MP3 CD is playing, touch-
ing “Repeat” alternates between repeating the
current song and repeating the current folder.
The icon is displayed to the left of the song
title or folder name to denote which pattern is
applied. To cancel Repeat mode, touch the “Re-
peat” key until no icon is displayed.
LHA1488 LHA1490 LHA1491
4-48 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Information Provided by:
Browse:
Touch the “Browse” key to display the titles on
the CD in list format. Touch the title of a song in
the list to begin playing that song. If an MP3 CD is
playing, touching the “Browse” key will also list
the folders on the disc. Follow the procedure for
selecting a song with the touchscreen to choose
a folder.
SEEK/CATEGORY (Re-
verse or Fast Forward)
button:
Press and hold the SEEK/CATEGORY
button or for 1.5 seconds while the
compact disc is playing to reverse or fast forward
the track being played. The compact disc plays at
an increased speed while reversing or fast for-
warding. When the button is released, the com-
pact disc returns to normal play speed.
SEEK/CATEGORY button:
Press the SEEK/CATEGORY button while
a CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the
beginning of the current track. Press the
SEEK/CATEGORY button several times
to skip backward several tracks.
Press the SEEK/CATEGORY button while
a CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance
one track. Press the SEEK/CATEGORY
button several times to skip forward sev-
eral tracks. If the last track on a CD is skipped, the
first track on the disc is played. If the last track in
a folder of an MP3/WMA CD is skipped, the first
track of the next folder is played.
AUX button:
The AUX IN jack is located in the storage area
above the audio system. The AUX IN audio input
jack accepts any standard analog audio input
such as from a portable cassette tape/CD player,
MP3 player or a laptop computer.
Press the AUX button to play a compatible device
plugged into the AUX IN jack. The AUX button is
also used to switch the audio system to a source
plugged into the USB input jack in the center
console. When a device is plugged into the AUX
IN jack while another device is plugged into the
USB input jack, the AUX button is used to toggle
between the two functions.
LHA1493
Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-49
Information Provided by:
For more information about the USB input jack,
see “USB interface” in this section.
EJECT button:
When the button is pressed with a com-
pact disc loaded, the compact disc will eject and
the last source will be played.
When the button is pressed twice with a
compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be
ejected further for easier CD removal. If the disc
is not removed within 10 seconds, the disc will
reload.
Additional features
For more information about the iPod姞player
available with this system, see “iPod姞player op-
eration with Navigation System” in this section.
For more information about the USB interface
available with this system, see “USB interface
(models with Navigation System)” in this section.
USB INTERFACE (models without
Navigation System) (if so equipped)
Connecting a device to the USB input
jack
The USB input jack is located in the center con-
sole. Open the protective cover 䊊
1on the USB
jack, then insert the USB device into the jack 䊊
2.
When a compatible storage device is plugged
into the jack, compatible audio files on the stor-
age device can be played through the vehicle’s
audio system.
Audio file operation
AUX button:
Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC
position and press the AUX button to switch to
the USB input mode. If another audio source is
plugged in through the AUX IN jack on the radio,
the AUX button toggles between the two
sources.
WHA1358
4-50 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Information Provided by:
Play information
Information about the audio files being played
can be displayed on the display screen of the
vehicle’s audio system. Depending on how the
audio files are encoded, information such as
Folder, Song and Artist will be displayed.
The track number and number of total tracks in
the folder are displayed on the screen as well. For
example, the fourth track out of twelve total is
currently playing.
SEEK/CAT (Reverse or
Fast Forward) buttons:
Press and hold the SEEK/CAT buttons
or for 1.5 seconds while an audio file on
the USB device is playing to reverse or fast
forward the track being played. The track plays at
an increased speed while reversing or fast for-
warding. When the button is released, the audio
file returns to normal play speed.
SEEK/CAT buttons:
Press the SEEK/CAT button while an au-
dio file on the USB device is playing to return to
the beginning of the current track. Press the
SEEK/CAT button several times to skip
backward several tracks.
Press the SEEK/CAT button while an au-
dio file on the USB device is playing to advance
one track. Press the SEEK/CAT button
several times to skip forward several tracks. If the
last track in a folder on the USB device is
skipped, the first track of the next folder is played.
RDM button:
When the RDM button is pressed while an audio
file on the USB device is playing, the play pattern
can be changed as follows:
ALL RDM →1 FOLDER RDM →OFF
ALL RDM: all tracks on the USB device will be
played randomly.
1 FOLDER RDM: all tracks in the current folder
will be played randomly.
OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the USB device is
displayed on the screen unless no pattern is
applied.
RPT button:
When the RPT button is pressed while an audio
file on the USB device is playing, the play pattern
can be changed as follows:
1 FOLDER RPT →1 TRACK RPT →OFF
1 TRACK RPT: the current track will be repeated.
1 FOLDER RPT: the current folder will be re-
peated.
OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The indi-
cator on the display will turn off.
LHA1280
Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-51
Information Provided by:
The current play pattern of the USB device is
displayed on the screen unless no pattern is
applied.
TUNE/SCROLL knob:
If there are multiple folders with audio files on the
USB device, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
change folders. Turn the knob to the left to skip
back a folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip
ahead a folder. If there is only one folder of audio
files on the USB device, turning the
TUNE/SCROLL knob in either direction will re-
turn to the first track on the USB device.
USB INTERFACE (models with
Navigation System)
Connecting a device to the USB input
jack
The USB input jack is located in the center con-
sole. Open the protective cover 䊊
1on the USB
jack, then insert the USB device into the jack.
When a compatible storage device is plugged
into the jack, compatible audio files on the stor-
age device can be played through the vehicle’s
audio system.
Audio file operation
AUX button:
Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC
position and press the AUX button to switch to
the USB input mode. If another audio source is
playing and a USB memory device is inserted,
press the AUX button repeatedly until the center
display changes to the USB memory mode.
If the system has been turned off while the USB
memory was playing, push the ON-OFF/VOL
control knob to restart the USB memory.
LHA1500
4-52 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Information Provided by:
Play information
Information about the audio files being played is
shown on the display screen of the vehicle’s
audio system. Touch “Browse” to display the list
of folders and files on the USB device. Touch the
name of a song on the screen to begin playing
that song.
SEEK/CATEGORY button:
Press the SEEK/CATEGORY button while
an audio file on the USB device is playing to
return to the beginning of the current track. Press
the SEEK/CATEGORY button several
times to skip backward several tracks.
Press the SEEK/CATEGORY button while
an audio file on the USB device is playing to
advance one track. Press the SEEK/CATEGORY
button several times to skip forward sev-
eral tracks. If the last track in a folder on the USB
device is skipped, the first track of the next folder
is played.
Press and hold the SEEK/CATEGORY
button or for 1.5 seconds while an
audio file on the USB device is playing to reverse
or fast forward the track being played. The track
plays at an increased speed while reversing or
fast forwarding. When the button is released, the
audio file returns to normal play speed.
Random and repeat play mode:
While files on a USB device are playing, the play
pattern can be altered so that songs are repeated
or played randomly.
Random:
Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play
pattern to the USB device. When the random
mode is active, the icon is displayed to the
left of the song title or album name to denote
which random pattern is applied. To cancel Ran-
dom mode, touch the “Random” key until
no icon is displayed.
Repeat:
Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play
pattern to the USB device. When the repeat
mode is active, the icon is displayed to the
left of the song title or album name to denote
which repeat pattern is applied. To cancel Repeat
mode, touch the “Repeat” key until no icon
is displayed.
LHA1496
Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-53
Information Provided by:
iPod姞* PLAYER OPERATION
WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM
(Type A) (if so equipped)
Connecting iPod姞
The iPod姞outlet connector is located on the
center console. Your vehicle is equipped with the
specialized cable for connecting the iPod姞to
your vehicle audio unit. To connect the iPod姞, first
open the protective cover from the connector in
the center console 䊊
1. Next, connect one end of
the iPod姞cable to the iPod姞and the other end of
the cable to the connector in the center console
䊊
2. If compatible, the battery of your iPod姞is
charged during the connection to the vehicle.
While connected to the vehicle, the iPod姞can
only be operated by the vehicle audio controls.
To disconnect the cable from the vehicle outlet,
fully depress the center connector button to un-
latch the connector and pull the connector
straight out of the outlet. To disconnect the cable
from the iPod姞, fully depress the side connector
buttons and pull the iPod姞connector straight out
of the iPod姞.
*iPod姞is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
Compatibility
The following models are compatible:
●iPod姞Classic - 1st through 6th generation
●iPod姞Mini - 1st and 2nd generation
●iPod姞Nano - 1st through 3rd generation
●iPod姞Touch - 1st generation
●iPhone姞- 1st generation
Make sure that your iPod姞firmware is updated to
the version indicated above.
Audio main operation
iPod姞button:
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and press the iPod姞button to switch to
the iPod姞mode.
If another audio source is playing and the iPod姞is
connected, press the iPod姞button to switch to
the iPod姞mode.
If the system is turned off while the iPod姞is
playing, the iPod姞will start when the PWR button
is pressed.
Top menu item selecting:
Press the iPod姞MENU button while the iPod姞is
connected to show the interface for iPod姞opera-
tion on the audio display. The items can be cho-
sen from the menu list screen by pressing the
SEEK button or while the iPod姞is
operational. The display pattern can be changed
as follows:
Playlists →Artists →Albums →Songs →Pod-
casts →Genres →Composers →Audiobooks
For more information about each item, see the
iPod姞owner’s manual.
WHA1355
4-54 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Information Provided by:
ENTER and BACK buttons:
Press the ENTER button while the top menu is
displayed to show program details on the audio
display. Use the SEEK buttons or to
scroll through the choices and press the ENTER
button to make a selection. Press the BACK
button to return to the previous display.
iPod姞play information:
Press the DISP TEXT button for less than 1.5
seconds while a program is playing to change the
displayed program information as follows:
Excluding Podcast:
Album Title →Artist Name →Song Title →
Normal Mode
Podcast:
Album Title →Song Title →Normal Mode
For more information about Podcasts, see the
iPod姞owner’s manual.
TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER button:
When the TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER button is
pressed or for more than 1.5 sec-
onds while the iPod姞is playing, the iPod姞will
play while fast forwarding or reversing. When the
button is released, the iPod姞will return to the
normal play speed.
When the TUNE/FF-REW/FOLDER button is
pressed or for less than 1.5 sec-
onds while the iPod姞is playing, the next track or
the beginning of the current track on the iPod姞
will be played.
SCAN/RPT button:
Press the SCAN/RPT button while a track is
playing to change the play pattern as follows:
Excluding Podcast and Audiobook:
ALL RPT →TRK RPT →ALL RDM →ALBUM
RDM
Podcast:
ALL RPT ←→ TRK RPT
For more information about Podcasts, see the
iPod姞owner’s manual.
Audiobook:
NORMAL →FAST →SLOW
iPod姞* PLAYER OPERATION
WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM
(Type B) (if so equipped)
Connecting iPod姞
To connect an iPod姞to the vehicle so that the
iPod姞can be controlled with the audio system
controls and display screen, use the USB jack
located in the center console. Open the protec-
tive cover 䊊
1on the USB jack in the center
console. Then connect the iPod姞-specific end of
the cable to the iPod姞and the USB end of the
cable to the USB jack 䊊
2on the vehicle. When
the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position,
WHA1358
Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-55
Information Provided by:
the battery of your iPod姞(if compatible) is
charged during the connection to the vehicle.
While connected to the vehicle, the iPod姞can
only be operated by the vehicle audio controls.
To disconnect the iPod姞from the vehicle, remove
the USB end of the cable from the USB jack on
the vehicle, then remove the cable from the
iPod姞.
*iPod姞is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
Compatibility
The following models are compatible:
●iPod姞Classic - 1st through 6th generation
●iPod姞Mini - 1st and 2nd generation
●iPod姞Nano - 1st through 3rd generation
●iPod姞Touch - 1st generation
●iPhone姞- 1st generation
Make sure that your iPod姞firmware is updated to
the version indicated above.
Audio main operation
AUX button:
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and press the AUX button repeatedly
until the iPod姞mode is displayed on the screen.
If another audio source is playing and the iPod姞is
connected, press the AUX button repeatedly to
switch to the iPod姞mode.
If the vehicle audio system is turned off while the
iPod姞is playing, the iPod姞will start when the
VOL/ON-OFF control knob is pressed.
Interface:
The interface for iPod姞operation shown on the
vehicle’s audio system display screen is similar to
the iPod姞interface. Use the TUNE/SCROLL
knob and ENTER button to navigate the menus
on the screen. The iPod姞MENU button on the
vehicle audio system is used to move up one level
in the iPod姞menus.
Depending on the iPod姞model, the following
items may be available on the menu list screen.
For further information about each item, see the
iPod姞Owner’s Manual.
●Playlists
●Artists
●Albums
●Songs
●Podcasts
●Genres
●Composers
●Audiobooks
●ShuffleSongs
SEEK/CAT buttons:
Press the SEEK/CAT buttons or to
skip backward or forward one track.
Press and hold the SEEK/CAT buttons
or for 1.5 seconds while a track is playing
to reverse or fast forward the track being played.
The track plays at an increased speed while
reversing or fast forwarding. When the button is
released, the track returns to normal play speed.
RPT button:
Press the RPT button while a track is playing to
change the play pattern as follows:
1 TRK RPT →ALL RPT →RPT OFF
1 TRK RPT: the current track will be repeated.
ALL RPT: all songs in the current list are re-
peated.
RPT OFF: no repeat play pattern is applied.
4-56 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Information Provided by:
RDM button:
Press the RDM button while a track is playing to
change the play pattern as follows:
TRK SHUFFLE →ALBUM SHUFFLE →
SHUFFLE OFF
TRK SHUFFLE: the tracks in the current list will
be played randomly.
ALBUM SHUFFLE: the albums in the current list
will be played randomly.
SHUFFLE OFF: no random play pattern is ap-
plied.
iPod姞* PLAYER OPERATION WITH
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so
equipped)
Connecting iPod姞
To connect an iPod姞to the vehicle so that the
iPod姞can be controlled with the audio system
controls and display screen, use the USB jack
located in the center console. Open the protec-
tive cover on the USB jack in the center console
and then connect the iPod姞-specific end of the
cable to the iPod姞and the USB end of the cable
to the USB jack on the vehicle 䊊
1. If your iPod姞
supports charging via a USB connection, its bat-
tery will be charged while connected to the ve-
hicle with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position.
While connected to the vehicle, the iPod姞can
only be operated by the vehicle audio controls.
To disconnect the iPod姞from the vehicle, remove
the USB end of the cable from the USB jack on
the vehicle, then remove the cable from the
iPod姞.
*iPod姞is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
Compatibility
The following models are compatible:
●iPod姞Classic - 5th generation
●iPod姞Nano - 1st through 2nd generation
Make sure that your iPod姞firmware is updated to
the version indicated above.
LHA1500
Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-57
Information Provided by:
Audio main operation
AUX button:
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and press the AUX button repeatedly
until the iPod姞mode is displayed on the screen.
If another audio source is playing and the iPod姞is
connected, press the AUX button repeatedly to
switch to the iPod姞mode.
If the vehicle audio system is turned off while the
iPod姞is playing, the iPod姞will start when the
VOL/ON-OFF control knob is pressed.
Interface:
The interface for iPod姞operation shown on the
vehicle’s audio system display screen is similar to
the iPod姞interface. Use the touchscreen,
BACK button or the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
navigate the menus on the screen.
When the iPod姞is playing, touch the “Menu” key
to bring up the iPod姞interface.
Depending on the iPod姞model, the following
items may be available on the menu list screen.
For further information about each item, see the
iPod姞Owner’s Manual.
●Playlists
●Artists
●Albums
●Genres
●Songs
●Composers
●Audiobooks
●Podcasts
SEEK/CATEGORY button:
Press the SEEK/CATEGORY button
or to skip backward or forward one track.
Press and hold the SEEK/CATEGORY
button or for 1.5 seconds while a
track is playing to reverse or fast forward the track
being played. The track plays at an increased
speed while reversing or fast forwarding. When
the button is released, the track returns to normal
play speed.
Random and repeat play mode:
While the iPod姞is playing, the play pattern can
be altered so that songs are repeated or played
randomly.
LHA1494 LHA1495
4-58 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Information Provided by:
Random:
Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play
pattern to the iPod姞. When the random mode is
active, the icon is displayed to the left of
the song title or album name to denote which
random pattern is applied. To cancel Random
mode, touch the “Random” key until no
icon is displayed.
Repeat:
Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play
pattern to the iPod姞. When the repeat mode is
active, the icon is displayed to the left of
the song title or album name to denote which
repeat pattern is applied. To cancel Repeat
mode, touch the “Repeat” key until no icon
is displayed. CD CARE AND CLEANING
●Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the
disc. Never touch the surface of the disc.
●Always place the discs in the storage case
when they are not being used.
●To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the
center to the outer edge using a clean, soft
cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular
motion.
●Do not use a conventional record cleaner or
alcohol intended for industrial use.
●A new disc may be rough on the inner and
outer edges. Remove the rough edges by
rubbing the inner and outer edges with the
side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.
LHA0049
Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-59
Information Provided by:
1. Tuning switch
2. MODE select switch
3. POWER on/off switch
4. Volume control switch
1. Tuning switch
2. Phone operation switch
3. POWER on and MODE select switch
4. Volume control switch
STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR
AUDIO CONTROL (if so equipped)
The audio system can be operated using the
controls on the steering wheel.
POWER on/off switch
If you have the Type A switch, with the ignition
switch placed in the ACC or ON position, push
the POWER switch to turn the audio system on
or off.
If you have the Type B switch, with the ignition
switch placed in the ACC or ON position, push
the MODE switch to turn the audio system on.
MODE select switch (models without
Navigation System)
Push the MODE select switch to change the
mode in the following sequence:
AM →FM* →SAT** (if so equipped) →CD*** →
USB/iPod*** (if so equipped) →AUX*** →AM
* When using the MODE switch, the audio mode
switches to the FM preset bank (FM1 or FM2)
that was last active. To switch between the FM1
and FM2 preset banks, use the controls on the
audio system.
** When using the MODE switch, the audio mode
switches to the XM preset bank (XM1 or XM2)
that was last active. To switch between the XM1
and XM2 preset banks, use the controls on the
audio system.
*** These modes are only available when compat-
ible media is connected to the system.
Type A
LHA0692
Type B
WHA0693
4-60 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Information Provided by:
MODE select switch (models with
Navigation System)
Push the MODE select switch to change the
mode in the following sequence:
AM/FM* →XM** →CD*** →USB/AUX*** →
AM/FM*
* When using the MODE switch, the audio mode
switches to the preset bank (AM, FM1 or FM2)
that was last active. To switch between the AM,
FM1 and FM2 preset banks, use the controls on
the audio system.
** When using the MODE switch, the audio mode
switches to the XM preset bank (XM1, XM2 or
XM3) that was last active. To switch between the
XM preset banks, use the controls on the audio
system.
*** These modes are only available when compat-
ible media is connected to the system.
Volume control switch
Push the volume control switch up or down to
increase or decrease the volume.
Tuning
Memory change (radio):
Push the tuning switch ( or ) for less
than 1.5 seconds to change presets.
Seek tuning (radio):
Push the tuning switch ( or ) for more
than 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previous
radio station.
Next/Previous track (CD):
Push the tuning switch or for less
than 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of the
present track or skip to the next track. Push
several times to skip back or skip through tracks.
ANTENNA
The antenna cannot be shortened, but can be
removed. When you need to remove the antenna,
turn the antenna rod counterclockwise 䊊
B.
To install the antenna rod, turn the antenna rod
clockwise 䊊
Aand hand tighten.
CAUTION
Always properly tighten the antenna rod
during installation or the antenna rod may
break during vehicle operation.
LHA0709
Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-61
Information Provided by:
When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in
your NISSAN, be sure to observe the following
precautions; otherwise, the new equipment may
adversely affect the engine control system and
other electronic parts.
WARNING
●A cellular telephone should not be used
while driving so full attention may be
given to vehicle operation. Some juris-
dictions prohibit the use of cellular tele-
phones while driving.
●If you must make a call while your ve-
hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-
lar phone operational mode (if so
equipped) is highly recommended. Ex-
ercise extreme caution at all times so
full attention may be given to vehicle
operation.
●If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle.
CAUTION
●Keep the antenna as far away as pos-
sible from the electronic control
modules.
●Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in
(20 cm) away from the electronic con-
trol system harnesses. Do not route the
antenna wire next to any harness.
●Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio
as recommended by the manufacturer.
●Connect the ground wire from the CB
radio chassis to the body.
●For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.
WARNING
●Use a phone after stopping your vehicle
in a safe location. If you have to use a
phone while driving, exercise extreme
caution at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
●If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle.
CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,
use a phone after starting the engine.
CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO BLUETOOTH姞HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
4-62 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Information Provided by:
Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth姞
Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com-
patible Bluetooth姞enabled cellular phone, you
can set up the wireless connection between your
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.
With Bluetooth姞wireless technology, you can
make or receive a hands-free telephone call with
your cellular phone in the vehicle.
Once your cellular phone is connected to the in-
vehicle phone module, no other phone connecting
procedure is required. Your phone is automatically
connected with the in-vehicle phone module when
the ignition switch is placed in the ON position with
the previously connected cellular phone turned on
and carried in the vehicle.
You can connect up to 5 different Bluetooth姞
cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone
at a time.
Before using the Bluetooth姞Hands-Free Phone
System, refer to the following notes.
●Set up the wireless connection between a
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone
module before using the hands-free phone
system.
●
Some Bluetooth姞enabled cellular phones may
not be recognized by the in-vehicle phone mod-
ule. Please visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
for a recommended phone list and connecting
instructions.
●You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-
vice area.
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive a cellular signal; such
as in a tunnel, in an underground parking
garage, near a tall building or in a moun-
tainous area.
WHA1356
Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-63
Information Provided by:
– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it
from being dialed.
●When the radio wave condition is not ideal
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be
difficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-
ing a call.
●Do not place the cellular phone in an area
surrounded by metal or far away from the
in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone
quality degradation and wireless connection
disruption.
●While a cellular phone is connected through
the Bluetooth姞wireless connection, the bat-
tery power of the cellular phone may dis-
charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth姞
Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge
cellular phones.
●If the hands-free phone system seems to be
malfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide”
later in this section. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble-
shooting help.
●Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to
come from the audio system speakers. Stor-
ing the device in a different location may
reduce or eliminate the noise.
●Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual
regarding the telephone charges, cellular
phone antenna and body, etc.
REGULATORY INFORMATION
FCC Regulatory information
– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the
supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,
modification, or attachments could damage
the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-
tions.
– Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions:
1. This device may not cause interference and
2. this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause un-
desired operation of the device.
IC Regulatory information
– Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
– This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-
quirements of the Canadian Interference-
Causing Equipment Regulations.
BLUETOOTH威is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,
U.S.A. and licensed
to Visteon.
USING THE SYSTEM
The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows
hands-free operation of the Bluetooth姞Phone
System.
If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may
not be available so full attention may be given to
vehicle operation.
Initialization
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,
which takes a few seconds. If the button is
pressed before the initialization completes, the
system will announce “Hands-free phone system
not ready” and will not react to voice commands.
4-64 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Information Provided by:
Operating tips
To get the best performance out of the NISSAN
Voice Recognition system, observe the following:
●Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
possible. Close the windows to eliminate
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system
from recognizing voice commands correctly.
●Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a
command. Otherwise, the command will not
be received properly.
●Start speaking a command within 5 seconds
after the tone sounds.
●Speak in a natural voice without pausing
between words.
Giving voice commands
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press
and release the button located on the
steering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak a
command.
The command given is picked up by the micro-
phone, and voice feedback is given when the
command is accepted.
●If you need to hear the available commands
for the current menu again, say “Help” and
the system will repeat them.
●If a command is not recognized, the system
announces, “Command not recognized.
Please try again.” Repeat the command in a
clear voice.
●If you want to go back to the previous com-
mand, you can say “Go back” or “Correc-
tion” any time the system is waiting for a
response.
●You can cancel a command when the sys-
tem is waiting for a response by saying,
“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces
“Cancel” and ends the VR session. You can
also press and hold the button on the
steering wheel for 5 seconds at any time to
end the VR session. Whenever the VR ses-
sion is cancelled, a double beep is played to
indicate you have exited the system.
●If you want to adjust the volume of the voice
feedback, press the volume control switches
(+ or -) on the steering wheel while being
provided with feedback. You can also use
the radio volume control knob.
●In most cases you can interrupt the voice
feedback to speak the next command by
pressing the button on the steering
wheel.
●To use the system faster, you may speak the
second level commands with the main menu
command on the main menu. For example,
press the button and after the tone
say, “Call Redial.”
NOTE:
The combined command of Call and (a
Name) cannot be used.
How to say numbers
NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain
way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer
to the following rules and examples.
●Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”.
Example: 1-800-662-6200
– “One eight oh oh six six two six two oh
oh”, or
– “One eight zero zero six six two six two oh
oh”
●Words can be used for the first 4 digits
places only.
Example: 1-800-662-6200
– “One eight hundred six six two six two oh
oh”,
Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-65
Information Provided by:
– NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixty
two hundred,” and
– NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty two
hundred”
●Numbers can be spoken in small groups.
The system will prompt you to continue en-
tering digits, if desired.
Example: 1-800-662-6200
– “One eight zero zero”
The system repeats the numbers and
prompts you to enter more.
– “six six two”
The system repeats the numbers and
prompts you to enter more.
– “six two zero zero”
●Say “pound” for “#”. Say “star” for “*” (avail-
able when using the “Special Dialing” com-
mand and the “Send” command during a
call).
See “List of voice commands” and “Special
Dialing” in this section for more information.
Example: 1-555-1212 *123
– “One five five five one two one two star
one two three”
●Say “plus” for “+” (available only when using
the “Special Dialing” command).
●Say “pause” for a 2-second pause (available
only when storing a phone book number).
NOTE:
For best results, say phone numbers as
single digits.
The voice command “Help” is available at any
time. Please use the “Help” command to get
information on how to use the system. CONTROL BUTTONS
The control buttons for the Bluetooth姞Hands-
Free Phone System are located on the steering
wheel.
PHONE/SEND
Press the button to initiate a
VR session or answer an incoming
call.
LHA0707
4-66 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Information Provided by:
You can also use the button
to interrupt the system feedback
and give a command at once. See
“List of voice commands” and
“During a call” in this section for
more information.
PHONE/END
While the voice recognition system
is active, press and hold the
button for 5 seconds to quit the
voice recognition system at any
time.
TUNING SWITCH
While using the voice recognition
system, tilt the tuning switch up or
down to manually control the
phone system.
GETTING STARTED
The following procedures will help you get
started using the Bluetooth姞Hands-Free Phone
System with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For ad-
ditional command options, refer to “List of voice
commands” in this section.
Choosing a language
You can interact with the Bluetooth姞Hands-Free
Phone System using English, Spanish or French.
To change the language, perform the following.
1. Press and hold the button for more
than 5 seconds.
2. The system announces: “Press the
PHONE/SEND ( ) button for the
hands-free phone system to enter the
speaker adaptation mode or press the
PHONE/END ( ) button to select a dif-
ferent language.”
3. Press the button.
For information on speaker adaptation, see
“Speaker adaptation (SA) mode” in this sec-
tion.
4. The system announces the current language
and gives you the option to change the lan-
guage to Spanish (in Spanish) or French (in
French). To select the current language,
press the PHONE/SEND ( ) button. To
select a different language, tilt the tuning
switch ( or ) up or down.
NOTE:
You must press the button within 5
seconds to change the language.
5. If you decide not to change the language, do
not press either button. After 5 seconds, the
VR session will end, and the language will
not be changed.
Connecting procedure
NOTE:
The connecting procedure must be per-
formed when the vehicle is stationary. If the
vehicle starts moving during the procedure,
the procedure will be cancelled.
Main Menu
“Connect phone” 䊊
A
“Add phone” 䊊
B
Initiate from handset 䊊
C
Name phone 䊊
D
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel. The system announces the available
commands.
2. Say: “Connect phone” 䊊
A. The system ac-
knowledges the command and announces
the next set of available commands.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-67
Information Provided by:
3. Say: “Add phone” 䊊
B. The system acknowl-
edges the command and asks you to initiate
connecting from the phone handset 䊊
C.
The connecting procedure of the cellular
phone varies according to each cellular
phone model. See the cellular phone Own-
er’s Manual for details. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instruc-
tions on connecting NISSAN recommended
cellular phones.
When prompted for a Passkey code, enter
“1234” from the handset. The Passkey code
“1234” has been assigned by NISSAN and
cannot be changed.
4. The system asks you to say a name for the
phone 䊊
D.
If the name is too long or too short, the
system tells you, then prompts you for a
name again.
Also, if more than one phone is connected
and the name sounds too much like a name
already used, the system tells you, then
prompts you for a name again.
Making a call by entering a phone
number
Main Menu
“Call” 䊊
A
“Phone Number” 䊊
B
Speak the digits 䊊
C
“Dial” 䊊
D
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel. A tone will sound.
2. Say: “Call” 䊊
A. The system acknowledges
the command and announces the next set of
available commands.
Say: “Special Dialing” to dial more than 10
digits or any special characters.
3. Say “Phone Number” 䊊
B. The system ac-
knowledges the command and announces
the next set of available commands.
4. Say the number you wish to call starting with
the area code in single digit format 䊊
C.Ifthe
system has trouble recognizing the correct
phone number, try entering the number in
the following groups: 3-digit area code,
3-digit prefix and the last 4-digits. For ex-
ample, 555-121-3354 can be said as “five
five five” as the 1st group, then “one two
one” as the 2nd group, and “three three five
four” as the 3rd group. For dialing more than
10 digits or any special characters, say
“Special Dialing”. See “How to say num-
bers” in this section for more information.
5. When you have finished speaking the phone
number, the system repeats it back and an-
nounces the available commands.
6. Say: “Dial” 䊊
D. The system acknowledges
the command and makes the call.
For additional command options, see “List of
voice commands” in this section.
Receiving a call
When you hear the ring tone, press the
button on the steering wheel.
Once the call has ended, press the button
on the steering wheel.
NOTE:
If you do not wish to take the call when you
hear the ring tone, press the button
on the steering wheel.
For additional command options, see “List of
voice commands” later in this section.
4-68 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Information Provided by:
LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS
Main Menu
“Call”
“Phonebook”
“Recent Calls”
“Connect Phone”
When you press and release the button on
the steering wheel, you can choose from the
commands on the Main Menu. The following
pages describe these commands and the com-
mands in each sub-menu.
Remember to wait for the tone before
speaking.
After the main menu, you can say “Help” to hear
the list of commands currently available any time
the system is waiting for a response.
If you want to end an action without completing it,
you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at any time the
system is waiting for a response. The system will
end the VR session. Whenever the VR session is
cancelled, a double beep is played to indicate
you have exited the system.
If you want to go back to the previous command,
you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any time
the system is waiting for a response.
“Call”
Main Menu
“Call”
(Speak name) 䊊
A
“Phone Number”
(Speak Digits) 䊊
B
“Special Number” 䊊
C
“Redial” 䊊
D
“Call Back” 䊊
E
(Speak Name) 䊊
A
If you have stored entries in the phonebook, you
can dial a number associated with a name and
location.
See “Phonebook” in this section to learn how to
store entries.
When prompted by the system, say the name of
the phone book entry you wish to call. The system
acknowledges the name.
If there are multiple locations associated with the
name, the system asks you to choose the loca-
tion.
Once you have confirmed the name and location,
the system begins the call.
(Speak Digits) 䊊
B
When prompted by the system, say the number
you wish to call. Refer to “How to say numbers”
and “Making a call by entering a phone number”
in this section for more details.
“Special Number” 䊊
C
For dialing more than 10 digits or any special
characters, say “Special Number”. When the
system acknowledges the command, the system
will prompt you to speak the number.
“Redial” 䊊
D
Use the Redial command to call the last number
that was dialed.
The system acknowledges the command, re-
peats the number and begins dialing.
If a redial number does not exist, the system
announces, “There is no number to redial” and
ends the VR session.
“Call back” 䊊
E
Use the Call Back command to dial the number of
the last incoming call within the vehicle.
The system acknowledges the command, re-
peats the number and begins dialing.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-69
Information Provided by:
If a call back number does not exist, the system
announces, “There is no number to call back” and
ends the VR session.
During a call
During a call there are several command options
available. Press the button on the steering
wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter com-
mands.
●“Help” — The system announces the avail-
able commands.
●“Go back/Correction” — The system an-
nounces “Go back,” ends the VR session
and returns to the call.
●“Cancel/Quit” — The system announces
“Cancel,” ends the VR session and returns
to the call.
●“Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Send
command to enter numbers, “*” or “#” during
a call. For example, if you were directed to
dial an extension by an automated system:
Say: “Send one two three four.”
The system acknowledges the command
and sends the tones associated with the
numbers. The system then ends the VR ses-
sion and returns to the call. Say “star” for “*”,
Say “pound” for “#”.
●“Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call com-
mand to transfer the call from the Bluetooth姞
Hands-Free Phone System to the cellular
phone when privacy is desired.
The system announces, “Transfer call. Call
transferred to privacy mode.” The system
then ends the VR session.
To reconnect the call from the cellular phone
to the Bluetooth姞Hands-Free System,
press the button.
●“Mute” — Use the Mute command to mute
your voice so the other party cannot hear it.
Use the mute command again to unmute
your voice.
NOTE:
If a call is ended or the cellular phone
network connection is lost while the Mute
feature is on, the Mute feature will be reset
to “off” for the next call so the other party
can hear your voice.
“Phonebook” (phones without
automatic phonebook download
function)
NOTE:
The “Transfer Entry” command is not avail-
able when the vehicle is moving.
Main Menu
“Phonebook”
“Transfer Entry” 䊊
A
“Delete Entry” 䊊
B
“List Names” 䊊
C
For phones that do not support automatic down-
load of the phonebook (PBAP Bluetooth姞pro-
file), the “Phonebook” command is used to manu-
ally add entries to the vehicle phonebook.
The phonebook stores up to 40 names for each
phone connected to the system.
NOTE:
Each phone has its own separate phone-
book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone-
book if you are currently connected with
Phone B.
4-70 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Information Provided by:
“Transfer entry” 䊊
A
Use the Transfer Entry command to store a new
name in the system.
When prompted by the system, say the name you
would like to give the new entry.
For example, say: “Mary.”
If the name is too long or too short, the system
tells you, then prompts you for a name again.
Also, if the name sounds too much like a name
already stored, the system tells you, then prompts
you for a name again.
The system will ask you to transfer a phone
number stored in the cellular phone’s memory.
Enter a phone number by voice command:
For example, say: “five five five one two one two.”
See “How to say numbers” in this section for
more information.
To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular
phone’s memory:
Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges
the command and asks you to initiate the transfer
from the phone handset. The new contact phone
number will be transferred from the cellular
phone via the Bluetooth姞communication link.
The transfer procedure varies according to each
cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s
Manual for details. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions
on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN
recommended cellular phones.
The system repeats the number and prompts you
for the next command. When you have finished
entering numbers or transferring an entry, choose
“Store.”
The system confirms the name, location and
number.
“Delete Entry” 䊊
B
Use the Delete Entry command to erase one
entry from the phonebook. After the system rec-
ognizes the command, speak the name to delete
or say “List Names” to choose an entry.
“List names” 䊊
C
Use the List Names command to hear all the
names in the phonebook.
The system recites the phonebook entries but
does not include the actual phone numbers.
When the playback of the list is complete, the
system goes back to the main menu.
You can stop the playback of the list at any time
by pressing the button on the steering
wheel. The system ends the VR session.
“Phonebook” (phones with automatic
phonebook download function)
NOTE:
The “Transfer Entry” command is not avail-
able when the vehicle is moving.
Main Menu
“Phonebook”
“List Names” 䊊
A
“Transfer Entry” 䊊
B
“Delete Entry” 䊊
C
“Record Name” 䊊
D
For phones that support automatic download of the
phonebook (PBAP Bluetooth姞profile), the
“Phonebook” command is used to manage entries
in the vehicle phonebook. You can say the name of
an entry at this menu to initiate dialing of that entry.
The phonebook stores up to 1000 names for
each phone connected to the system.
When a phone is connected to the system, the
phonebook is automatically downloaded to the
vehicle. This feature allows you to access your
phonebook from the Bluetooth姞system and call
contacts by name. You can record a custom
voice tag for contact names that the system has
difficulty recognizing. For more information see
“Record Name” in this section.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-71
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
Each phone has its own separate phone-
book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone-
book if you are currently connected with
Phone B.
“List names” 䊊
A
Use the List Names command to hear all the
names and locations in the phone book.
The system recites the phone book entries but
does not include the actual phone numbers.
When the playback of the list is complete, the
system goes back to the main menu.
You can stop the playback of the list at any time
by pressing the button on the steering
wheel. The system ends the VR session. See the
“Record Name” command in this section for in-
formation about recording custom voice tags for
list entries that the system has difficulty pro-
nouncing.
“Transfer entry” 䊊
B
Use the Transfer Entry command to store a new
name in the system.
When prompted by the system, say the name you
would like to give the new entry.
For example, say: “Mary.”
If the name is too long or too short, the system
tells you, then prompts you for a name again.
Also, if the name sounds too much like a name
already stored, the system tells you, then prompts
you for a name again.
The system will ask you to transfer a phone
number stored in the cellular phone’s memory.
Enter a phone number by voice command:
For example, say: “five five five one two one two.”
See “How to say numbers” in this section for
more information.
To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular
phone’s memory:
Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges
the command and asks you to initiate the transfer
from the phone handset. The new contact phone
number will be transferred from the cellular
phone via the Bluetooth姞communication link.
The transfer procedure varies according to each
cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s
Manual for details. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions
on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN
recommended cellular phones.
The system repeats the number and prompts you
for the next command. When you have finished
entering numbers or transferring an entry, choose
“Store.”
The system confirms the name, location and
number.
“Delete Entry” 䊊
C
Use the Delete Entry command to erase one
entry from the phonebook. After the system rec-
ognizes the command, speak the name to delete
or say “List Names” to choose an entry.
“Record name” 䊊
D
The system allows you to record custom voice
tags for contact names in the phonebook that the
vehicle has difficulty recognizing. This feature can
also be used to record voice tags to directly dial
an entry with multiple numbers. Up to 40 voice
tags can be recorded to the system.
“Recent Calls”
Main Menu
“Recent Calls”
“Outgoing” 䊊
A
“Incoming” 䊊
B
“Missed” 䊊
C
4-72 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Information Provided by:
Use the Recent Calls command to access out-
going, incoming or missed calls.
“Outgoing” 䊊
A
Use the Outgoing command to list the outgoing
calls made from the vehicle.
“Incoming” 䊊
B
Use the Incoming command to list the incoming
calls made to the vehicle.
“Missed” 䊊
C
Use the Missed command to list the calls made to
the vehicle that were not answered.
“Connect Phone”
NOTE:
The Add Phone command is not available
when the vehicle is moving.
Main Menu
“Connect Phone”
“Add Phone” 䊊
A
“Select Phone” 䊊
B
“Delete Phone” 䊊
C
“Turn Bluetooth OFF” 䊊
D
Use the Connect Phone commands to manage
the phones connecting to the vehicle or to enable
the Bluetooth姞function on the vehicle.
“Add Phone” 䊊
A
Use the Add Phone command to add a phone to
the vehicle. See “Connecting procedure” in this
section for more information.
“Select Phone” 䊊
B
Use the Select Phone command to select from a
list of phones connected to the vehicle. The sys-
tem will list the names assigned to each phone
and then prompt you for the phone you wish to
select. Only one phone can be active at a time.
“Delete Phone” 䊊
C
Use the Delete Phone command to delete a
phone that is connected to the vehicle. The sys-
tem will list the names assigned to each phone
and then prompt you for the phone you wish to
delete. Deleting a phone from the vehicle will also
delete that phonebook for that phone.
“Turn Bluetooth OFF” 䊊
D
Use the Turn Bluetooth OFF command to prevent
a wireless connection to your phone.
SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE
Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-of-
dialect users to train the system to improve rec-
ognition accuracy. By repeating a number of
commands, the users can create a voice model of
their own voice that is stored in the system. The
system is capable of storing a different speaker
adaptation model for each connected phone.
Training procedure
The procedure for training a voice is as follows.
1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet
outdoor location.
2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine run-
ning, the parking brake on, and the transmis-
sion in P (Park).
3. Press and hold the button for more
than 5 seconds.
4. The system announces: “Press the
PHONE/SEND ( ) button for the
hands-free phone system to enter the
speaker adaptation mode or press the
PHONE/END ( ) button to select a dif-
ferent language.”
Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-73
Information Provided by:
5. Press the button.
For information on selecting a different lan-
guage, see “Choosing a language” in this
section.
6. Voice memory A or memory B is selected
automatically. If both memory locations are
already in use, the system will prompt you to
overwrite one. Follow the instructions pro-
vided by the system.
7. When preparation is complete and you are
ready to begin, press the button.
8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow the
instructions provided by the system.
9. When training is finished, the system will tell
you an adequate number of phrases have
been recorded.
10. The system will announce that speaker ad-
aptation has been completed and the sys-
tem is ready.
The SA mode will stop if:
●The button is pressed for more than 5
seconds in SA mode.
●The vehicle begins moving during SA mode.
●The ignition switch is placed in the OFF or
LOCK position.
Training phrases
During the SA mode, the system instructs the
trainer to say the following phrases. (The system
will prompt you for each phrase.)
●phonebook transfer entry
●dial three oh four two nine
●delete call back number
●incoming
●transfer entry
●eight pause nine three two pause seven
●delete all entries
●call seven two four zero nine
●phonebook delete entry
●next entry
●dial star two one seven oh
●yes
●no
●select
●missed
●dial eight five six nine two
●Bluetooth on
●outgoing
●call three one nine oh two
●nine seven pause pause three oh eight
●cancel
●call back number
●call star two zero nine five
●delete phone
●dial eight three zero five one
●record name
●four three pause two nine pause zero
●delete redial number
●phonebook list names
●call eight oh five four one
●correction
●connect phone
●dial seven four oh one eight
●previous entry
●delete
●dial nine seven two six six
●call seven six three oh one
●go back
●call five six two eight zero
●dial six six four three seven
4-74 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Information Provided by:
MANUAL CONTROL
While using the voice recognition system, it is
possible to select menu options by using the
steering wheel controls instead of speaking voice
commands. The manual control mode does not
allow dialing a phone number by digits. The user
may select an entry from the Phonebook or Re-
cent Calls lists. To re-activate voice recognition,
exit the manual control mode by pressing and
holding the PHONE/END ( ) button. At that
time, pressing the PHONE/SEND ( ) button
will start the Hands Free Phone System.
Operating tips
●To enter manual control mode, start the
voice recognition system and tilt the tuning
() switch up or down. The system will
speak ⬙Showing Manual Options⬙when
manual controls are initially activated.
●To browse the menu options, tilt the tuning
() switch up or down. The system will
always speak the current menu option. De-
pending on the audio display, it will also
show the current menu option.
●To select the current menu option, press the
PHONE/SEND ( ) button.
●To go back to the previous menu, press the
PHONE/END ( ) button. If the current
menu is the Main Menu, pressing the
PHONE/END ( ) button will exit the
Phone system.
●To exit the manual control mode, press and
hold the PHONE/END ( ) button for 5
seconds.
Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-75
Information Provided by:
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all voice
commands without difficulty. If problems are en-
countered, try the following solutions.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try
each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until
the problem is resolved.
Symptom Solution
System fails to interpret the command correctly.
1. Ensure that the command is valid. See “List of voice commands” in this section.
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too
noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to im-
prove the recognition response for the speaker. See “Speaker adaptation (SA) mode” in this section.
The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the
phone book.
1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by
using the “List Names” command. See “Phonebook” in this section.
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.
4-76 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems
Information Provided by:
5 Starting and driving
Precautions when starting and driving................5-2
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ..................5-2
Three-way catalyst..............................5-2
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
(if so equipped) ................................5-3
Avoiding collision and rollover....................5-5
Off-road recovery...............................5-5
Rapid air pressure loss ..........................5-6
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving................5-6
Ignition switch.....................................5-7
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ (if so equipped) .........5-7
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
(if so equipped) ................................5-8
Manual transmission (if so equipped) .............5-9
Ignition switch positions ........................5-10
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system .............5-10
Before starting the engine .........................5-11
Starting the engine ...............................5-11
Driving the vehicle ................................5-12
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
(if so equipped) ...............................5-12
Manual transmission (if so equipped) ............5-17
Parking brake ....................................5-19
Cruise control (if so equipped) .....................5-20
Precautions on cruise control ...................5-20
Cruise control operations.......................5-21
Break-in schedule ................................5-22
Increasing fuel economy...........................5-22
Parking/parking on hills............................5-23
Power steering ...................................5-24
Brake system ....................................5-24
Brake precautions .............................5-24
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
(if so equipped) ...............................5-25
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system
(if so equipped) ..................................5-26
Cold weather driving..............................5-28
Freeing a frozen door lock ......................5-28
Anti-freeze....................................5-28
Battery .......................................5-28
Draining of coolant water .......................5-28
Tire equipment ................................5-28
Special winter equipment.......................5-28
Driving on snow or ice .........................5-28
Engine block heater (if so equipped).............5-29
Information Provided by:
WARNING
●Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.
●Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously in-
jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear
seatback and trunk lid securely latched
when not in use, and prevent children’s
access to car keys.
EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)
WARNING
●Do not breathe exhaust gases; they
contain colorless and odorless carbon
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger-
ous. It can cause unconsciousness or
death.
●If you suspect that exhaust fumes are
entering the vehicle, drive with all win-
dows fully open, and have the vehicle
inspected immediately.
●Do not run the engine in closed spaces
such as a garage.
●Do not park the vehicle with the engine
running for any extended length of time.
●Keep the trunk lid closed while driving,
otherwise exhaust gases could be
drawn into the passenger compart-
ment. If you must drive with the trunk lid
open, follow these precautions:
1. Open all the windows.
2. Set the air recirculation but-
ton to off and the fan control dial to
HI to circulate the air.
●If electrical wiring or other cable con-
nections must pass to a trailer through
the seal on the trunk lid or the body,
follow the manufacturer’s recommen-
dation to prevent carbon monoxide en-
try into the vehicle.
●The exhaust system and body should be
inspected by a qualified mechanic
whenever:
a. The vehicle is raised for service.
b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are
entering into the passenger
compartment.
c. You notice a change in the sound of
the exhaust system.
d. You have had an accident involving
damage to the exhaust system, un-
derbody, or rear of the vehicle.
THREE-WAY CATALYST
The three-way catalyst is an emission control
device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust
gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at
high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.
WARNING
●The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-
tem are very hot. Keep people, animals
or flammable materials away from the
exhaust system components.
●Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry grass,
waste paper or rags. They may ignite
and cause a fire.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING
AND DRIVING
5-2 Starting and driving
Information Provided by:
CAUTION
●Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits
from leaded gasoline will seriously re-
duce the three-way catalyst’s ability to
help reduce exhaust pollutants.
●Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-
tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or
electrical systems can cause overrich
fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,
causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv-
ing if the engine misfires, or if notice-
able loss of performance or other un-
usual operating conditions are
detected. Have the vehicle inspected
promptly by a NISSAN dealer.
●Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel
level. Running out of fuel could cause
the engine to misfire, damaging the
three-way catalyst.
●Do not race the engine while warming it
up.
●Do not push or tow your vehicle to start
the engine.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS) (if so equipped)
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and in-
flated to the inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size indicated on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,
you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is significantly
under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check all 4 tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-
heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS mal-
function indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-
mately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-
function exists. When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,
including the installation of replacement or alter-
nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac-
ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
Additional information:
●The TPMS does not monitor the tire
pressure of the spare tire.
Starting and driving 5-3
Information Provided by:
●The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle
is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25
km/h). Also, this system may not detect a
sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a
flat tire while driving).
●The low tire pressure warning light does not
automatically turn off when the tire pressure
is adjusted for all 4 tires. After the tires are
inflated to the recommended pressure, the
vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16
MPH (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and
turn off the low tire pressure warning light.
Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire
pressure.
●Tire pressure rises and falls depending on
the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation
and the outside temperature. Low outside
temperature can lower the temperature of
the air inside the tire which can cause a
lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause
the low tire pressure warning light to illumi-
nate. If the warning light illuminates in low
ambient temperature, check the tire pres-
sure for all four tires.
●The Tire and Loading Information label (also
referred to as the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label) is located in the
driver’s door opening.
For additional information, see “Low tire pressure
warning light” in the “Instruments and controls”
section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency” section.
WARNING
●If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sudden
steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,
reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road
to a safe location and stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Driving with under-
inflated tires may permanently damage
the tires and increase the likelihood of
tire failure. Serious vehicle damage
could occur and may lead to an acci-
dent and could result in serious per-
sonal injury. Check the tire pressure for
all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to
the recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion label, located on the driver’s door
opening, to turn the low tire pressure
warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,
replace it with a spare tire as soon as
possible. (See “Flat tire” in the “In case
of emergency” section for changing a
flat tire.)
●When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, the TPMS will not function
and the low tire pressure warning light
will flash for approximately 1 minute.
The light will remain on after 1 minute.
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting.
●Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
●Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure
sensors.
CAUTION
Do not place metalized film or any metal
parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This
may cause poor reception of the signals
from the tire pressure sensors, and the
TPMS will not function properly.
Some devices and transmitters may temporarily
interfere with the operation of the TPMS and
cause the low tire pressure warning light to illu-
minate.
5-4 Starting and driving
Information Provided by:
Some examples are:
– Facilities or electric devices using similar radio
frequencies are near the vehicle.
– If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is
being used in or near the vehicle.
– If a computer (or similar equipment) or a
DC/AC converter is being used in or near the
vehicle.
FCC Notice:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to op-
erate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry
Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undes-
ired operation of the device.
AVOIDING COLLISION AND
ROLLOVER
WARNING
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe
and prudent manner may result in loss of
control or an accident.
Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey
all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,
high speed cornering, or sudden steering ma-
neuvers, because these driving practices could
cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As with
any vehicle, loss of control could result in a
collision with other vehicles or objects or
cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if
the loss of control causes the vehicle to
slide sideways.
Be attentive at all times, and
avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under
the influence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-
scription or over-the-counter drugs which may
cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as
outlined in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of this
manual, and also instruct your passengers to do so.
Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions
and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
or improperly belted person is significantly
more likely to be injured or killed than a
person properly wearing a seat belt.
OFF-ROAD RECOVERY
While driving, the right side or left side wheels
may unintentionally leave the road surface. If this
occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by follow-
ing the procedure below. Please note that this
procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle
must be driven as appropriate based on the con-
ditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Do not apply the brakes.
3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel
with both hands and try to hold a straight
course.
4. When appropriate , slowly release the accel-
erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.
5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the ve-
hicle to follow the road while vehicle speed
is reduced. Do not attempt to drive the ve-
hicle back onto the road surface until vehicle
speed is reduced.
6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the
steering wheel until both tires return to the
road surface. When all tires are on the road
surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the ap-
propriate driving lane.
Starting and driving 5-5
Information Provided by:
●If you decide that it is not safe to return the
vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle,
road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the
vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road.
RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS
Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can occur
if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to
hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure loss
can also be caused by driving on under-inflated
tires.
Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling
and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway
speeds.
Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintain-
ing the correct air pressure and visually inspect
the tires for wear and damage. See “Wheels and
tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses air
pressure or “blows-out” while driving, maintain
control of the vehicle by following the procedure
below. Please note that this procedure is only a
general guide. The vehicle must be driven as
appropriate based on the conditions of the ve-
hicle, road and traffic.
WARNING
The following actions can increase the
chance of losing control of the vehicle if
there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure.
Losing control of the vehicle may cause a
collision and result in personal injury.
●The vehicle generally moves or pulls in
the direction of the flat tire.
●Do not rapidly apply the brakes.
●Do not rapidly release the accelerator
pedal.
●Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.
1. Remain calm and do not over react.
2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel
with both hands and try to hold a straight
course.
3. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-
erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.
4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location
off the road and away from traffic if possible.
5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually
stop the vehicle.
6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and
either contact a roadside emergency service
to change the tire or see “Changing a flat
tire” in the “In case of emergency” section of
this manual.
DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND
DRIVING
WARNING
Never drive under the influence of alcohol
or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re-
duces coordination, delays reaction time
and impairs judgement. Driving after
drinking alcohol increases the likelihood
of being involved in an accident injuring
yourself and others. Additionally, if you
are injured in an accident, alcohol can
increase the severity of the injury.
NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,
you must choose not to drive under the influence
of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are
injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Al-
though the local laws vary on what is considered
to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol
affects all people differently and most people
underestimate the effects of alcohol.
Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! And
that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, pre-
scription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if your
ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco-
hol, drugs, or some other physical condition.
5-6 Starting and driving
Information Provided by:
WARNING
●Never remove or turn the key to the
LOCK position while driving. The steer-
ing wheel will lock (for models with a
steering lock mechanism). This may
cause the driver to lose control of the
vehicle and could result in serious ve-
hicle damage or personal injury.
●Never place the ignition switch in the
LOCK position while driving. The steer-
ing wheel will lock (for models with a
steering lock mechanism). This may
cause the driver to lose control of the
vehicle and could result in serious ve-
hicle damage or personal injury. NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™ (if so
equipped)
The Intelligent Key can operate the ignition
switch without taking the key out from your
pocket or purse. The operating environment
and/or conditions may affect the Intelligent Key
operation.
CAUTION
●Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with
you when operating the vehicle.
●Never leave the Intelligent Key inside
the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
●If the vehicle battery is discharged the
ignition switch cannot be moved from
the “LOCK” position and if the steering
lock is engaged, the steering wheel may
not be able to be moved. Charge the
battery as soon as possible. (See
“JUMP STARTING” in the “In case of
emergency” section of this manual.)
LSD0175
IGNITION SWITCH
Starting and driving 5-7
Information Provided by:
Operating range
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used
when the Intelligent Key is within the specified
operating range.
When the Intelligent Key battery is almost dis-
charged or strong radio waves are present near
the operating location, the Intelligent Key sys-
tem’s operating range becomes narrower and
may not function properly.
If the Intelligent Key is within the operating range,
it is possible for anyone, even someone who does
not carry the Intelligent Key, to turn the ignition
switch to start the engine.
The operating range of the engine start function
is inside of the vehicle 䊊
1.
●If the Intelligent Key is placed on the instru-
ment panel, rear parcel shelf, inside the
glove box, storage bin or door pocket, the
Intelligent Key may not function.
●If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door
or window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent
Key may function.
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT) (if so
equipped)
The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition
switch cannot be turned to the LOCK position
until the shift selector is moved to the P (Park)
position.
●When moving the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, make sure the shift selector
is in the P (Park) position.
WSD0191
Without Intelligent Key
WSD0041
5-8 Starting and driving
Information Provided by:
●When removing the key from the ignition
switch, make sure the shift selector is in the
P (Park) position.
When the ignition switch cannot be turned to the
LOCK position:
1. Shift the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-
tion.
2. Turn the ignition switch slightly in the ON
direction.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-
tion.
4. Remove the key if it is inserted in the ignition
switch.
If the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK posi-
tion, the shift selector cannot be moved from the
P (Park) position.
The shift selector can be moved if the igni-
tion switch is placed in the ON position and
the foot brake pedal is depressed.
There is an OFF position between the
LOCK and ACC positions. The OFF position
is indicated by a “1” on the key cylinder.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if so
equipped)
The ignition switch includes a device that helps
prevent accidental removal of the key while driv-
ing.
The key can only be removed when the ignition
switch is in the LOCK position.
On manual transmission models, to turn the igni-
tion switch to the LOCK position from the ACC or
ON position, place the ignition switch in the OFF
position, push the key in, then place the ignition
switch in LOCK position.
With Intelligent Key
LSD0175 WSD0052
Starting and driving 5-9
Information Provided by:
In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it
must be turned about 1/8 of a turn clockwise
from the straight up position.
To lock the steering wheel (for models with
steering lock mechanism), place the igni-
tion switch in the LOCK position. Remove
the key. To unlock the steering wheel, in-
sert the key and turn it gently while rotating
the steering wheel slightly right and left.
IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS
LOCK: Normal parking position (0)
●Intelligent Key :
●PUSH OFF- The steering lock can only
be locked at this position (for vehicles
equipped with a steering lock mecha-
nism).
OFF: (1)
The engine can be turned off without locking the
steering wheel (for vehicles equipped with a
steering lock mechanism).
ACC: (Accessories) (2)
This position activates electrical accessories
such as the radio when the engine is not running.
ON: Normal operating position (3)
●Intelligent Key :
●PUSH ON- The ignition switch will be
unlocked while carrying the Intelligent
Key.
This position turns on the ignition system and the
electrical accessories.
START: (4)
This position starts the engine. As soon as the
engine has started, release the key. It automati-
cally returns to the ON position.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer system will not
allow the engine to start without the use of the
registered key.
If the engine fails to start using a registered key
(for example, when interference is caused by
another registered key, an automated toll road
device or automatic payment device on the key
ring), restart the engine using the following pro-
cedure:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position
for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position, and wait approximately 10
seconds.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device
(which may have caused the interference)
separate from the registered key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-
ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-
rate key ring to avoid interference from other
devices.
5-10 Starting and driving
Information Provided by:
●Make sure the area around the vehicle is
clear.
●Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-
ant, brake and clutch fluid, and windshield-
washer fluid as frequently as possible, or at
least whenever you refuel.
●Check that all windows and lights are clean.
●Visually inspect tires for their appearance
and condition. Also check tires for proper
inflation.
●Lock all doors.
●Position seat and adjust head restraints and
headrests (if so equipped).
●Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
●Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to
do likewise.
●Check the operation of warning lights when
the key is turned to the ON (3) position. See
“Warning/indicator lights and audible re-
minders” in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. CVT model:
Move the shift selector to P (Park) or N
(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.
The shift selector cannot be moved out
of P (Park) and into any of the other
gear positions if the ignition switch is
turned to the OFF position or if the key
is removed from the ignition switch.
The starter is designed not to operate if
the shift selector is in any of the driving
positions.
Manual transmission model:
Move the shift selector to N (Neutral). De-
press the clutch pedal to the floor while
cranking the engine.
The starter is designed not to operate
unless the clutch pedal is fully de-
pressed.
Models with Intelligent Key: Slowly
“PUSH ON” the ignition switch. When the
Intelligent Key warning light in the
meter illuminates in green, the ignition
switch can be turned.
The Intelligent Key must be carried
when operating the ignition switch.
When the Intelligent Key warning
light in the meter blinks in red and the
inside warning buzzer emits a short beep, be
sure that the shift selector is in the P (Park)
position and the ignition switch is securely
returned to the LOCK position.
The Intelligent Key warning light blink-
ing in red, turns off by performing the follow-
ing operations:
●Return the ignition switch to the LOCK
position.
●
Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position.
When the buzzer beeps 4 times continu-
ously, check for the following:
●The ignition switch is returned to the
LOCK position.
●The mechanical key is not inserted into
the ignition switch.
The inside warning buzzer stops when one
of the following is performed:
●Return the ignition switch to the LOCK
position.
●Remove the mechanical key from the ig-
nition switch.
●Close the doors.
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE
Starting and driving 5-11
Information Provided by:
3. Crank the engine with your foot off the
accelerator pedal by turning the ignition
switch to START. Release the switch when
the engine starts. If the engine starts, but
fails to run, repeat the above procedure.
●If the engine is very hard to start in ex-
tremely cold weather or when restarting,
depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap-
proximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold it
and then crank the engine. Release the
switch and the accelerator pedal when
the engine starts.
●If the engine is very hard to start because
it is flooded, depress the accelerator
pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Crank the engine for 5-6 seconds. After
cranking the engine, release the accel-
erator pedal. Crank the engine with your
foot off the accelerator pedal by turn-
ing the ignition switch to START. Release
the key when the engine starts. If the
engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the
above procedure.
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more than
15 seconds at a time. If the engine does
not start, turn the ignition switch to off
and wait 10 seconds before cranking
again, otherwise the starter could be
damaged.
4. Warm-up
Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec-
onds after starting. Do not race the engine
while warming it up. Drive at moderate
speed for a short distance first, especially in
cold weather.
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT) (if so
equipped)
WARNING
●Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-
tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low).
Always depress the brake pedal until
shifting is completed. Failure to do so
could cause you to lose control and
have an accident.
●Cold engine idle speed is high, so use
caution when shifting into a forward or
reverse gear before the engine has
warmed up.
●Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of control.
●Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)
while the vehicle is moving. This could
cause an accident.
CAUTION
When stopping the vehicle on an uphill
grade, do not hold the vehicle by depress-
ing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake
should be used for this purpose.
DRIVING THE VEHICLE
5-12 Starting and driving
Information Provided by:
The CVT in your vehicle is electronically con-
trolled to produce maximum power and smooth
operation.
The recommended operating procedures for this
transmission are shown on the following pages.
Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle
performance and driving enjoyment.
NOTE:
Engine power may be automatically re-
duced to protect the CVT if the engine
speed increases quickly when driving on
slippery roads or while being tested on
some dynamometers.
Starting the vehicle
1. After starting the engine, fully depress the
foot brake pedal before moving the shift
selector out of the P (Park) position.
2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and
move the shift selector into a driving gear.
3. Release the foot brake, then gradually start
the vehicle in motion.
4. Stop the vehicle completely before shifting
the shift selector to the P (Park) position.
The CVT is designed so the foot brake
pedal MUST be depressed before shifting
from P (Park) to any drive position while
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
The shift selector cannot be moved out of P
(Park) and into any of the other gear posi-
tions if the ignition switch is turned to the
LOCK or OFF position or if the key is re-
moved.
To move the shift selector:
Push the button 䊊
Awhile depressing the
brake pedal
Push the button 䊊
Ato shift
Shift without pushing button 䊊
A
Shifting
After starting the engine, fully depress the brake
pedal and move the shift selector from P (Park) to
any of the desired shift positions.
LSD0177
Starting and driving 5-13
Information Provided by:
WARNING
Apply the parking brake if the shift selec-
tor is in any position while the engine is
not running. Failure to do so could cause
the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll
away and result in serious personal injury
or property damage.
If the key is turned to the OFF or ACC position for
any reason while the vehicle is in N (Neutral), or
any drive position, the key cannot be turned to the
LOCK position and be removed from the ignition
switch. If this occurs, perform the following steps:
1. Apply the parking brake when the vehicle is
stopped.
2. Move the shift selector to P (Park) to park the
vehicle and turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position to remove the key.
P (Park):
CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use the
P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when
the vehicle is completely stopped.
Use the P (Park) selector position when the ve-
hicle is parked or when starting the engine. Make
sure the vehicle is completely stopped. The
brake pedal must be depressed and the
shift selector button pushed in to move the
shift selector from N (Neutral) or any drive
position to P (Park). Apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
first, then place the shift selector into the P (Park)
position.
R (Reverse):
CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use the
P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when
the vehicle is completely stopped.
Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make
sure the vehicle is completely stopped before
selecting R (Reverse) position. R (Reverse)
speed is limited to 25 MPH (40 km/h). Do not
exceed 25 MPH (40 km/h) in the R (Reverse)
position. The brake pedal must be de-
pressed and the shift selector button
pushed in to move the shift selector from P
(Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position to R
(Reverse).
N (Neutral):
Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The
engine can be started in this position. You may
shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine
while the vehicle is moving.
D (Drive):
Use this position for all normal forward driving.
L (Low):
Use this position for maximum engine braking on
steep downhill gradients/climbing steep slopes
and whenever approaching sharp bends. Do not
use the L (Low) position in any other circum-
stances.
5-14 Starting and driving
Information Provided by:
Manual shift mode (if so equipped)
When the manual shift mode button 䊊
Ais
pressed with the vehicle stopped or while driving,
the transmission enters the manual shift mode.
Shift ranges can be selected manually using the
paddles on the steering wheel 䊊
Band 䊊
C.
In the manual shift mode, the shift range is dis-
played on the position indicator in the meter.
Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:
M1←→ M2 ←→ M3 ←→ M4 ←→ M5 ←→ M6
M6 (6th):
Use this position for all normal forward driving at
highway speeds.
M5 (5th):
Use this position when driving up long slopes, or
for engine braking when driving down long
slopes.
M4 (4th), M3 (3rd) and M2 (2nd):
Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill
grades.
M1 (1st):
Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly
or driving slowly through deep snow, sand or
mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep
downhill grades.
●Remember not to drive at high speeds for
extended periods of time in lower than M6
range. This reduces fuel economy.
When shifting up:
Pull the + 䊊
Cpaddle on the steering wheel
towards you. (Shifts to higher range.)
When shifting down:
Pull the ⫺䊊
Bpaddle on the steering wheel
towards you. (Shifts to lower range.)
●Pulling the same paddle twice will shift the
ranges in succession. However, if this mo-
tion is rapidly done, the second shifting may
not be completed properly.
When canceling the manual shift mode:
Press the manual shift mode button 䊊
Ato return
the transmission to the normal driving mode.
●In the manual shift mode, the transmis-
sion may not shift to the selected gear.
This helps maintain driving perfor-
mance and reduces the chance of ve-
hicle damage or loss of control.
WSD0192 LSD0193
Starting and driving 5-15
Information Provided by:
●In the manual shift mode, the transmis-
sion may shift up automatically to a
higher range than selected if the en-
gine speed is too high. When the ve-
hicle speed decreases, the transmis-
sion automatically shifts down. The
transmission shifts to M1 (1st) gear
before the vehicle comes to a com-
plete stop. When accelerating again, it
is necessary to shift up to the desired
range.
●When the CVT fluid temperature is ex-
tremely low, the manual shift mode may not
work and automatically shift as a drive mode.
This is not a malfunction. In this case, press
the manual shift button 䊊
Aoff and drive for a
while and then reactivate the manual shift
mode.
●When the CVT fluid temperature is high, the
shift range may upshift in lower rpm than
usual. This is not a malfunction.
Shift lock release
If the battery is discharged, the shift selector may
not be moved from the P (Park) position even with
the brake pedal depressed.
To move the shift selector, release the shift lock.
The shift selector can be moved to N (Neutral).
To push the shift lock release, complete the fol-
lowing procedure:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-
tion and remove the key
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Remove the shift lock release cover as
shown.
4. Insert a small screwdriver in the shift lock
release slot and push down.
5. Move the shift selector to the N (Neutral)
position while holding down the shift lock
release.
6. Now the vehicle may be moved to the de-
sired location.
If the shift selector cannot be moved out of P
(Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the trans-
mission as soon as possible.
WARNING
If the shift selector cannot be moved from
the P (Park) position while the engine is
running and the brake pedal is depressed,
the stop lights may not work. Malfunction-
ing stop lights could cause an accident
injuring yourself and others.
LSD0178
5-16 Starting and driving
Information Provided by:
Overdrive (O/D) OFF switch
When the O/D OFF switch is pushed with the
shift selector in the D (Drive) position, the
light in the instrument panel illuminates. See
“Overdrive off indicator light (CVT models)” in the
“Instruments and controls”section of this manual.
Use the Overdrive off mode when you need im-
proved engine braking.
To turn off the Overdrive off mode, push the O/D
OFF switch again. The indicator light will
turn off.
Each time the engine is started, or when the shift
selector is shifted to any position other than D
(Drive), the Overdrive off mode will be automati-
cally turned off.
Accelerator downshift
— in D position —
For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel-
erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis-
sion down into a lower gear, depending on the
vehicle speed.
Fail-safe
When the fail-safe operation occurs, the CVT will
not be shifted into the selected driving position.
If the vehicle is driven under extreme con-
ditions, such as excessive wheel spinning
and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe
system may be activated. The MIL may
come on to indicate the fail-safe mode is
activated, see “Malfunction indicator light
(MIL)” in the “Instruments and controls”
section. This will occur even if all electrical
circuits are functioning properly. In this
case, place the ignition switch in the OFF
position and wait for 10 seconds. Then
place the ignition switch back in the ON
position. The vehicle should return to its
normal operating condition. If it does not
return to its normal operating condition,
have a NISSAN dealer check the transmis-
sion and repair if necessary.
WARNING
When the high fluid temperature protec-
tion mode or fail-safe operation occurs,
vehicle speed may be gradually reduced.
The reduced speed may be lower than
other traffic, which could increase the
chance of a collision. Be especially care-
ful when driving. If necessary, pull to the
side of the road at a safe place and allow
the transmission to return to normal op-
eration, or have it repaired if necessary.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if so
equipped)
WARNING
●Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of control.
●Do not over-rev the engine when shift-
ing to a lower gear. This may cause a
loss of control or engine damage.
LSD0179
Starting and driving 5-17
Information Provided by:
CAUTION
●Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal
while driving. This may cause clutch
damage.
●Fully depress the clutch pedal before
shifting to help prevent transmission
damage.
●Stop your vehicle completely before
shifting into R (Reverse).
●When the vehicle is stopped with the
engine running (for example, at a stop
light), shift to N (Neutral) and release
the clutch pedal with the foot brake
applied. Shifting
To change gears or when upshifting or down-
shifting, depress the clutch pedal fully, shift into
the appropriate gear, then release the clutch
slowly and smoothly.
To ensure smooth gear changes, fully depress
the clutch pedal before operating the shift selec-
tor. If the clutch pedal is not fully depressed
before the transmission is shifted, a gear noise
may be heard. Transmission damage may occur.
Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd, 3rd,
4th and 5th up to 6th gear in sequence according
to vehicle speed.
To back up, lift up on the shift selector ring 䊊
1and
then move it to the R (Reverse) position after
stopping the vehicle completely.
The shift selector ring 䊊
1returns to its original
position when the shift selector is moved to the N
(Neutral) position.
If it is difficult to move the shift selector into R
(Reverse) or 1 (1st), shift into N (Neutral), then
release the clutch pedal. Depress the clutch
pedal again and shift into R (Reverse) or 1 (1st).
Suggested upshift speeds
The following are suggested vehicle speeds for
shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions
relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance.
Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road
conditions, the weather and individual driving
habits.
GEAR CHANGE MPH (km/h)
1st to 2nd 8 (13)
2nd to 3rd 17 (27)
3rd to 4th 25 (40)
4th to 5th 36 (58)
5th to 6th 51 (82)
LSD0180
5-18 Starting and driving
Information Provided by:
Suggested maximum speed in each
gear
Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not
running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.
Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed
(shown below) in any gear. For level road driving,
use the highest gear suggested for that speed.
Always observe posted speed limits, and drive
according to the road conditions, which will en-
sure safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine
when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause
engine damage or loss of vehicle control.
MR20DE engine models:
GEAR MPH (km/h)
1st 27 (44)
2nd 49 (79)
3rd 68 (109)
4th —
5th —
6th —
QR25DE engine models:
GEAR MPH (km/h)
1st 33 (53)
2nd 53 (86)
3rd 75 (121)
4th —
5th —
6th —
WARNING
●Be sure the parking brake is fully re-
leased before driving. Failure to do so
can cause brake failure and lead to an
accident.
●Do not release the parking brake from
outside the vehicle.
●Do not use the shift selector in place of
the parking brake. When parking, be
sure the parking brake is fully engaged.
●Do not leave children unattended in a
vehicle. They could release the parking
brake and cause an accident.
PARKING BRAKE
Starting and driving 5-19
Information Provided by:
To engage: Pull the lever up 䊊
A.
To release:
1. Firmly apply the foot brake.
2. Manual transmission models:
Place the shift selector in the N (Neutral)
position.
CVT models:
Move the shift selector to the P (Park) position.
3. While pulling up on the parking brake lever
slightly, push the button and lower com-
pletely 䊊
B.
4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning
light goes out.
1. ACCEL/RES switch
2. COAST/SET switch
3. CANCEL switch
4. ON/OFF switch
PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE
CONTROL
●If the cruise control system malfunctions, it
cancels automatically. The SET indicator
light in the instrument panel then blinks to
warn the driver.
●If the SET indicator light blinks, turn the
cruise control switch off and have the sys-
tem checked by a NISSAN dealer.
●The SET indicator light may blink when the
cruise control switch is turned ON while
pushing the ACCEL/RES, COAST/SET, or
CANCEL switch. To properly set the cruise
control system, use the following proce-
dures.
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control when driving
under the following conditions:
●When it is not possible to keep the
vehicle at a set speed.
●In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in
speed.
●On winding or hilly roads.
●On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).
●In very windy areas.
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle
control and result in an accident.
WSD0169 LSD0176
CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)
5-20 Starting and driving
Information Provided by:
CAUTION
On manual transmission models, do not
shift into N (Neutral) without depressing
the clutch pedal when the cruise control is
set. Should this occur, depress the clutch
pedal and turn the main switch off imme-
diately. Failure to do so may cause engine
damage.
CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS
The cruise control allows driving at a speed be-
tween 25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) without
keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.
To turn on the cruise control, push the
ON·OFF switch. The CRUISE indicator light in
the instrument panel comes on.
To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to
the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch
and release it. The SET indicator light in the
instrument panel comes on. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set
speed.
●To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-
celerator pedal. When you release the
pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously
set speed.
●The vehicle may not maintain the set speed
when going up or down steep hills. If this
happens, drive without the cruise control.
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the
following three methods.
●Push the CANCEL button; the SET indicator
light in the instrument panel goes out.
●Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator light
goes out.
●Push the ON·OFF switch off. Both the
CRUISE indicator light and SET indicator
light in the instrument panel go out.
The cruise control is automatically canceled and
the SET light in the instrument panel goes out if:
●you depress the brake or clutch pedal while
pushing the ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST
switch. The preset speed is deleted from
memory.
●the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH
(13 km/h) below the set speed.
●you depress the clutch pedal (manual trans-
mission), or move the shift selector to N
(Neutral) (CVT).
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one
of the following three methods.
●Depress the accelerator pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push and
release the COAST/SET switch.
●Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.
When the vehicle attains the speed you de-
sire, release the switch.
●Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch.
Each time you do this, the set speed in-
creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one
of the following three methods.
●Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-
hicle attains the desired speed, push the
COAST/SET switch and release it.
●Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re-
lease the switch when the vehicle slows to
the desired speed.
●Push and release the COAST/SET switch.
Each time you do this, the set speed de-
creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
To resume the preset speed, push and re-
lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle re-
turns to the last set cruising speed when the
vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).
Starting and driving 5-21
Information Provided by:
CAUTION
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),
follow these recommendations to obtain
maximum engine performance and en-
sure the future reliability and economy of
your new vehicle. Failure to follow these
recommendations may result in short-
ened engine life and reduced engine
performance.
●Avoid driving for long periods at constant
speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the
engine over 4,000 rpm.
●Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.
●Avoid quick starts.
●Avoid hard braking as much as possible.
●Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles
(800 km). Your engine, axle or other parts
could be damaged.
●Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain
cruising speeds with a constant accelerator
position.
●Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.
Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy.
●Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.
Maintain a safe distance behind other ve-
hicles.
●Use a proper gear range which suits road
conditions. On level roads, shift into high
gear as soon as possible.
●Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
●Keep your engine tuned up.
●Follow the recommended periodic mainte-
nance schedule.
●Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-
sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear
and lowers fuel economy.
●Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Im-
proper alignment increases tire wear and
lowers fuel economy.
●Air conditioner operation lowers fuel
economy. Use the air conditioner only when
necessary.
●When cruising at highway speeds, it is more
economical to use the air conditioner and
leave the windows closed to reduce drag.
●Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.
See “Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and con-
sumer information” section of this manual.
BREAK-IN SCHEDULE INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY
5-22 Starting and driving
Information Provided by:
WARNING
●Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry grass,
waste paper or rags. They may ignite
and cause a fire.
●Safe parking procedures require that
both the parking brake be set and the
transmission placed into P (Park) for
CVT models or in an appropriate gear
for manual transmission models. Fail-
ure to do so could cause the vehicle to
move unexpectedly or roll away and re-
sult in an accident. Make sure the shift
selector has been pushed as far for-
ward as it can go and cannot be moved
without depressing the foot brake
pedal.
●Never leave the engine running while
the vehicle is unattended.
●Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
tivate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in seri-
ous accidents.
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Manual transmission models:
Place the shift selector in the R (Reverse)
position. When parking on an uphill grade,
place the shift selector in 1st gear.
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) models:
Move the shift selector to the P (Park) position.
3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into
traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good
practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.
●HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: 䊊
1
Turn the wheels into the curb and move the
vehicle forward until the curb side wheel
gently touches the curb.
●HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: 䊊
2
Turn the wheels away from the curb and
move the vehicle back until the curb side
wheel gently touches the curb.
●HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO
CURB: 䊊
3
Turn the wheels toward the side of the road
so the vehicle will move away from the cen-
ter of the road if it moves.
4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-
tion and remove the key.
SSD0488
PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS
Starting and driving 5-23
Information Provided by:
WARNING
●If the engine is not running or is turned
off while driving, the power assist for
the steering will not work. Steering will
be harder to operate.
●When the power steering warning light
illuminates with the engine running,
there will be no power assist for the
steering. You will still have control of
the vehicle but the steering will be
harder to operate. Have the power
steering system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
The power steering system is designed to pro-
vide power assist while driving to operate the
steering wheel with light force.
When the steering wheel is operated repeatedly
or continuously while parking or driving at a very
low speed, the power assist for the steering
wheel will be reduced. This is to prevent over-
heating of the power steering system and protect
it from getting damaged. While the power assist
is reduced, steering wheel operation will become
heavy. When the temperature of the power steer-
ing system goes down, the power assist level will
return to normal. Avoid repeating such steering
wheel operations that could cause the power
steering system to overheat.
You may hear a sound when the steering wheel is
operated quickly. However, this is not a malfunc-
tion.
If the electric power steering warning light PS
illuminates while the engine is running, it may
indicate the power steering system is not func-
tioning properly and may need servicing. Have
the power steering system checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
When the electric power steering warning light
illuminates with the engine running, there will be
no power assist for the steering but you will still
have control of the vehicle. At this time, greater
steering effort is required to operate the steering
wheel, especially in sharp turns and at low
speeds.
For additional information see “Electric power
steering warning light” in the “Instruments and
controls” section.
The brake system has two separate hydraulic
circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still
have braking at 2 wheels.
BRAKE PRECAUTIONS
Vacuum assisted brakes
The brake booster aids braking by using engine
vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the
vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,
greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be
required to stop the vehicle and stopping dis-
tance will be longer.
Using the brakes
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while
driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the
brake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the
brakes from overheating, reduce speed and
downshift to a lower gear before going down a
slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may
reduce braking performance and could result in
loss of vehicle control.
POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM
5-24 Starting and driving
Information Provided by:
WARNING
●While driving on a slippery surface, be
careful when braking, accelerating or
downshifting. Abrupt braking or accel-
erating could cause the wheels to skid
and result in an accident.
●If the engine is not running or is turned
off while driving, the power assist for
the brakes will not work. Braking will be
harder.
Wet brakes
When the vehicle is washed or driven through
water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your
braking distance will be longer and the vehicle
may pull to one side during braking.
To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe
speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to
heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return
to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high
speeds until the brakes function correctly.
Parking brake break-in
Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever the
stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened
or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or
drum/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the
best brake performance.
This procedure is described in the vehicle service
manual and can be performed by a NISSAN
dealer.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM
(ABS) (if so equipped)
WARNING
●The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is a
sophisticated device, but it cannot pre-
vent accidents resulting from careless
or dangerous driving techniques. It can
help maintain vehicle control during
braking on slippery surfaces. Remem-
ber that stopping distances on slippery
surfaces will be longer than on normal
surfaces even with ABS. Stopping dis-
tances may also be longer on rough,
gravel or snow covered roads, or if you
are using tire chains. Always maintain a
safe distance from the vehicle in front
of you. Ultimately, the driver is respon-
sible for safety.
●Tire type and condition may also affect
braking effectiveness.
– When replacing tires, install the
specified size of tires on all four
wheels.
– When installing a spare tire, make
sure that it is the proper size and type
as specified on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See “Tire and
Loading Information label” in the
“Technical and consumer informa-
tion” section of this manual.
– For detailed information, see
“Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-
nance and do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls the
brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard
braking or when braking on slippery surfaces.
The system detects the rotation speed at each
wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre-
vent each wheel from locking and sliding. By
preventing each wheel from locking, the system
helps the driver maintain steering control and
helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slip-
pery surfaces.
Using the system
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. De-
press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure,
but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will oper-
ate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer
the vehicle to avoid obstacles.
Starting and driving 5-25
Information Provided by:
WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so
may result in increased stopping
distances.
Self-test feature
The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric
pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The
computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that
tests the system each time you start the engine
and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or
reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear
a “clunk”noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a
malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunc-
tion, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the
ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The
brake system then operates normally, but without
anti-lock assistance.
If the ABS warning light illuminates during the
self-test or while driving, have the vehicle
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
Normal operation
The ABS operates at speeds above3-6MPH(5
- 10 km/h). The speed varies according to road
conditions.
When the ABS senses that 1 or more wheels are
close to locking up, the actuator rapidly applies
and releases hydraulic pressure. This action is
similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You
may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a
noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from
the actuator when it is operating. This is normal
and indicates that the ABS is operating properly.
However, the pulsation may indicate that road
conditions are hazardous and extra care is re-
quired while driving.
The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system uses
various sensors to monitor driver inputs and ve-
hicle motion. Under certain driving situations, the
system will control braking and engine output to
help keep the vehicle on its steered path.
●When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
system is operating, the slip indicator in the
instrument panel blinks.
●If the indicator blinks, the road condi-
tions may be slippery. Be sure to adjust your
speed and driving to these conditions. See
“Slip indicator light” and “Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) OFF indicator light” in the
“Instruments and controls” section.
●Indicator light
– If a malfunction occurs in the system,
the and indicator lights
come on in the instrument panel.
– As long as these indicator lights are on,
the traction control function is canceled.
If the vehicle is operated with the Vehicle Dy-
namic Control system off using the VDC OFF
switch, VDC and Traction Control System (TCS)
functions will be turned off. The indicator
will flash if wheel spin is detected. The ABS will
still operate with the VDC system off.
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
5-26 Starting and driving
Information Provided by:
When the VDC system is operating, you may feel
a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or
vibration from under the hood. This is normal and
indicates that the VDC system is working prop-
erly.
The computer has a built in diagnostic feature
that tests the system each time you start the
engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse
at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you
may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in
the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an
indication of a malfunction.
WARNING
●The Vehicle Dynamic Control system is
designed to help improve driving stabil-
ity but does not prevent accidents due
to abrupt steering operation at high
speeds or by careless or dangerous
driving techniques. Reduce vehicle
speed and be especially careful when
driving and cornering on slippery sur-
faces and always drive carefully.
●Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.
If suspension parts such as shock ab-
sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars,
bushings and wheels are not NISSAN
approved for your vehicle or are ex-
tremely deteriorated the Vehicle Dy-
namic Control system may not operate
properly. This could adversely affect ve-
hicle handling performance, and the
VDC OFF indicator light may come on.
●If brake related parts suck as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not stan-
dard equipment or are extremely dete-
riorated, the Vehicle Dynamic Control
system may not operate properly and
the Vehicle Dynamic Control OFF indi-
cator light may come on.
●When driving on extremely inclined sur-
faces such as higher banked corners,
the Vehicle Dynamic Control system
may not operate properly and the VDC
OFF indicator light may come on. Do
not drive on these types of roads.
●When driving on an unstable surface
suck as a turntable, ferry, elevator or
ramp, the Vehicle Dynamic Control OFF
indicator light may illuminate. This is
not a malfunction. Restart the engine
after driving onto a stable surface.
●If wheels or tires other then the recom-
mended ones are used, the Vehicle Dy-
namic Control system may not operate
properly and the Vehicle Dynamic Con-
trol OFF indicator light may come on.
●The Vehicle Dynamic Control system is
not a substitute for winter tires or tire
chains on a snow covered road.
Starting and driving 5-27
Information Provided by:
FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK
To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-
icer through the key hole. If the lock becomes
frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key
hole, the remote keyless entry keyfob (if so
equipped) or the NISSAN Intelligent Key™ (if so
equipped).
ANTI-FREEZE
In the winter when it is anticipated that the tem-
perature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the
anti-freeze to assure proper winter protection.
For details, see “Engine cooling system” in the
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
BATTERY
If the battery is not fully charged during extremely
cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may
freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi-
mum efficiency, the battery should be checked
regularly. For details, see “Battery” in the “Main-
tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER
If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-
freeze, drain the cooling system, including the
engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.
For details, see “Changing engine coolant” in the
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
TIRE EQUIPMENT
1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to
provide superior performance on dry pave-
ment. However, the performance of these
tires will be substantially reduced in snowy
and icy conditions. If you operate your ve-
hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom-
mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL
SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Please
consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type,
size, speed rating and availability informa-
tion.
2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded
tires may be used. However, some U.S.
states and Canadian provinces prohibit their
use. Check local, state and provincial laws
before installing studded tires.
Skid and traction capabilities of studded
snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.
3. Tire chains may be used. For details see
“Tire chains” in the “Maintenance and do-it-
yourself” section of this manual.
SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT
It is recommended that the following items be
carried in the vehicle during winter:
●A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove
ice and snow from the windows and wiper
blades.
●A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the
jack to give it firm support.
●A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.
●Extra windshield-washer fluid to refill the
reservoir tank.
DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE
WARNING
●Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),
very cold snow or ice can be slick and
very hard to drive on. The vehicle will
have much less traction or “grip” under
these conditions. Try to avoid driving on
wet ice until the road is salted or
sanded.
COLD WEATHER DRIVING
5-28 Starting and driving
Information Provided by:
●Whatever the condition, drive with cau-
tion. Accelerate and slow down with
care. If accelerating or downshifting too
fast, the drive wheels will lose even
more traction.
●Allow more stopping distance under
these conditions. Braking should be
started sooner than on dry pavement.
●Allow greater following distances on
slippery roads.
●Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).
These may appear on an otherwise
clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of
ice is seen ahead, brake before reach-
ing it. Try not to brake while on the ice,
and avoid any sudden steering
maneuvers.
●Do not use the cruise control (if so
equipped) on slippery roads.
●Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
gases under your vehicle. Keep snow
clear of the exhaust pipe and from
around your vehicle.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so
equipped)
WARNING
●Do not use your engine block heater
with an ungrounded electrical system
or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be se-
riously injured by an electrical shock if
you use an ungrounded connection.
●Disconnect and properly store the en-
gine block heater cord before starting
the engine. Damage to the cord could
result in an electrical shock and can
cause serious injury.
●Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged ex-
tension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plug
the extension cord into a Ground Fault
Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded
110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the
proper extension cord or a grounded
outlet can result in a fire or electrical
shock and cause serious personal
injury.
Engine block heaters are available through
NISSAN dealers to assist in cold temperature
starting. The engine block heater should be used
when the outside temperature is 20° F (-7° C) or
lower.
To use the engine block heater:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block
heater cord.
3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a
grounded 3 wire, 3 pronged extension cord.
4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault
Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-
volt AC (VAC) outlet.
5. The engine block heater must be plugged in
for at least2-4hours, depending on outside
temperatures, to properly warm the engine
coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the
engine block heater on.
6. Before starting the engine, unplug and prop-
erly store the cord to keep it away from
moving parts.
Starting and driving 5-29
Information Provided by:
MEMO
5-30 Starting and driving
Information Provided by:
6 In case of emergency
Flat tire ...........................................6-2
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
(if so equipped) ................................6-2
Changing a flat tire .............................6-2
Jump starting .....................................6-8
Push starting.....................................6-10
If your vehicle overheats ...........................6-11
Towing your vehicle ...............................6-12
Towing recommended by NISSAN ..............6-13
Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) .........6-14
Information Provided by:
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS) (if so equipped)
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pres-
sure of all tires except the spare. When the low
tire pressure warning light is lit, one or more of
your tires is significantly under-inflated. If the
vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the
TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low
tire pressure warning light. This system will acti-
vate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds
above 16 MPH (25 km/h). For more details, refer
to “Warning/indicator lights and audible remind-
ers” in the “Instruments and controls” section,
and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
in the “Starting and driving” section.
WARNING
●If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sudden
steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,
reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road
to a safe location and stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Driving with under-
inflated tires may permanently damage
the tires and increase the likelihood of
tire failure. Serious vehicle damage
could occur and may lead to an acci-
dent and could result in serious per-
sonal injury. Check the tire pressure for
all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to
the recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion label to turn the low tire pressure
warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,
replace it with a spare tire as soon as
possible.
●When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, the TPMS will not function
and the low tire pressure warning light
will flash for approximately 1 minute.
The light will remain on after 1 minute.
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting.
●Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
●Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure
sensors.
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be-
low:
Stopping the vehicle
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and
away from traffic.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking
brake. Shift the manual transmission into R
(Reverse), or the CVT into P (Park).
4. Turn off the engine.
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to
signal professional road assistance person-
nel that you need assistance.
6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle
and stand in a safe place, away from traffic
and clear of the vehicle.
FLAT TIRE
6-2 In case of emergency
Information Provided by:
WARNING
●Make sure the parking brake is securely
applied and the manual transmission is
shifted into R (Reverse), or the CVT is
shifted into P (Park).
●Never change tires when the vehicle is
on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is
hazardous.
●Never change tires if oncoming traffic is
close to your vehicle. Wait for profes-
sional road assistance.
Blocking wheels
Place suitable blocks 䊊
1at both the front and
back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire
䊊
2to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is
jacked up.
WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle
may move and result in personal injury. Getting the spare tire and tools
1. Open the trunk and remove the trunk divider
(if so equipped) and the cargo net (if so
equipped). Lift the trunk floor carpeting and
spare tire cover 䊊
A. Remove the jack and the
spare tire as indicated.
WCE0044
LCE0134
In case of emergency 6-3
Information Provided by:
2. To remove the jack, turn the jack screw
counterclockwise and lift out. Removing bolt-on wheel cover (if so
equipped)
CAUTION
Do not use your hands to pry off wheel
caps or wheel covers. Doing so could re-
sult in personal injury.
Wheel cover attachment to the wheel is made by
one of the wheel lug nuts. This wheel lug nut
needs to be removed before the wheel
cover can be removed from the wheel.
WCE0203 WCE0055
6-4 In case of emergency
Information Provided by:
Jacking up vehicle and removing the
damaged tire
WARNING
●Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by the jack. If it is nec-
essary to work under the vehicle, sup-
port it with safety stands.
●Use only the jack provided with your
vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the
jack provided with your vehicle on other
vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting
only your vehicle during a tire change.
●Use the correct jack-up points. Never
use any other part of the vehicle for jack
support.
●Never jack up the vehicle more than
necessary.
●Never use blocks on or under the jack.
●Do not start or run the engine while
vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the
vehicle to move. This is especially true
for vehicles with limited slip
differentials.
●Do not allow passengers to stay in the
vehicle while it is on the jack.
●Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off
the ground. It may cause the vehicle to
move.
CE1089
In case of emergency 6-5
Information Provided by:
Always refer to the proper illustrations for the
correct placement and jack-up points for your
specific vehicle model and jack type.
Carefully read the caution label attached to
the jack body and the following instruc-
tions.
1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by
turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut
wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts
until the tire is off the ground.
2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up
point as illustrated so the top of the jack
contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.
Align the jack head between the two
notches in the front or the rear as shown.
Also fit the groove of the jack head between
the notches as shown.
The jack should be used on firm and
level ground.
3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever
and rod with both hands. Carefully raise the
vehicle until the tire clears the ground. Re-
move the wheel nuts, and then remove the
tire.
Installing the spare tire
The spare tire is designed for emergency
use. See specific instructions under the
heading “Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-
nance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be-
tween the wheel and hub.
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten
the wheel nuts finger tight.
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel
nuts alternately and evenly as illustrated until
they are tight.
LCE0020 WCE0048
6-6 In case of emergency
Information Provided by:
4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire
touches the ground. Then, with the wheel
nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely
in the sequence illustrated (䊊
A,䊊
B,䊊
C,䊊
D).
Lower the vehicle completely.
WARNING
●Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the
wheel to become loose or come off.
This could cause an accident.
●Do not use oil or grease on the wheel
studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts
to become loose.
●Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve-
hicle has been driven for 600 miles
(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,
etc.).
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts
to the specified torque with a torque
wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
83 ft-lb (113 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to
specification at all times. It is recom-
mended that wheel nuts be tightened to
specification at each lubrication interval.
Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.
COLD pressure: After vehicle has been
parked for three hours or more or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire
and Loading Information Label.
5. Securely store the flat tire in the vehicle. 6. Install the jack in its storage area and tighten
the jack screw clockwise.
7. Place the spare tire cover and the trunk floor
carpeting over the damaged tire.
8. Close the trunk.
LCE0136
In case of emergency 6-7
Information Provided by:
WARNING
●Always make sure that the spare tire
and jacking equipment are properly se-
cured after use. Such items can become
dangerous projectiles in an accident or
sudden stop.
●The spare tire is designed for emer-
gency use. See specific instructions un-
der the heading “Wheels and tires” in
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.
To start your engine with a booster battery, the
instructions and precautions below must be fol-
lowed.
If the battery of a vehicle equipped with the
NISSAN Intelligent Key ™ is discharged, the
ignition switch cannot be moved from the
LOCK position, even using the mechanical
key or the valet key. Connect the jumper
cables to another vehicle, as in the case of
a discharged battery, and then the ignition
switch can be moved from the LOCK posi-
tion. Then, jump start the vehicle.
WARNING
●If done incorrectly, jump starting can
lead to a battery explosion, resulting in
severe injury or death. It could also
damage your vehicle.
●Explosive hydrogen gas is always
present in the vicinity of the battery.
Keep all sparks and flames away from
the battery.
●Do not allow battery fluid to come into
contact with eyes, skin, clothing or
painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-
rosive sulfuric acid solution which can
cause severe burns. If the fluid should
come into contact with anything, imme-
diately flush the contacted area with
water.
●Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
●The booster battery must be rated at 12
volts. Use of an improperly rated battery
can damage your vehicle.
●Whenever working on or near a battery,
always wear suitable eye protectors (for
example, goggles or industrial safety
spectacles) and remove rings, metal
bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean
over the battery when jump starting.
●Do not attempt to jump start a frozen
battery. It could explode and cause se-
rious injury.
●Your vehicle has an automatic engine
cooling fan. It could come on at any
time. Keep hands and other objects
away from it.
JUMP STARTING
6-8 In case of emergency
Information Provided by:
●If the battery of a vehicle equipped with
the Intelligent Key system is dis-
charged, the ignition switch cannot be
moved from the LOCK position, even
using the mechanical key or the valet
key. Connect the jumper cables to an-
other vehicle, as in the case of a dis-
charged battery, and then the ignition
knob can be moved from the LOCK po-
sition. Then, jump start the vehicle.
WARNING
Always follow the instructions below.
Failure to do so could result in damage to
the charging system and cause personal
injury.
1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,
position the two vehicles to bring their bat-
teries near each other.
Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.
2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift se-
lector to N (Neutral) (manual transmission)
or to P (Park) (CVT). Switch off all unneces-
sary electrical systems (lights, heater, air
conditioner, etc.).
3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so
equipped). Cover the battery with an old
cloth to reduce explosion hazard.
4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence il-
lustrated (䊊
A,䊊
B,䊊
C,䊊
D).
WCE0054
In case of emergency 6-9
Information Provided by:
CAUTION
●Always connect positive (⫹) to positive
(⫹) and negative (⫺) to body ground (for
example, strut mounting bolt, engine
lift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.
●Make sure the jumper cables do not
touch moving parts in the engine com-
partment and that the cable clamps do
not contact any other metal.
5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and
let it run for a few minutes.
For Intelligent Key system equipped models,
use the mechanical key to start the engine.
6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve-
hicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start the en-
gine of the vehicle being jump started.
CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor engaged for
more than 10 seconds. If the engine does
not start right away, place the ignition
switch in the off position and wait 3 to 4
seconds before trying again.
7. After starting the engine, carefully discon-
nect the negative cable and then the positive
cable.
8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be
sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover
the vent holes as it may be contaminated
with corrosive acid.
CAUTION
●Do not push start this vehicle. The
three-way catalyst may be damaged.
●Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) models cannot be push-started or
tow-started. Attempting to do so may
cause transmission damage.
●For manual transmission models, never
try to start the vehicle by towing it.
When the engine starts, the forward
surge could cause the vehicle to collide
with the tow vehicle.
PUSH STARTING
6-10 In case of emergency
Information Provided by:
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an
extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if
you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal
noise, etc., take the following steps.
WARNING
●Do not continue to drive if your vehicle
overheats. Doing so could cause engine
damage or a vehicle fire.
●To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never remove the radiator cap while the
engine is still hot. When the radiator
cap is removed, pressurized hot water
will spurt out, possibly causing serious
injury.
●Do not open the hood if steam is com-
ing out.
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply
the parking brake and move the shift selector
to N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P
(Park) (CVT).
Do not stop the engine.
2. Turn off the air conditioner (if so equipped).
Open all the windows, move the heater or air
conditioner temperature control to maximum
hot and fan control to high speed.
3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for
steam or coolant escaping from the radiator
before opening the hood. (If steam or cool-
ant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not
open the hood further until no steam or
coolant can be seen.
4. Open the engine hood.
WARNING
If steam or water is coming from the en-
gine, stand clear to prevent getting
burned.
5. Visually check drive belts for damage or
looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is
running. The radiator hoses and radiator
should not leak water. If coolant is leaking,
the water pump belt is missing or loose, or
the cooling fan does not run, stop the en-
gine.
WARNING
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,
jewelry or clothing to come into contact
with, or get caught in, engine belts or the
engine cooling fan. The engine cooling
fan can start at any time.
6. After the engine cools down, check the cool-
ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank
with the engine running. Add coolant to the
engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary.
Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSAN
dealer.
IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
In case of emergency 6-11
Information Provided by:
When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in
Canada) and local regulations for towing must be
followed. Incorrect towing equipment could dam-
age your vehicle. Towing instructions are avail-
able from a NISSAN dealer. Local service opera-
tors are generally familiar with the applicable laws
and procedures for towing. To assure proper
towing and to prevent accidental damage to your
vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service
operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have
the service operator carefully read the following
precautions:
WARNING
●Never ride in a vehicle that is being
towed.
●Never get under your vehicle after it has
been lifted by a tow truck.
CAUTION
●When towing, make sure that the trans-
mission, axles, steering system and
powertrain are in working condition. If
any of these conditions apply, dollies or
a flatbed tow truck must be used.
●Always attach safety chains before
towing.
For information about towing your vehicle behind
a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing”
in the “Technical and consumer information” sec-
tion of this manual.
䊊
A
(CVT) Continuously Variable Transmission
䊊
B
(M/T) Manual transmission
WCE0194
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
6-12 In case of emergency
Information Provided by:
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY
NISSAN
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed
with the driving (front) wheels off the ground or
place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.
CAUTION
●Never tow Continuously Variable Trans-
mission (CVT) models with the front
wheels on the ground or four wheels on
the ground (forward or backward), as
this may cause serious and expensive
damage to the transmission. If it is nec-
essary to tow the vehicle with the rear
wheels raised always use towing dollies
under the front wheels.
●When towing Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) models with the
front wheels on towing dollies, or when
towing manual transmission models
with the front wheels on the ground:
– Turn the ignition switch to the OFF
position, and secure the steering
wheel in a straight-ahead position
with a rope or similar device. Never
secure the steering wheel by turning
the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-
tion. This may damage the steering
lock mechanism (for models
equipped with steering lock
mechanism).
– Move the shift selector to the N
(Neutral) position.
䊊
A
(CVT) Continuously Variable Transmission
䊊
B
(M/T) Manual transmission
WCE0195
In case of emergency 6-13
Information Provided by:
●When towing Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) or manual trans-
mission (M/T) models with the rear
wheels on the ground (if you do not use
towing dollies): Always release the
parking brake.
●Observe the following restricted towing
speeds and distances for manual trans-
missions (M/T) only:
– Speed: Below 50 MPH (80 km/h)
– Distance: Less than 50 miles (80 km)
VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck
vehicle)
Pulling a stuck vehicle
WARNING
To avoid vehicle damage, serious per-
sonal injury or death when recovering a
stuck vehicle:
●Contact a professional towing service
to recover the vehicle if you have any
questions regarding the recovery
procedure.
●Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to tow
or free a stuck vehicle.
●Only use devices specifically designed
for vehicle recovery and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions.
●Always pull the recovery device straight
out from the front of the vehicle. Never
pull at an angle.
●Route recovery devices so they do not
touch any part of the vehicle except the
attachment point.
Front
WCE0146
Rear
SCE0578
6-14 In case of emergency
Information Provided by:
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,
use a tow strap or other device designed specifi-
cally for vehicle recovery. Always follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for the recovery de-
vice.
Do not use the tie-down hooks for towing or
vehicle recovery.
Rocking a stuck vehicle
WARNING
●Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
●Do not spin your tires at high speed.
This could cause them to explode and
result in serious injury. Parts of your
vehicle could also overheat and be
damaged.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,
use the following procedure:
1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control System
(if so equipped).
2. Make sure the area in front and behind the
vehicle is clear of obstructions.
3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear
an area around the front tires.
4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-
ward.
●Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)
and D (Drive) (CVT models) or 1st (Low)
and R (Reverse) (M/T models).
●Apply the accelerator as little as possible
to maintain the rocking motion.
●Release the accelerator pedal before
shifting between R (Reverse) and D
(Drive) (CVT models) or 1st (Low) and R
(Reverse) (M/T models).
●Do not spin the tires above 35 mph (55
km/h).
5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few
tries, contact a professional towing service
to remove the vehicle.
In case of emergency 6-15
Information Provided by:
MEMO
6-16 In case of emergency
Information Provided by:
7 Appearance and care
Cleaning exterior ..................................7-2
Washing ......................................7-2
Waxing ........................................7-2
Removing spots ................................7-3
Underbody ....................................7-3
Glass .........................................7-3
Aluminum alloy wheels ..........................7-3
Chrome parts ..................................7-4
Tire dressings ..................................7-4
Cleaning interior...................................7-4
Air fresheners ..................................7-5
Floor mats .....................................7-5
Seat belts .....................................7-6
Corrosion protection ...............................7-6
Most common factors contributing to vehicle
corrosion ......................................7-6
Environmental factors influence the rate of
corrosion ......................................7-6
To protect your vehicle from corrosion ............7-6
Information Provided by:
In order to maintain the appearance of your ve-
hicle, it is important to take proper care of it.
To protect the paint surfaces, please wash your
vehicle as soon as you can:
●after a rainfall to prevent possible damage
from acid rain.
●after driving on coastal roads.
●when contaminants such as soot, bird drop-
pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get
on the paint surface.
●when dust or mud builds up on the surface.
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle
inside a garage or in a covered area.
When it is necessary to park outside, park in a
shady area or protect the vehicle with a body
cover.
Be careful not to scratch the paint surface
when putting on or removing the body
cover.
WASHING
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of
water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild
soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose
dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm
(never hot) water.
CAUTION
●Do not use car washes that use acid in
the detergent. Some car washes, espe-
cially brushless ones, use some acid for
cleaning. The acid may react with some
plastic vehicle components, causing
them to crack. This could affect their
appearance, and also could cause them
not to function properly. Always check
with your car wash to confirm that acid
is not used.
●Do not wash the vehicle with strong
household soap, strong chemical deter-
gents, gasoline or solvents.
●Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-
light or while the vehicle body is hot, as
the surface may become water-spotted.
●Avoid using tight-napped or rough
cloths, such as washing mitts. Care
must be taken when removing
caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-
stances so the paint surface is not
scratched or damaged.
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean
water.
Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,
hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to
the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas
must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the
drain holes in the lower edge of the door are
open. Spray water under the body and in the
wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away
road salt.
A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to
avoid water spots.
WAXING
Regular waxing protects the paint surface and
helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is
recommended to remove built-up wax residue
and to avoid a weathered appearance before
re-applying wax.
A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the
proper product.
●Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash-
ing. Follow the instructions supplied with the
wax.
●Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,
cutting compounds or cleaners that may
damage the vehicle finish.
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing
on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.
CLEANING EXTERIOR
7-2 Appearance and care
Information Provided by:
REMOVING SPOTS
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,
and tree sap as quickly as possible from the
surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or
staining. Special cleaning products are available
at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory
store.
UNDERBODY
In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is
necessary to clean the underbody regularly in
order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and
causing the acceleration of corrosion on the un-
derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe-
riod and again in the spring, the underseal must
be checked and, if necessary, retreated. GLASS
When cleaning the rear window, it may be easier
to clean if the inside high-mounted stop light (if
so equipped) is removed first.
Be careful when removing the high-mounted
stop light to reduce the risk of damaging the
high-mounted stop light wires.
To remove the high-mounted stop light:
䊊
1Push toward rear of vehicle.
䊊
2Lift to remove.
The high-mounted stop light must be properly
reinstalled before driving your vehicle.
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film
from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to
become coated with a film after the vehicle is
parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft
cloth will easily remove this film.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inside of the windows,
do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive
cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant
cleaners. They could damage the electri-
cal conductors, radio antenna elements or
rear window defroster elements.
ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS
Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp-
ened in a mild soap solution, especially during
winter months in areas where road salt is used. If
not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.
WAI0005
Appearance and care 7-3
Information Provided by:
CAUTION
Follow the directions below to avoid
staining or discoloring the wheels:
●Do not use a cleaner that uses strong
acid or alkali contents to clean the
wheels.
●Do not apply wheel cleaners to the
wheels when they are hot. The wheel
temperature should be the same as am-
bient temperature.
●Rinse the wheel to completely remove
the cleaner within 15 minutes after the
cleaner is applied.
CHROME PARTS
Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non-
abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.
TIRE DRESSINGS
NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire
dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to
the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub-
ber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may
react with the coating and form a compound. This
compound may come off the tire while driving and
stain the vehicle paint.
If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the
following precautions:
●Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-
ing on the tire dissolves more easily than
with an oil-based tire dressing.
●Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help
prevent it from entering the tire
tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to
remove).
●Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry
towel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-
pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves.
●Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-
mended by the tire dressing manufacturer.
This vehicle has new and unique surfaces on the
center console and door pull finishers. If cleaning
is required use mild soap and water. However if
mild soap and water won’t clean the center con-
sole and door pull finishers, use NISSAN Vinyl
and Leather Cleaner (or equivalent).
Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior
trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum
cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and
leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth damp-
ened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a
dry, soft cloth.
Regular care and cleaning is required in order to
maintain the appearance of the leather.
Before using any fabric protector, read the manu-
facturer’s recommendations. Some fabric pro-
tectors contain chemicals that may stain or
bleach the seat material.
Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean
the meter and gauge lens.
WARNING
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can
damage the seat or occupant classifica-
tion sensor. This can also affect the opera-
tion of the air bag system and result in
serious personal injury.
CLEANING INTERIOR
7-4 Appearance and care
Information Provided by:
CAUTION
●Never use benzene, thinner, or any simi-
lar material on the interior surfaces or
surface damage may occur. Such dam-
age is not covered under the NISSAN
warranty.
●Small dirt particles can be abrasive and
damaging to leather surfaces and
should be removed promptly. Do not
use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes,
oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents or ammonia-based cleaners as
they may damage the leather’s natural
finish.
●Never use fabric protectors unless rec-
ommended by the manufacturer.
●Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on
meter or gauge lens covers. It may dam-
age the lens cover.
AIR FRESHENERS
Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect
the vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener,
take the following precautions:
●Hanging-type air fresheners can cause per-
manent discoloration when they contact ve-
hicle interior surfaces. Place the air fresh-
ener in a location that allows it to hang free
and not contact an interior surface.
●Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on
the vents. These products can cause imme-
diate damage and discoloration when
spilled on interior surfaces.
Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s in-
structions before using the air fresheners.
FLOOR MATS
The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex-
tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it
easier to clean the interior. No matter what
mats are used, be sure they are fitted for
your vehicle and are properly positioned in
the footwell to prevent interference with
pedal operation. Mats should be maintained
with regular cleaning and replaced if they be-
come excessively worn.
Floor mat positioning aid
This vehicle includes a front floor mat bracket to
act as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor
mats have been specially designed for your ve-
hicle model. The driver’s and passenger’s side
floor mats have a grommet hole incorporated in
them. Position the mat by placing the floor mat
bracket hook through the floor mat grommet hole
while centering the mat in the footwell.
Periodically check to make certain the mats are
properly positioned.
LPD0484
Appearance and care 7-5
Information Provided by:
SEAT BELTS
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them
with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.
Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade
before using them. See “Seat belt maintenance”
in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemen-
tal restraint system” section of this manual.
WARNING
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the
retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or
chemical solvents to clean the seat belts,
since these materials may severely
weaken the seat belt webbing.
MOST COMMON FACTORS
CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE
CORROSION
●The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt
and debris in body panel sections, cavities,
and other areas.
●Damage to paint and other protective coat-
ings caused by gravel and stone chips or
minor traffic accidents.
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
INFLUENCE THE RATE OF
CORROSION
Moisture
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve-
hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.
Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside
the vehicle and should be removed for drying to
avoid floor panel corrosion.
Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high
relative humidity, especially those areas where
the temperatures stay above freezing and where
atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is
used.
Temperature
High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro-
sion to those parts which are not well ventilated.
Air pollution
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air
in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler-
ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel-
erates the disintegration of paint surfaces.
TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE
FROM CORROSION
●Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the
vehicle clean.
●Always check for minor damage to the paint
and repair it as soon as possible.
●Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors
open to avoid water accumulation.
●Check the underbody for accumulation of
sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water
as soon as possible.
CORROSION PROTECTION
7-6 Appearance and care
Information Provided by:
CAUTION
●NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-
bris from the passenger compartment
by washing it out with a hose. Remove
dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.
●Never allow water or other liquids to
come in contact with electronic compo-
nents inside the vehicle as this may
damage them.
Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are
extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion
and deterioration of underbody components
such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,
brake cables, floor pan and fenders.
In winter, the underbody must be cleaned
periodically.
For additional protection against rust and corro-
sion, which may be required in some areas, con-
sult a NISSAN dealer.
Appearance and care 7-7
Information Provided by:
MEMO
7-8 Appearance and care
Information Provided by:
8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Maintenance requirements..........................8-2
General maintenance ..............................8-2
Explanation of general maintenance items .........8-2
Maintenance precautions . . .........................8-5
Engine compartment check locations ................8-6
Engine cooling system .............................8-8
Checking engine coolant level ...................8-8
Changing engine coolant ........................8-9
Engine oil.........................................8-9
Checking engine oil level ........................8-9
Changing engine oil ...........................8-11
Changing engine oil filter .......................8-12
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid ......8-13
Brake and clutch fluid .............................8-13
Brake fluid ....................................8-13
Clutch fluid ...................................8-14
Windshield-washer fluid...........................8-14
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir ...............8-14
Battery ..........................................8-15
Jump starting .................................8-16
Drive belt ........................................8-16
Spark plugs......................................8-17
Replacing spark plugs .........................8-17
Air cleaner .......................................8-18
In-cabin microfilter.............................8-19
Windshield wiper blades ..........................8-20
Cleaning .....................................8-20
Replacing ....................................8-20
Brakes ..........................................8-21
Fuses ...........................................8-22
Engine compartment...........................8-22
Passenger compartment .......................8-24
Battery replacement ..............................8-25
Keyfob (if so equipped) ........................8-25
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ (if so equipped) ........8-27
Lights ...........................................8-28
Headlights....................................8-28
Exterior and interior lights.......................8-29
Wheels and tires .................................8-31
Tire pressure..................................8-31
Tire labeling...................................8-35
Types of tires..................................8-37
Tire chains....................................8-38
Changing wheels and tires .....................8-38
Information Provided by:
Your NISSAN has been designed to have mini-
mum maintenance requirements with long ser-
vice intervals to save you both time and money.
However, some day-to-day and regular mainte-
nance is essential to maintain your NISSAN’s
good mechanical condition, as well as its emis-
sions and engine performance.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that
the scheduled maintenance, as well as general
maintenance, is performed.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who
can ensure that your vehicle receives proper
maintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte-
nance chain.
Scheduled maintenance
For your convenience, both required and optional
scheduled maintenance items are described and
listed in your “NISSAN Service and Maintenance
Guide”. You must refer to that guide to ensure
that necessary maintenance is performed on your
NISSAN at regular intervals.
General maintenance
General maintenance includes those items which
should be checked during normal day-to-day op-
eration. They are essential for proper vehicle op-
eration. It is your responsibility to perform these
maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed.
Performing general maintenance checks requires
minimal mechanical skill and only a few general
automotive tools.
These checks or inspections can be done by you,
a qualified technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSAN
dealer.
Where to go for service
If maintenance service is required or your vehicle
appears to malfunction, have the systems
checked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer.
NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists
who are kept up-to-date with the latest service
information through technical bulletins, service
tips, and in-dealership training programs. They
are completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve-
hicles before they work on your vehicle, rather
than after they have worked on it.
You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s
service department performs the best job to meet
the maintenance requirements on your vehicle —
in a reliable and economical way.
During the normal day-to-day operation of the
vehicle, general maintenance should be per-
formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If
you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or
smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a
NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you
should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that
repairs are required.
When performing any checks or maintenance
work, closely observe the “Maintenance precau-
tions” later in this section.
EXPLANATION OF GENERAL
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Additional information on the following
items with“*”isfound later in this section.
Outside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
performed from time to time, unless otherwise
specified.
Doors and engine hood Check that the doors
and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure
that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,
latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary.
Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the
hood from opening when the primary latch is
released.
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE
8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Information Provided by:
When driving in areas using road salt or other
corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.
Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis.
Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail
lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all
operating properly and installed securely. Also
check headlight aim.
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)* When checking
the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing,
and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if
necessary.
Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every
7,500 miles (12,000 km).
Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge often
and always prior to long distance trips. If neces-
sary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the
spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully
for damage, cuts or excessive wear.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
transmitter components Replace the TPMS
transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap
when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.
Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle
should pull to either side while driving on a
straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or
abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel
alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at
normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be
needed.
●For additional information regarding tires,
refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in
the Warranty Information Booklet.
Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular
basis. Check the windshield at least every six
months for cracks or other damage. Have a dam-
aged windshield repaired by a qualified repair
facility.
Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks or
wear if they do not wipe properly.
Inside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
checked on a regular basis, such as when per-
forming periodic maintenance, cleaning the ve-
hicle, etc.
Additional information on the following
items with an “*” is found later in this sec-
tion.
Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth
operation and make sure the pedal does not bind
or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away
from the pedal.
Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth opera-
tion. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down fur-
ther than normal, the pedal feels spongy or the
vehicle seems to take longer to stop, see a
NISSAN dealer immediately. Keep the floor mat
away from the pedal.
Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the
vehicle to one side when applied.
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
P (Park) position mechanism On a fairly
steep hill, check that the vehicle is held securely
with the shift selector in the P (Park) position
without applying any brakes.
Parking brake Check the parking brake opera-
tion regularly. The vehicle should be securely held
on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake
applied. If the parking brake needs adjustment,
see a NISSAN dealer.
Seats Check seat position controls such as seat
adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to ensure they
operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in
every position. Check that the head restraints and
headrests move up and down smoothly and the
locks (if so equipped) hold securely in all latched
positions.
Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt
system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters
and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3
Information Provided by:
and are installed securely. Check the belt web-
bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.
Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer-
ing system, such as excessive freeplay, hard
steering or strange noises.
Warning lights and chimes Make sure all
warning lights and chimes are operating properly.
Windshield wiper and washer* Check that
the wipers and washer operate properly and that
the wipers do not streak.
Windshield defroster Check that the air
comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in
sufficient quantity when operating the heater or
air conditioner.
Under the hood and vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
checked periodically (for example, each time you
check the engine oil or refuel).
Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. It
should be between the MAX and MIN lines. Ve-
hicles operated in high temperatures or under
severe conditions require frequent checks of the
battery fluid level.
Brake and clutch fluid levels* Make sure that
the brake and clutch fluid level is between the
MIN and MAX lines on the reservoir.
Engine coolant level* Check the coolant level
when the engine is cold.
Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive belts
are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
Engine oil level* Check the level after parking
the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off.
Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain
back into the oil pan.
Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose
supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the
exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of
exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust
system inspected by a NISSAN dealer. See the
carbon monoxide warning in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.
Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil,
water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has
been parked for a while. Water dripping from the
air conditioner after use is normal. If you should
notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,
check for the cause and have it corrected imme-
diately.
Radiator and hoses Check the front of the
radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,
etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the
hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose
connections.
Underbody The underbody is frequently ex-
posed to corrosive substances such as those
used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very
important to remove these substances from the
underbody, otherwise rust may form on the floor
pan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At the
end of winter, the underbody should be thor-
oughly flushed with plain water, in those areas
where mud and dirt may have accumulated. See
the “Appearance and care” section of this
manual.
Windshield-washer fluid* Check that there is
adequate fluid in the reservoir.
8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Information Provided by:
When performing any inspection or maintenance
work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent
serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to
the vehicle. The following are general precau-
tions which should be closely observed.
WARNING
●Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-
ply the parking brake securely and
block the wheels to prevent the vehicle
from moving. For manual transmission
models, move the shift selector to N
(Neutral). For CVT models, move the
shift selector to P (Park).
●Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF
or LOCK position when performing any
parts replacement or repairs.
●If you must work with the engine run-
ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair
and tools away from moving fans, belts
and any other moving parts.
●It is advisable to secure or remove any
loose clothing and remove any jewelry,
such as rings, watches, etc. before
working on your vehicle.
●Always wear eye protection whenever
you work on your vehicle.
●If you must run the engine in an en-
closed space such as a garage, be sure
there is proper ventilation for exhaust
gases to escape.
●Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by a jack. If it is neces-
sary to work under the vehicle, support
it with safety stands.
●Keep smoking materials, flame and
sparks away from the fuel tank and
battery.
●On gasoline engine models, the fuel
filter or fuel lines should be serviced by
a NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines
are under high pressure even when the
engine is off.
CAUTION
●Do not work under the hood while the
engine is hot. Turn the engine off and
wait until it cools down.
●Avoid contact with used engine oil and
coolant. Improperly disposed engine
oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle
fluids can damage the environment. Al-
ways conform to local regulations for
disposal of vehicle fluid.
●Never leave the engine or the CVT re-
lated component harness connector
disconnected while the ignition switch
is in the ON position.
●Never connect or disconnect the battery
or any transistorized component while
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
●Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-
matic engine cooling fan. It may come
on at any time without warning, even if
the ignition key is in the OFF position
and the engine is not running. To avoid
injury, always disconnect the negative
battery cable before working near the
fan.
This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section
gives instructions regarding only those items
which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.
A genuine NISSAN service manual is also avail-
able. See “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual or-
der information” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
You should be aware that incomplete or improper
servicing may result in operating difficulties or
excessive emissions, and could affect warranty
coverage. If in doubt about any servicing,
have it done by a NISSAN dealer.
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5
Information Provided by:
MR20DE engine
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid
reservoir (M/T model)
4. Battery
5. Air cleaner
6. Fuse/Fusible link box
7. Radiator cap
8. Engine oil dipstick
9. Drive belt location
10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
LDI0709
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Information Provided by:
QR25DE engine
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid
reservoir (M/T model)
4. Battery
5. Air cleaner
6. Fuse/Fusible link box
7. Radiator cap
8. Engine oil dipstick
9. Drive belt location
10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
* Engine cover removed for clarity.
WDI0637
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7
Information Provided by:
The engine cooling system is filled at the factory
with Genuine NISSAN Engine Coolant to provide
year-round anti-freeze and coolant protection.
The anti-freeze solution contains rust and corro-
sion inhibitors. Additional engine cooling system
additives are not necessary.
WARNING
●Never remove the radiator or coolant
reservoir cap when the engine is hot.
Wait until the engine and radiator cool
down. Serious burns could be caused
by high pressure fluid escaping from
the radiator. See precautions in “If your
vehicle overheats” found in the “In case
of emergency” section of this manual.
●The radiator is equipped with a pres-
sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-
gine damage, use only a genuine
NISSAN radiator cap.
CAUTION
When adding or replacing coolant, be sure
to use only a Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent with the
proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze
and 50% demineralized or distilled water.
The use of other types of coolant solu-
tions other than Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent,
may damage the engine cooling system.
Outside temperature
down to
Genuine
NISSAN
Long Life
Antifreeze/
Coolant or
equivalent
Demineral-
ized or dis-
tilled water
°C °F
-35 -30 50% 50% CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT
LEVEL
Check the coolant level in the reservoir when
the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below
the MIN level 䊊
B, add coolant to the MAX level
䊊
A. If the reservoir is empty, check the coolant
level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If
there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the
radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and
also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level 䊊
A.
If the cooling system frequently requires
coolant, have it checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
MR20DE
LDI0537
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Information Provided by:
CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.
The service procedure can be found in the
NISSAN Service Manual.
Improper servicing can result in reduced
heater performance and engine overheat-
ing.
WARNING
●To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never change the coolant when the en-
gine is hot.
●Never remove the radiator cap when the
engine is hot. Serious burns could be
caused by high pressure fluid escaping
from the radiator.
●Avoid direct skin contact with used
coolant. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner
as soon as possible.
●Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-
dren and pets.
Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.
Check your local regulations.
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches
operating temperature.
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10
minutes for the oil to drain back into
the oil pan.
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re-
insert it all the way.
QR25DE
LDI0589
MR20DE
WDI0591
ENGINE OIL
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9
Information Provided by:
5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil
level. It should be between the H (High) and
L (Low) marks 䊊
B. This is the normal oper-
ating oil level range. If the oil level is below
the L (Low) mark 䊊
A, remove the oil filler cap
and pour recommended oil through the
opening. Do not overfill 䊊
C.
6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.
It is normal to add some oil between oil
maintenance intervals or during the
break-in period, depending on the severity
of operating conditions.
CAUTION
Oil level should be checked regularly. Op-
erating the engine with an insufficient
amount of oil can damage the engine, and
such damage is not covered by warranty.
Make sure to follow the engine oil changing inter-
vals in the maintenance booklet. Operating under
the following conditions may require more fre-
quent oil change:
●repeated short distance driving
●driving in dusty conditions
●stop and go commuting.
QR25DE
LDI0590 LDI0371
MR20DE engine
䊊
AOil filler cap
䊊
BOil drain plug
䊊
COil filter
WDI0521
8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Information Provided by:
CHANGING ENGINE OIL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches
operating temperature, then turn it off.
3. Remove the oil filler cap 䊊
Aby turning it
counterclockwise.
4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug
䊊
B.
5. Remove the drain plug 䊊
Bwith a wrench by
turning it counterclockwise and completely
drain the oil.
If the oil filter is to be changed, remove and
replace it at this time. See “Changing engine
oil filter” later in this section.
●Waste oil must be disposed of prop-
erly.
●Check your local regulations.
WARNING
●Prolonged and repeated contact with
used engine oil may cause skin cancer.
●Try to avoid direct skin contact with
used oil. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner
as soon as possible.
●Keep used engine oil out of reach of
children.
CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine
oil may be hot.
6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new
washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with
a wrench. Do not use excessive force.
Drain plug tightening torque:
22 - 29 ft-lb (29 - 39 N·m)
7. Refill engine with recommended oil through
the oil filler opening, then install the oil filler
cap securely.
See “Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and con-
sumer information” section of this manual for
drain and refill capacity.
The drain and refill capacity depends on the
oil temperature and drain time. Use these
specifications for reference only. Always use
the dipstick to determine when the proper
amount of oil is in the engine.
8. Start the engine. Check for leakage around
the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as re-
quired.
9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10
minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick.
Add engine oil if necessary.
QR25DE engine
䊊
AOil filler cap
䊊
BOil drain plug
䊊
COil filter
WDI0597
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11
Information Provided by:
CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
2. Turn the engine off.
3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter 䊊
C.
4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench
by turning it counterclockwise. Then remove
the oil filter by turning it by hand.
CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine
oil may be hot.
5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with
a clean rag.
CAUTION
Be sure to remove any old gasket material
remaining on the sealing surface of the
engine. Failure to do so could lead to
engine damage.
6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean
engine oil.
7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance
is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.
8. Start the engine and check for leakage
around the oil filter. Correct as required.
9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10
minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if
necessary.
MR20DE engine
䊊
AOil filler cap
䊊
BOil drain plug
䊊
COil filter
WDI0521
QR25DE engine
䊊
AOil filler cap
䊊
BOil drain plug
䊊
COil filter
WDI0597
8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Information Provided by:
CAUTION
●Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid
NS-2. Do not mix with other fluids.
●Using transmission fluid other than
Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 will
damage the CVT, which is not covered
by the NISSAN new vehicle limited
warranty.
When checking or replacement of CVT fluid is
required, we recommend your NISSAN dealer for
servicing.
For further brake and clutch fluid specification
information, refer to “Capacities and recom-
mended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and
consumer information” section of this manual.
WARNING
●Use only new fluid from a sealed con-
tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated
fluid may damage the brake and clutch
systems. The use of improper fluids can
damage the brake system and affect
the vehicle’s stopping ability.
●Clean the filler cap before removing.
●Brake and clutch fluid is poisonous and
should be stored carefully in marked
containers out of reach of children.
CAUTION
Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-
faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is
spilled, immediately wash the surface
with water.
BRAKE FLUID
Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If the
brake warning light comes on, add Genuine
NISSAN Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up
to the MAX line 䊊
A. If fluid must be added fre-
quently, the system should be checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
LDI0539
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID
BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13
Information Provided by:
CLUTCH FLUID
Check the clutch fluid level in the reservoir
(manual transmissions only). Add Genuine
NISSAN Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up
to the MAX line 䊊
A. If fluid must be added fre-
quently, the system should be checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
RESERVOIR
Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodi-
cally. Add windshield-washer fluid when the low
windshield-washer fluid warning light comes on
(if so equipped).
To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir, lift
the cap off the reservoir tank and pour the
windshield-washer fluid into the tank opening.
Add a washer solvent to the washer for better
cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield-
washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s in-
structions for the mixture ratio.
Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving
conditions require an increased amount of
windshield-washer fluid.
Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind-
shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-
freeze or equivalent.
CAUTION
●Do not substitute engine anti-freeze
coolant for windshield-washer solution.
This may result in damage to the paint.
●Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir tank with washer fluid con-
centrates at full strength. Some methyl
alcohol based washer fluid concen-
trates may permanently stain the grille
if spilled while filling the windshield-
washer fluid reservoir tank.
●Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with
water to the manufacturer’s recom-
mended levels before pouring the fluid
into the windshield-washer fluid reser-
voir tank. Do not use the windshield-
washer reservoir tank to mix the washer
fluid concentrate and water.
LDI0539 LDI0540
WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Information Provided by:
●Keep the battery surface clean and dry.
Clean the battery with a solution of baking
soda and water.
●Make certain the terminal connections are
clean and securely tightened.
●If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or
longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery
terminal cable to prevent discharge.
WARNING
●Do not expose the battery to flames, an
electrical spark or a cigarette. Hydro-
gen gas generated by the battery is ex-
plosive. Explosive gases can cause
blindness or injury. Do not allow battery
fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics
or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can
cause blindness or injury. After touch-
ing a battery or battery cap, do not
touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly
wash your hands. If the acid contacts
your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately
flush with water for at least 15 minutes
and seek medical attention.
●Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in
the battery is low. Low battery fluid can
cause a higher load on the battery
which can generate heat, reduce bat-
tery life, and in some cases lead to an
explosion.
●When working on or near a battery, al-
ways wear suitable eye protection and
remove all jewelry.
●Battery posts, terminals and related ac-
cessories contain lead and lead com-
pounds. Wash hands after handling.
●Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
●Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent
caps tight and the battery level.
1. Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver as
shown. Use a cloth to protect the battery
case.
WDI0224
BATTERY
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15
Information Provided by:
2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is
necessary to add fluid, add only distilled
water to bring the level up to the bottom of
the filler opening. Do not overfill. . Reinstall
the vent caps.
Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under
severe conditions require frequent checks of the
battery fluid level.
JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting”
in the “In case of emergency” section of this
manual. If the engine does not start by jump
starting, the battery may have to be replaced.
Contact a NISSAN dealer.
1. Automatic tensioner
2. Generator
3. Water pump
4. Air conditioner compressor (with A/C)
or Idler pulley (without A/C)
5. Crankshaft pulley
WDI0529
MR20DE model
WDI0638
DRIVE BELT
8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Information Provided by:
1. Crankshaft pulley
2. Idler Pulley
3. Automatic tensioner
4. Water pump
5. Generator
6. Air conditioner compressor
WARNING
Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or
LOCK position before servicing drive belt.
The engine could rotate unexpectedly.
1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual
wear, cuts, or fraying. If the belt is in poor
condition, have it replaced or adjusted by a
NISSAN dealer.
2. Have the belt checked regularly for condi-
tion.
REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
Platinum-tipped spark plugs (if so
equipped)
It is not necessary to replace platinum-tipped 䊊
A
spark plugs as frequently as conventional type
spark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-
low the maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN
Service and Maintenance Guide”. Do not service
platinum-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or re-
gapping.
●Always replace spark plugs with rec-
ommended or equivalent ones.
QR25DE model
WDI0696 SDI1895
SPARK PLUGS
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17
Information Provided by:
WARNING
Be sure the engine and ignition switch are
off and that the parking brake is engaged
securely.
CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to re-
move the spark plugs. An incorrect socket
can damage the spark plugs.
If replacement is required, see your NISSAN
dealer for assistance.
Iridium-tipped spark plugs (if so
equipped)
It is not necessary to replace iridium-tipped 䊊
A
spark plugs as frequently as conventional type
spark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-
low the maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN
Service and Maintenance Guide”. Do not service
iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regap-
ping.
●Always replace spark plugs with rec-
ommended or equivalent ones.
WARNING
Be sure the engine and ignition switch are
off and that the parking brake is engaged
securely.
CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to re-
move the spark plugs. An incorrect socket
can damage the spark plugs.
If replacement is required, see your NISSAN
dealer for assistance.
The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and
reused. Replace it according to the maintenance
log shown in the “NISSAN Service and Mainte-
nance Guide.”
To remove the air cleaner filter:
3. Unlatch the clips and move the air cleaner
cover upward.
4. Remove the air cleaner filter.
●For the MR20DE, release the 2 retaining
clips 䊊
Aand pull the unit upward.
●For the QR25DE, push the tabs 䊊
Aand
pull the unit upward 䊊
B.
MR20DE
LDI0710
AIR CLEANER
8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Information Provided by:
5. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner filter hous-
ing and the cover with a damp cloth.
NOTE:
After installing a new air cleaner, make
sure the air cleaner cover is seated in the
housing and latch the clips.
WARNING
●Operating the engine with the air
cleaner removed can cause you or oth-
ers to be burned. The air cleaner not
only cleans the air, it stops the flame if
the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and
the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner
removed, and be careful when working
on the engine with the air cleaner
removed.
●Never pour fuel into the throttle body or
attempt to start the engine with the air
cleaner removed. Doing so could result
in serious injury.
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air-
borne dust and pollen particles and reduces
some objectionable outside odors. The filter is
located behind the trim panel near the accelera-
tor pedal. Refer to the “NISSAN Service and
Maintenance Guide” for change intervals.
If replacement is required, see your NISSAN
dealer.
QR25DE
WDI0596
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19
Information Provided by:
CLEANING
If your windshield is not clear after using the
windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters
when running, wax or other material may be on
the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer
solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is
clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear
water.
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked
in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then
rinse the blades with clear water. If your wind-
shield is still not clear after cleaning the blades
and using the wiper, install new windshield wiper
blades.
CAUTION
Worn windshield wiper blades can dam-
age the windshield and impair driver
vision.
REPLACING
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
䊊
2Push the release tab, then move the wiper
blade down the wiper arm to remove.
䊊
3Remove the wiper blade.
4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper
arm until it clicks into place.
5. Rotate wiper blade so the dimple is in the
groove.
CAUTION
●After wiper blade replacement, return
the wiper arm to its original position;
otherwise it may be damaged when the
hood is opened.
●Make sure the wiper blades contact the
glass; otherwise the arms may be dam-
aged from wind pressure.
WDI0408
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Information Provided by:
If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not
to let wax get into the washer nozzle 䊊
A. This may
cause clogging or improper windshield-washer
operation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove it
with a needle or small pin 䊊
B.
If the brakes do not operate properly, have the
brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.
Self-adjusting brakes
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting
brakes.
The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjust
every time the brake pedal is applied.
WARNING
See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system
check if the brake pedal height does not
return to normal.
Brake pad wear indicators
The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible
wear indicators. When a brake pad requires re-
placement, a high pitched scraping or screech-
ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is in
motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the
brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes
checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator
sound is heard.
Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-
sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may
be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to
moderate stops is normal and does not affect the
function or performance of the brake system.
Proper brake inspection intervals should
be followed. For more information regarding
brake inspections, see the appropriate mainte-
nance schedule information in the “NISSAN Ser-
vice and Maintenance Guide”.
WDI0337
BRAKES
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21
Information Provided by:
Two types of fuses are used. Type 䊊
Ais used in
the fuse boxes in the engine compartment. Type
䊊
Bis used in the passenger compartment fuse
box.
Type A fuses are provided as spare fuses. They
are stored in the passenger compartment fuse
box.
Type A fuses can be installed in the engine com-
partment and passenger compartment fuse
boxes.
If a type A fuse is used to replace a type B fuse,
the type A fuse will not be level with the fuse
pocket as shown in the illustration. This will not
affect the performance of the fuse. Make sure the
fuse is installed in the fuse box securely.
Type B fuses cannot be installed in the under-
hood fuse boxes. Only use type A fuses in the
underhood fuse boxes.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
CAUTION
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than specified on the
fuse box cover. This could damage the
electrical system or cause a fire.
LDI0455 LDI0457
(MR20DE engine)
LDI0542
FUSES
8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
For checking and replacing fuses on
QR25DE engine models, see a NISSAN
dealer.
If any electrical equipment does not come on,
check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight
switch are OFF.
2. Open the engine hood.
3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the
tabs 䊊
Aand lifting the cover up from the
front 䊊
B.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The
fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse
block in the passenger compartment.
5. If the fuse is open 䊊
A, replace it with a new
fuse 䊊
B.
6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
system checked and repaired by a NISSAN
dealer.
Fusible links
If any electrical equipment does not operate and
the fuses are in good condition, check the fusible
links in the holders 䊊
A,䊊
Band 䊊
C. If any of these
fusible links are melted, replace only with genuine
NISSAN parts.
For checking and replacing the fusible links in
holders 䊊
Aand 䊊
Band 䊊
C, see a NISSAN dealer.
WDI0452
MR20DE
LDI0546
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23
Information Provided by:
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
CAUTION
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than specified on the
fuse box cover. This could damage the
electrical system or cause a fire.
If any electrical equipment does not operate,
check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight
switch are OFF.
2. Open the storage bin 䊊
A.
3. Pull the storage bin upward and out to re-
move 䊊
B. A fuse guide is on the storage bin.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller 䊊
C. The
fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse
block.
5. If the fuse is open, replace it with an equiva-
lent good fuse.
6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
system checked and repaired by a NISSAN
dealer.
7. Install the storage bin.
QR25DE
LDI0593 WDI0569
8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Information Provided by:
CAUTION
Be careful not to allow children to swallow
the battery or removed parts.
KEYFOB (if so equipped)
Replace the battery in the keyfob as follows:
䊊
1Open the lid using a coin 䊊
A.
䊊
2Remove the battery 䊊
B.
䊊
3Install a new battery 䊊
Cwith the “+” facing
down.
●Hold the battery by the edges. Holding the
battery across the contact points will seri-
ously deplete the storage capacity.
LDI0484
BATTERY REPLACEMENT
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25
Information Provided by:
●Do not touch the internal circuit and electric
terminals as it could cause a malfunction.
●When changing the battery, do not let dust
or oil get on the keyfob.
●There is danger of explosion if a lithium bat-
tery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only
with the same or equivalent type.
Recommended battery: CR2025 or equivalent.
䊊
4Close the lid securely.
5. Press the button, then the
button two or three times to check the key-
fob operation.
If the battery is removed for any reason
other than replacement, perform step 5.
●An improperly disposed battery can
hurt the environment. Always confirm
local regulations for battery disposal.
●The keyfob is water-resistant; how-
ever, if it does get wet, immediately
wipe completely dry.
●The operational range of the keyfob
extends to approximately 33 ft (10 m)
from the vehicle. This range may vary
with conditions.
FCC Notice:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to op-
erate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry
Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undes-
ired operation of the device.
SDI1867
8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Information Provided by:
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™ (if so
equipped)
Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as fol-
lows:
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli-
gent Key.
2. Insert a small screwdriver 䊊
Ainto the slit 䊊
B
of the corner and twist it to separate the
upper part from the lower part. Use a cloth to
protect the casing.
3. Replace the battery with a new one.
Recommended battery: CR2025 or equiva-
lent.
●Do not touch the internal circuit and elec-
tric terminals as doing so could cause a
malfunction.
●Hold the battery by the edges. Holding
the battery across the contact points will
seriously deplete the storage capacity.
●Make sure that the + side faces the bot-
tom of the case.
4. Close the lid securely as illustrated 䊊
C䊊
D.
5. Operate the buttons to check the operation.
See a NISSAN dealer if you need assistance for
replacement.
FCC Notice:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to op-
erate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry
Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undes-
ired operation of the device.
WDI0535
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27
Information Provided by:
HEADLIGHTS
Replacing the halogen headlight bulb
The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which
uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. Be-
cause the headlight assembly must be removed
from the vehicle for bulb replacement, see your
NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION
●Aiming is not necessary after replacing
the bulb. When aiming adjustment is
necessary, contact a NISSAN dealer.
●
Do not leave the headlight assembly
open without a bulb installed for a long
period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke,
etc. entering the headlight body may af-
fect bulb performance. Remove the bulb
from the headlight assembly just before
a replacement bulb is installed.
●Only touch the base when handling the
bulb. Never touch the glass envelope.
Touching the glass could significantly
affect bulb life and/or headlight
performance.
●High pressure halogen gas is sealed
inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may
break if the glass envelope is scratched
or the bulb is dropped.
●Use the same number and wattage as
shown in the chart.
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the
exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A
temperature difference between the inside and
the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not
a malfunction. If large drops of water collect
inside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer.
LIGHTS
8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Information Provided by:
EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.*
Headlight assembly
Low/High (Halogen) 55/60 H13
Turn/Park 27/7 3457AK
Side marker 4 194
Front fog light* (if so equipped) 55 H11LL
Front map lights* (if so equipped) 8 168
Interior light 8 AL57
Trunk light 5 158
High-mounted stop light*
Inside (if so equipped) 16 921LF
Spoiler (if so equipped) — LED
Rear combination light
Turn signal light 27/7 3057K
Stop/Tail 27/7 3057K
Backup (reversing) 16 921
Rear side marker 4 194
License plate light* 5 W5W
* Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29
Information Provided by:
1. Front map lights (if so equipped)
2. Interior light
3. Headlight assembly
4. Front fog light (if so equipped)
5. High-mounted stop light (if so
equipped)
6. Spoiler mounted stop light (if so
equipped)
7. License plate light
8. Rear combination light
Indicates bulb removal
Indicates bulb replacement
Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When
replacing a bulb, first remove the lens and/or cover.
WDI0599
WDI0257
8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Information Provided by:
Use a cloth 䊊
1to protect the interior light hous-
ing.
Use a cloth 䊊
Ato protect the light housing.
If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” in the
“In case of emergency” section of this
manual.
TIRE PRESSURE
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) (if so equipped)
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It
monitors tire pressure of all tires except
the spare. When the low tire pressure
warning light is lit, one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated.
The TPMS will activate only when the
vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH
(25 km/h). Also, this system may not de-
tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for
example a flat tire while driving).
For more details, refer to “Low tire pres-
sure warning light”in the “Instruments and
controls” section, “Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and
driving” section, and “Flat tire” in the “In
case of emergency” section.
Interior light
WDI0206
Map light (if so equipped)
LDI0711
WHEELS AND TIRES
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31
Information Provided by:
Tire inflation pressure
Check the tire pressures (including the
spare) often and always prior to long dis-
tance trips. The recommended tire pres-
sure specifications are shown on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label
or the Tire and Loading Information label
under the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading.
The Tire and Loading Information label is
affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire
pressures should be checked regularly
because:
●Most tires naturally lose air over time.
●Tires can lose air suddenly when
driven over potholes or other objects
or if the vehicle strikes a curb while
parking.
The tire pressures should be checked
when the tires are cold. The tires are
considered COLD after the vehicle has
been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate
speeds.
Incorrect tire pressure, including un-
der inflation, may adversely affect
tire life and vehicle handling.
WARNING
●Improperly inflated tires can fail
suddenly and cause an accident.
●The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) is located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-
tion label. The vehicle weight ca-
pacity is indicated on the Tire and
Loading Information label (if so
equipped). Do not load your ve-
hicle beyond this capacity. Over-
loading your vehicle may result in
reduced tire life, unsafe operat-
ing conditions due to premature
tire failure, or unfavorable han-
dling characteristics and could
also lead to a serious accident.
Loading beyond the specified ca-
pacity may also result in failure of
other vehicle components.
●Before taking a long trip, or
whenever you heavily load your
vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge
to ensure that the tire pressures
are at the specified level.
●For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire Safety Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet.
8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Information Provided by:
Tire and loading information label
䊊
1Seating capacity: The maximum num-
ber of occupants that can be seated
in the vehicle.
䊊
2Vehicle load limit: See “Vehicle load-
ing information” in the “Technical and
consumer information” section.
䊊
3Original tire size: The size of the tires
originally installed on the vehicle at
the factory.
䊊
4Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to
this pressure when the tires are cold.
Tires are considered COLD after the
vehicle has been parked for 3 or more
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
km) at moderate speeds. The recom-
mended cold tire inflation is set by the
manufacturer to provide the best bal-
ance of tire wear, vehicle handling,
driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the
vehicle’s GVWR.
䊊
5Tire size – refer to “Tire labeling” later
in this section.
䊊
6Spare tire size.
LDI0545
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33
Information Provided by:
Checking tire pressure
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the
tire.
2. Press the pressure gauge squarely
onto the valve stem. Do not press too
hard or force the valve stem side-
ways, or air will escape. If the hissing
sound of air escaping from the tire is
heard while checking the pressure,
reposition the gauge to eliminate this
leakage.
3. Remove the gauge.
4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge
stem and compare to the specifica-
tion shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too
much air is added, press the core of
the valve stem briefly with the tip of
the gauge stem to release pressure.
Recheck the pressure and add or
release air as needed.
6. Install the valve stem cap.
7. Check the pressure of all other tires,
including the spare.
Size Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Front Original Tire:
P205/60R15
P205/55R16
230 kPa, 33 PSI
P225/45R17 240 kPa, 35 PSI
Rear Original Tire:
P205/60R15
P205/55R16
230 kPa, 33 PSI
P225/45R17 240 kPa, 35 PSI
Spare Tire:
T125/70D16 420 kPa, 60 PSI
LDI0393
8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Information Provided by:
TIRE LABELING
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information iden-
tifies and describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also pro-
vides the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The TIN
can be used to identify the tire in case of a
recall.
䊊
1Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)
1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de-
signed for passenger vehicles (not all
tires have this information).
2. Three-digit number (215): This num-
ber gives the width in millimeters of
the tire from sidewall edge to side-
wall edge.
3. Two-digit number (65): This number,
known as the aspect ratio, gives the
tire’s ratio of height to width.
4. R: The “R” stands for radial.
5. Two-digit number (15): This number
is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.
6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This
number is the tire’s load index. It is a
measurement of how much weight
each tire can support. You may not
find this information on all tires be-
cause it is not required by law.
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not
drive the vehicle faster than the tire
speed rating.
Example
WDI0394
Example
WDI0395
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35
Information Provided by:
䊊
2TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a
new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX
XXXX)
1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart-
ment Of Transportation”. The symbol
can be placed above, below or to the
left or right of the Tire Identification
Number.
2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
3. Two-digit code: Tire size.
4. Three-digit code: Tire type code
(Optional).
5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufac-
ture.
6. Four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was built. For ex-
ample, the numbers 3103 means the
31st week of 2003. If these numbers
are missing, then look on the other
sidewall of the tire.
䊊
3Tire ply composition and material
The number of layers or plies of rubber-
coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufactur-
ers also must indicate the materials in the
tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester,
and others.
䊊
4Maximum permissible inflation pres-
sure
This number is the greatest amount of air
pressure that should be put in the tire. Do
not exceed the maximum permissible in-
flation pressure.
䊊
5Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum load
in kilograms and pounds that can be car-
ried by the tire. When replacing the tires
on the vehicle, always use a tire that has
the same load rating as the factory in-
stalled tire.
䊊
6Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”
Indicates whether the tire requires an in-
ner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).
Example
WDI0396
8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Information Provided by:
䊊
7The word “radial”
The word “radial” is shown if the tire has
radial structure.
䊊
8Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or brand name is shown.
Other Tire-related Terminology
In addition to the many terms that are
defined throughout this section, Intended
Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that
contains a whitewall, bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on the
other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the out-
ward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical
tire that has a particular side that must
always face outward when mounted on a
vehicle.
TYPES OF TIRES
WARNING
●When changing or replacing tires, be
sure all four tires are of the same type
(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and
construction. A NISSAN dealer may be
able to help you with information about
tire type, size, speed rating and
availability.
●Replacement tires may have a lower
speed rating than the factory equipped
tires, and may not match the potential
maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed
the maximum speed rating of the tire.
●For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-
formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-
tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet.
All season tires
NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod-
els to provide good performance all year, includ-
ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Season
tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S
on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow
traction than All Season tires and may be more
appropriate in some areas.
Summer tires
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models
to provide superior performance on dry roads.
Summer tire performance is substantially re-
duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have
the tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy
conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of
SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four
wheels.
Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select
tires equivalent in size and load rating to the
original equipment tires. If you do not, it can
adversely affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle.
Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings
than factory equipped tires and may not match
the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never ex-
ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.
If you install snow tires, they must be the same
size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all
four wheels.
For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires
may be used. However, some U.S. states and
Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check
local, state and provincial laws before installing
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37
Information Provided by:
studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of
studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.
TIRE CHAINS
CAUTION
Tire chains/cables should not be installed
on P225/45R17 size tires. Installation of
the tire chains/cables on P225/45R17 size
tires will cause damage to the vehicle. If
you plan to use tire chains/cables, you
should install P205/55R16 size tires on
your vehicle.
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to
location. Check the local laws before installing
tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure
they are the proper size for the tires on your
vehicle and are installed according to the chain
manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE
class “S” chains. Class “S” chains are used on
vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.
Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are de-
signed to meet the minimum clearances between
the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or
body component required to accommodate the
use of a winter traction device (tire chains or
cables). The minimum clearances are determined
using the factory equipped tires. Other types may
damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when
recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to
ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain
must be secured or removed to prevent the pos-
sibility of whipping action damage to the fenders
or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your
vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive
at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may
be damaged and/or vehicle handling and perfor-
mance may be adversely affected.
Tire chains must be installed only on the
front wheels and not on the rear wheels.
Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire.
Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with
chains in such conditions can cause damage to
the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to
some overstress.
CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES
Tire rotation
NISSAN recommends rotating the tires
every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).
See “Flat tire” in the “In case of emer-
gency” section of this manual for tire re-
placing procedures.
As soon as possible, tighten the
wheel nuts to the specified torque
with a torque wrench.
WDI0258
8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Information Provided by:
Wheel nut tightening torque:
83 ft-lb (113 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tight-
ened to specifications at all times. It
is recommended that wheel nuts be
tightened to specification at each
tire rotation interval.
WARNING
●After rotating the tires, check and
adjust the tire pressure.
●Retighten the wheel nuts when
the vehicle has been driven for
600 miles (1,000 km) (also in
cases of a flat tire, etc.).
●Do not include the spare tire in
the tire rotation.
●For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire Safety Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet.
1. Wear indicator
2. Location mark
Tire wear and damage
WARNING
●Tires should be periodically in-
spected for wear, cracking, bulg-
ing or objects caught in the tread.
If excessive wear, cracks, bulging
or deep cuts are found, the tire(s)
should be replaced.
●The original tires have built-in
tread wear indicators. When the
wear indicators are visible, the
tire(s) should be replaced.
●Tires degrade with age and use.
Have tires, including the spare,
over 6 years old checked by a
qualified technician because
some tire damage may not be ob-
vious. Replace the tires as neces-
sary to prevent tire failure and
possible personal injury.
●Improper service of the spare tire
may result in serious personal in-
jury. If it is necessary to repair the
spare tire, contact a NISSAN
dealer.
●For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire Safety Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet.
WDI0259
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-39
Information Provided by:
Replacing wheels and tires
When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread
design, speed rating and load carrying capacity
as originally equipped. Recommended types and
sizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of
this manual.
WARNING
●The use of tires other than those recom-
mended or the mixed use of tires of
different brands, construction (bias,
bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns
can adversely affect the ride, braking,
handling, VDC system (if so equipped),
ground clearance, body-to-tire clear-
ance, tire chain clearance, speedom-
eter calibration, headlight aim and
bumper height. Some of these effects
may lead to accidents and could result
in serious personal injury.
●If your vehicle was originally equipped
with 4 tires that were the same size and
you are only replacing 2 of the 4 tires ,
install the new tires on the rear axle.
Placing new tires on the front axle may
cause loss of vehicle control in some
driving conditions and cause an acci-
dent and personal injury.
●If the wheels are changed for any rea-
son, always replace with wheels which
have the same off-set dimension.
Wheels of a different off-set could
cause premature tire wear, degrade ve-
hicle handling characteristics, affect
the VDC system (if so equipped) and/or
interference with the brake
discs/drums. Such interference can
lead to decreased braking efficiency
and/or early brake pad/shoe wear. Re-
fer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Techni-
cal and consumer information” section
of this manual for wheel off-set
dimensions.
●When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, the TPMS (if so equipped)
will not function and the low tire pres-
sure warning light will flash for approxi-
mately 1 minute. The light will remain
on after 1 minute. Contact your NISSAN
dealer as soon as possible for tire re-
placement and/or system resetting.
●Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS (if so
equipped).
●Do not install a damaged or deformed
wheel or tire even if it has been re-
paired. Such wheels or tires could have
structural damage and could fail with-
out warning.
●The use of retread tires is not
recommended.
●For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-
formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-
tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet.
Wheel balance
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling
and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get
out of balance. Therefore, they should be bal-
anced as required.
Wheel balance service should be per-
formed with the wheels off the vehicle.
Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle
could lead to mechanical damage.
●For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-
mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-
formation Booklet.
8-40 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Information Provided by:
Care of wheels
●Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle
to maintain their appearance.
●Clean the inner side of the wheels when the
wheel is changed or the underside of the
vehicle is washed.
●Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing
the wheels.
●Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or
corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of
pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.
●NISSAN recommends waxing the road
wheels to protect against road salt in areas
where it is used during winter.
Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire)
Observe the following precautions if the TEM-
PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used.
Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or
involved in an accident:
WARNING
●The spare tire should be used for emer-
gency use only. It should be replaced
with the standard tire at the first oppor-
tunity to avoid possible tire or differen-
tial damage.
●Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY
USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid
sharp turns and abrupt braking while
driving.
●Periodically check spare tire inflation
pressure. Always keep the pressure of
the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire
at 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar).
●With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare
tire installed do not drive the vehicle at
speeds faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h).
●When driving on roads covered with
snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire should be used on the
rear wheels and the original tire used
on the front wheels (drive wheels). Use
tire chains only on the front (original)
tires.
●Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster rate
than the standard tire. Replace the
spare tire as soon as the tread wear
indicators appear.
●Do not use the spare tire on other
vehicles.
●Do not use more than one spare tire at
the same time.
●Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-
RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.
CAUTION
●Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-
RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains
will not fit properly and may cause dam-
age to the vehicle.
●Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire is smaller than the original
tire, ground clearance is reduced. To
avoid damage to the vehicle, do not
drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive
the vehicle through an automatic car
wash since it may get caught.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-41
Information Provided by:
MEMO
8-42 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Information Provided by:
9 Technical and consumer information
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants .........9-2
Fuel recommendation . . .........................9-3
Engine oil and oil filter recommendations ..........9-5
Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil
recommendations ..............................9-6
Specifications.....................................9-7
Engine ........................................9-7
Wheels and tires ...............................9-8
Dimensions and weights ........................9-8
When traveling or registering your vehicle in
another country ...................................9-9
Vehicle identification ...............................9-9
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate ..........9-9
Vehicle identification number
(chassis number) ...............................9-9
Engine serial number...........................9-10
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ..........9-10
Emission control information label ...............9-11
Tire and loading information label................9-11
Air conditioner specification label................9-11
Installing front license plate ........................9-12
Vehicle loading information ........................9-12
Terms ........................................9-12
Vehicle load capacity ..........................9-13
Loading tips ..................................9-15
Measurement of weights .......................9-15
Towing a trailer ...................................9-16
Maximum load limits ...........................9-16
Towing load/specification.......................9-19
Towing safety .................................9-19
Flat towing....................................9-23
Uniform tire quality grading ........................9-24
Emission control system warranty ..................9-25
Reporting safety defects (US only) .................9-25
Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test .....9-25
Event Data Recorders (EDR).......................9-26
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . . . 9-27
In the event of a collision .......................9-27
Information Provided by:
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure
described in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Capacity (Approximate) Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
US measure Imp measure Liter
Fuel 14-1/2 gal 12-1/8 gal 55.0 See “Fuel recommendation” later in this section.
Engine oil *7
Drain and Refill
With oil filter change MR20DE 4-1/8 qt 3-3/8 qt 3.9
• Engine oil with API Certification Mark *1
• Viscosity SAE 5W-30 *1
QR25DE 4-1/2 qt 3-3/4 qt 4.3
Without oil filter
change MR20DE 3-7/8 qt 3-1/8 qt 3.6
QR25DE 4-1/4 qt 3-1/2 qt 4.0
Cooling system
With reservoirMR20DE 1-7/8 gal 1-1/2 gal 7.0 50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent
50% Demineralized or distilled water
QR25DE CVT 1-7/8 gal 1-5/8 gal 7.1
M/T 1-7/8 gal 1-1/2 gal 6.9
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 *2
Manual transmission gear oil
MR20DE — — — Genuine NISSAN gear oil (ETL8997B) 75W-80 or equivalent *3
QR25DE — — — Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi
75W-85 or equivalent *4
Brake and clutch fluid Refill to the proper level according to the instructions in
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section *8 Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent
DOT3*5
Multi-purpose grease ———NLGINo.2(Lithium Soap base)
Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — HFC-134a (R-134a) *6
Air conditioning system oil — — — NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or equivalent *6
Windshield-washer fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & An-
tifreeze or equivalent
*1: For further details, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations.”
*2: Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 will damage the CVT, which is not covered by
the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.
*3: If Genuine NISSAN gear oil is not available, API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-80 may be used as a temporary replacement. However, use Genuine NISSAN gear oil as soon as it is
available.
*4: If Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) Muti 75W85 is not available, API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85 may be used as a temporary replacement. However, use Genu-
ine NISSAN gear oil as soon as it is available.
*5: Available in mainland USA through your NISSAN dealer.
*6: For further details, see “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations.”
*7: For further details, see “Engine Oil” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
*8: See your NISSAN dealer for service.
CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED
FUEL/LUBRICANTS
9-2 Technical and consumer information
Information Provided by:
FUEL RECOMMENDATION
MR20DE and QR25DE engine except Spec-V
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane
rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-
ber (Research octane number 91).
QR25DE engine Spec-V only
Use unleaded premium gasoline with an octane
rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-
ber (Research octane number 96).
If unleaded premium gasoline is not available,
unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating
of at lease 87 AKI (Research octane number 91)
can be used, but only under the following precau-
tions:
●have the fuel tank filled only partially with
unleaded regular gasoline, and fill up with
unleaded premium as soon as possible.
●avoid full throttle driving and abrupt accel-
eration.
However, for maximum vehicle perfor-
mance, the use of unleaded premium gaso-
line is recommended.
CAUTION
●Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission
control system, and may also affect the
warranty coverage.
●Under no circumstances should a
leaded gasoline be used, because this
will damage the three-way catalyst.
●Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is not designed to run on
E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage
the fuel system components and is not
covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-
ited warranty.
Gasoline specifications
NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets
the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifi-
cations where it is available. Many of the automo-
bile manufacturers developed this specification
to improve emission control system and vehicle
performance. Ask your service station manager if
the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.
Reformulated gasoline
Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu-
lated gasolines. These gasolines are specially
designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN
supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-
gests that you use reformulated gasoline when
available.
Gasoline containing oxygenates
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy-
genates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol
with or without advertising their presence.
NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of
which the oxygenate content and the fuel com-
patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily de-
termined. If in doubt, ask your service station
manager.
If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take
the following precautions as the usage of such
fuels may cause vehicle performance problems
and/or fuel system damage.
●The fuel should be unleaded and have
an octane rating no lower than that
recommended for unleaded gasoline.
●If an oxygenate-blend other than
methanol blend is used, it should con-
tain no more than 10% oxygenate.
(MTBE may, however, be added up to
15%.)
Technical and consumer information 9-3
Information Provided by:
●If a methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 5% methanol
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It
should also contain a suitable amount
of appropriate cosolvents and corro-
sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-
lated with appropriate cosolvents and
corrosion inhibitors, such methanol
blends may cause fuel system damage
and/or vehicle performance problems.
At this time, sufficient data is not avail-
able to ensure that all methanol blends
are suitable for use in NISSAN ve-
hicles.
If any driveability problems such as engine stall-
ing and difficult hot-starting are experienced after
using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately
change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a
low blend of MTBE.
Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-
eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can
cause paint damage.
E–85 fuel
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel
ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can
only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do
not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. government
regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing
pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange
and black label with the common abbreviation or
the appropriate percentage for that region.
Aftermarket fuel additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of any
aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injec-
tor cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit
removers, etc.) which are sold commercially.
Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish
or deposit removal may contain active solvents or
similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel
system and engine.
Octane rating tips
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating lower than recommended can cause
persistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Spark
knock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-
vere, this can lead to engine damage. If you
detect a persistent heavy spark knock even
when using gasoline of the stated octane
rating, or if you hear steady spark knock
while holding a steady speed on level
roads, have a NISSAN dealer correct the
condition. Failure to correct the condition
is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN
is not responsible.
Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark
knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may
cause excessive fuel consumption or engine
damage. If any of the above symptoms are en-
countered, have your vehicle checked at a
NISSAN dealer.
However, now and then you may notice
light spark knock for a short time while
accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a
cause for concern, because you get the
greatest fuel benefit when there is light
spark knock for a short time under heavy
engine load.
CAUTION
●Your vehicle is not designed to run on
E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel in a vehicle
not specifically designed for E-85 fuel
can damage fuel system components
and is not covered by the NISSAN new
vehicle limited warranty.
●E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85%
fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded
gasoline.
●U.S. government regulations require
ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-
fied by a small, square, orange and
black label with the common abbrevia-
tion or the appropriate percentage for
that region.
9-4 Technical and consumer information
Information Provided by:
ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER
RECOMMENDATIONS
Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality
and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory
engine life and performance. See “Capacities
and recommended fuel/lubricants” earlier in this
section. NISSAN recommends the use of an
energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel
economy.
Select only engine oils that meet the American
Petroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-
tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval
Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis-
cosity standard. These oils have the API certifica-
tion mark on the front of the container. Oils which
do not have the specified quality label should not
be used as they could cause engine damage.
Oil additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil
additives. The use of an oil additive is not neces-
sary when the proper oil type is used and main-
tenance intervals are followed.
Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been
previously used should not be used.
Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes
with temperature. Because of this, it is important
to select the engine oil viscosity based on the
temperatures at which the vehicle will be oper-
ated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil
viscosity other than that recommended could
cause serious engine damage.
Selecting the correct oil filter
Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a
high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When re-
placing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or its
equivalent for the reason described in “Change
intervals.”
Change intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for your
engine are based on the use of the specified
quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters
that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding
recommended oil and filter change intervals
could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine
caused by improper maintenance or use of incor-
rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not
covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited war-
ranty.
WTI0183
Technical and consumer information 9-5
Information Provided by:
Your engine was filled with a high-quality engine
oil when it was built. You do not have to change
the oil before the first recommended change
interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend
upon how you use your vehicle.
Operation under the following conditions may
require more frequent oil and filter changes:
●repeated short distance driving at cold out-
side temperatures
●driving in dusty conditions
●extensive idling
●towing a trailer
●stop and go commuting
Refer to the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance
Guide” for the maintenance schedule.
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
REFRIGERANT AND OIL
RECOMMENDATIONS
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN
vehicle must be charged with the refriger-
ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the oil, NISSAN
A/C system oil Type S or the exact equiva-
lents.
CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or oil will
cause severe damage to the air condition-
ing system and will require the replace-
ment of all air conditioner system
components.
The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your
NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozone
layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the
earth’s atmosphere, certain government regula-
tions require the recovery and recycling of any
refrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys-
tem service. A NISSAN dealer has the trained
technicians and equipment needed to recover
and recycle your air conditioner system refriger-
ant.
Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air
conditioner system.
9-6 Technical and consumer information
Information Provided by:
ENGINE
Model MR20DE QR25DE
Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC
Cylinder arrangement 4-cylinder, inline 4-cylinder, inline
Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.307 x 3.547 (84.0 x 90.1) 3.5 x 3.9 (89.0 x 100.0)
Displacement cu in (cm
3
) 121.86 (1,997) 151.82 (2,488)
Firing order 1–3–4–2 1–3–4–2
Idle speed
No adjustment is necessary.
M/T
CVT (in “N” position)
Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle
speed)
CO % at idle
Spark plug
PLZKAR6A-11 (all except California mod-
els)
FXE20HR-11 (California models)
DILKAR6A-11
Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1) 0.043 (1.1)
Camshaft operation Timing chain
This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.
SPECIFICATIONS
Technical and consumer information 9-7
Information Provided by:
WHEELS AND TIRES
Wheel type Size Offset in (mm)
Steel 15 x 6.5JJ 1.77 (45)
Aluminum and steel 16 x 6.5JJ 1.77 (45)
Aluminum 17 x 7.0JJ 1.97 (50)
Tire size P205/60R15
P205/55R16
P225/45VR17
P225/45WR17
Spare tire T125/70D16
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Unit: in (mm)
Model MR20DE QR25DE
Overall
length 179.8 (4,567) 180.1 (4,575)
Overall
width 70.5 (1,790) 70.5 (1,790)
Overall
height 59.5 (1,511)
59.1 (1,501)
(MT), 59.5 (1,
511) (CVT)
Front Track
15 X 6.5 and 16 X 6.5
inch wheel 59.8 (1,520) N/A
17 X 7.0 inch wheel N/A 59.5 (1,510)
Rear Track
15 X 6.5 and 16 X 6.5
inch wheel 60.8 (1,544) N/A
17 X 7.0 inch wheel N/A 60.4 (1,534)
Wheelbase 105.7 (2,685) 105.7 (2,685)
Gross ve-
hicle weight
rating
lb (kg)
See the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label” on the center pillar between the driv-
er’s side front and rear doors.
Gross axle
weight rat-
ing
Front lb (kg)
Rear lb (kg)
9-8 Technical and consumer information
Information Provided by:
When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-
hicle in another country, you should first find
out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi-
cle’s engine.
Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low
may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles
must be operated with unleaded gasoline. There-
fore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where
appropriate fuel is not available.
When transferring the registration of your
vehicle to another country, state, province
or district, it may be necessary to modify the
vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis-
sion control and safety standards vary according
to the country, state, province or district; there-
fore, vehicle specifications may differ.
When any vehicle is to be taken into an-
other country, state, province or district
and registered, its modifications, transpor-
tation, and registration are the responsibil-
ity of the user. NISSAN is not responsible
for any inconvenience that may result.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(VIN) PLATE
The vehicle identification number (VIN) plate is
attached as shown. This number is the identifica-
tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle
registration.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(chassis number)
The vehicle identification number is located as
shown.
STI0457 STI0465
WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING
YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER
COUNTRY
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
Technical and consumer information 9-9
Information Provided by:
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
The number is stamped on the engine as shown.
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
CERTIFICATION LABEL
The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification la-
bel is affixed as shown. This label contains valu-
able vehicle information, such as: Gross Vehicle
Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture,
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Review
it carefully.
MR20DE
STI0466
QR25DE
WTI0096 STI0349
9-10 Technical and consumer information
Information Provided by:
EMISSION CONTROL
INFORMATION LABEL
The emission control information label is at-
tached to the underside of the hood as shown.
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION
LABEL
The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. The label is located as
shown.
AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION
LABEL
The air conditioner specification label is affixed to
the underside of the hood as shown.
WTI0188 WTI0174 WTI0198
Technical and consumer information 9-11
Information Provided by:
Use the following steps to mount the front license
plate:
䊊
1Slide the metal mounting clips onto the li-
cense plate holder as indicated.
䊊
2Make holes on the plastic finisher at the
location mark (small dimple) using a 0.31 in
(8 mm) drill. Apply light pressure to the drill.
Install the license plate holder using the two
screws provided with the holder.
䊊
3Mount the license plate using two M6-
14mm bolts.
License plate bolt tightening torque:
3.8 - 4.7 ft-lb (5.10 - 6.37 N·m)
WARNING
●It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In
a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
●Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seat
belts.
●Be sure everyone in your vehicle
is in a seat and using a seat belt
properly.
TERMS
It is important to familiarize yourself with
the following terms before loading your
vehicle:
●Curb Weight (actual weight of your
vehicle) - vehicle weight including:
standard and optional equipment, flu-
ids, emergency tools, and spare tire
assembly. This weight does not in-
clude passengers and cargo.
WTI0187
INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION
9-12 Technical and consumer information
Information Provided by:
●GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb
weight plus the combined weight of
passengers and cargo.
●GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
ing) - maximum total combined
weight of the unloaded vehicle, pas-
sengers, luggage, hitch, trailer
tongue load and any other optional
equipment. This information is lo-
cated on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label.
●GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -
maximum weight (load) limit specified
for the front or rear axle. This informa-
tion is located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label.
●GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
rating) - The maximum total weight
rating of the vehicle, passengers,
cargo, and trailer.
●Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,
Total load capacity - maximum total
weight limit specified of the load
(passengers and cargo) for the ve-
hicle. This is the maximum combined
weight of occupants and cargo that
can be loaded into the vehicle. If the
vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the
trailer tongue weight must be in-
cluded as part of the cargo load. This
information is located on the Tire and
Loading Information label (if so
equipped).
●Cargo capacity - permissible weight
of cargo, the subtracted weight of
occupants from the load limit.
VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
Do not exceed the load limit of your ve-
hicle shown as “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo” on the Tire and
Loading Information label. Do not exceed
the number of occupants shown as
“Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Load-
ing Information label.
To get “the combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo”, add the weight of all
occupants, then add the total luggage
weight. Examples are shown in the follow-
ing illustration.
Technical and consumer information 9-13
Information Provided by:
Steps for determining correct load
limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the avail-
able amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the
XXX amount equals 1400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers
in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capac-
ity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 X 150)
= 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =
300 kg.)
Example
LTI0152
9-14 Technical and consumer information
Information Provided by:
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be trans-
ferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this re-
duces the available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity of your vehicle.
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm
that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.
See “Measurement of Weights” later in
this section.
Also check tires for proper inflation pres-
sures. See the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion label.
LOADING TIPS
●The GVW must not exceed GVWR
or GAWR as specified on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label.
●Do not load the front and rear axle to
the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the
GVWR.
WARNING
●Properly secure all cargo with
ropes or straps to help prevent it
from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the seat-
backs. In a sudden stop or colli-
sion, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
●Do not load your vehicle any
heavier than the GVWR or the
maximum front and rear GAWRs.
If you do, parts of your vehicle
can break, tire damage could oc-
cur, or it can change the way your
vehicle handles. This could result
in loss of control and cause per-
sonal injury.
●Overloading not only can shorten
the life of your vehicle and the
tire, but can also cause unsafe
vehicle handling and longer brak-
ing distances. This may cause a
premature tire failure which
could result in a serious accident
and personal injury. Failures
caused by overloading are not
covered by the vehicle’s
warranty.
MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS
Secure loose items to prevent weight
shifts that could affect the balance of your
vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive
to a scale and weigh the front and the rear
wheels separately to determine axle
loads. Individual axle loads should not ex-
ceed either of the gross axle weight rat-
ings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads
should not exceed the gross vehicle
weight rating (GVWR). These ratings are
given on the vehicle certification label. If
weight ratings are exceeded, move or re-
move items to bring all weights below the
ratings.
Technical and consumer information 9-15
Information Provided by:
WARNING
Overloading or improper loading of a
trailer and its cargo can adversely affect
vehicle handling, braking and perfor-
mance and may lead to accidents.
CAUTION
●Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load
for the first 500 miles (800 km). Your
engine, axle or other parts could be
damaged.
●For the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full
throttle. This helps the engine and other
parts of your vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri-
marily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember
that towing a trailer places additional loads on
your vehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, brak-
ing and other systems.
A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available
on the website at www.nissanusa.com. This
guide includes information on trailer towing ca-
pability and the special equipment required for
proper towing.
MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS
Maximum trailer loads
Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the
value specified in the “Towing
Load/Specification” chart found later in this sec-
tion. The total trailer load equals trailer weight
plus its cargo weight.
●When towing a trailer load of 1,000 lbs.
(454 kg) or more, trailers with a brake
system must be used.
The Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)
equals the combined weight of the towing vehicle
(including passengers and cargo) plus the total
trailer load. Towing loads greater than these or
using improper towing equipment could ad-
versely affect vehicle handling, braking and per-
formance.
The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not
only related to the maximum trailer loads, but also
the places you plan to tow. Tow weights appro-
priate for level highway driving may have to be
reduced for low traction situations (for example,
on slippery boat ramps).
LTI0164
TOWING A TRAILER
9-16 Technical and consumer information
Information Provided by:
Temperature conditions can also affect towing.
For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outside
temperatures on graded roads can affect engine
performance and cause overheating. The engine
protection mode, which helps reduce the chance
of engine damage, could activate and automati-
cally decrease engine power. Vehicle speed may
decrease under high load. Plan your trip carefully
to account for trailer and vehicle load, weather
and road conditions.
WARNING
Overheating can result in reduced engine
power and vehicle speed. The reduced
speed may be lower than other traffic,
which could increase the chance of a col-
lision. Be especially careful when driving.
If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driv-
ing speed, pull to the side of the road in a
safe area. Allow the engine to cool and
return to normal operation. See “If your
vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emer-
gency” section of this manual.
CAUTION
Vehicle damage resulting from improper
towing procedures is not covered by
NISSAN warranties.
Tongue load
Keep the tongue load between 10 - 15 percent of
the total trailer load or use the trailer tongue load
specified by the trailer manufacturer. The tongue
load must be within the maximum tongue load
limits shown in the following “Towing
Load/Specification” chart. If the tongue load be-
comes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow for
proper tongue load.
Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW)/Maximum Gross Axle Weight
(GAW)
The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceed
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label. The GVW equals the combined weight of
the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage,
hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional
equipment. In addition, front or rear GAW must
not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label.
WTI0160 TI1012M
Technical and consumer information 9-17
Information Provided by:
Towing capacities are calculated assuming a
base vehicle with driver and any options required
to achieve the rating. Additional passengers,
cargo and/or optional equipment, such as the
trailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle and
reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity
and trailer tongue load.
The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to
confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, Front
GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined Weight
Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.
All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured
using platform type scales commonly found at
truck stops, highway weigh stations, building
supply centers or salvage yards.
To determine the available payload capacity for
tongue load, use the following procedure.
1. Locate the GVWR on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of
the passengers and cargo that are normally
in the vehicle when towing a trailer.
3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the
GVWR. The remaining amount is the avail-
able maximum tongue load.
To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weigh
your trailer on a scale with all equipment and
cargo, that are normally in the trailer when it is
towed. Make sure the Gross Trailer Weight is not
more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown
on the trailer and is not more than the calculated
available maximum towing capacity.
Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale to
make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear
Gross Axle Weight are not more than Front
Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight
on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to
be moved or removed to meet the specified rat-
ings.
Example:
●Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed
on a scale - including passengers, cargo and
hitch - 3,820 lb. (1732 kg).
●Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) from
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label -
3,920 lb. (1778 kg).
●Maximum Towing Load from “Towing
Load/Specification⬙chart - 1,000 lb. (454
kg).
3,920 lb. (1778 kg) GVWR
– 3,820 lb. (1732 kg) GVW
= 100 lb. (45 kg) Available for tongue
weight
1,000 lb. (454 kg) Capacity available for
towing
100 lb. (45 kg) Available tongue weight
/ 1,000 lb. (454 kg) Available capacity
= 10 % tongue weight
The available towing capacity may be less than
the maximum towing capacity due to the passen-
ger and cargo load in the vehicle.
Remember to keep trailer tongue weight be-
tween 10 - 15% of the trailer weight or within the
trailer tongue load specification recommended
by the trailer manufacturer. If the tongue load
becomes excessive, rearrange the cargo to ob-
tain the proper tongue load. Do not exceed the
maximum tongue weight specification shown in
the “Towing load/specification” chart even if the
calculated available tongue weight is greater
than 15%. If the calculated tongue weight is less
than 10% , reduce the total trailer weight to
match the available tongue weight.
Always verify that available capacities are within
the required ratings.
9-18 Technical and consumer information
Information Provided by:
TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION
TOWING LOAD / SPECIFICATION
UNIT: lb (kg)
MAXIMUM TOWING
LOAD *1 1,000 (454)
MAXIMUM TONGUE
LOAD 100 (45)
*1: The towing capacity values are calculated
assuming a base vehicle with driver and any
options required to achieve the rating. Additional
passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment
will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your
vehicle’s maximum towing capacity.
TOWING SAFETY
Trailer hitch
Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer.
Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to
the vehicle, to help avoid personal injury or prop-
erty damage due to sway caused by crosswinds,
rough road surfaces or passing trucks.
WARNING
Trailer hitch components have specific
weight ratings. Your vehicle may be capable
of towing a trailer heavier than the weight
rating of the hitch components. Never ex-
ceed the weight rating of the hitch compo-
nents. Doing so can cause serious personal
injury or property damage.
Hitch ball
Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weight
rating for your trailer:
●The required hitch ball size is stamped on
most trailer couplers. Most hitch balls also
have the size printed on the top of the ball.
●Choose the proper class hitch ball based on
the trailer weight.
●The diameter of the threaded shank of the
hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount
hole diameter. The hitch ball shank should
be no more than 1/16” smaller than the hole
in the ball mount.
●The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be
long enough to be properly secured to the
ball mount. There should be at least 2
threads showing beyond the lock washer
and nut.
Ball mount
The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount and
the ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver.
Choose a proper class ball mount based on the
trailer weight. Additionally, the ball mount should
be chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with the
ground.
Sway control device
Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buffeting
caused by other vehicles can affect trailer han-
dling. Sway control devices may be used to help
control these affects. If you choose to use one,
contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to make
sure the sway control device will work with the
vehicle, hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake sys-
tem. Follow the instructions provided by the
manufacturer for installing and using the sway
control device.
Class I hitch
Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball
mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers
of a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (909 kg).
You may add Class I trailer hitch equipment that
has a 2,000 lb (909 kg) maximum weight rating to
the vehicle, but your vehicle is only capable of
towing the maximum trailer weights shown in the
Towing Load/Specification chart earlier in this
section.
Technical and consumer information 9-19
Information Provided by:
CAUTION
●Do not use axle-mounted hitches.
●The hitch should not be attached to or
affect the operation of the impact-
absorbing bumper.
●Do not modify the vehicle exhaust sys-
tem, brake system, etc. to install a
trailer hitch.
●To reduce the possibility of additional
damage if your vehicle is struck from
the rear, where practical, remove the
receiver when not in use.
●After the hitch is removed, seal the bolt
holes to prevent exhaust fumes, water
or dust from entering the passenger
compartment.
●Regularly check that all trailer hitch
mounting bolts are securely mounted.
Tire pressures
●When towing a trailer, inflate the ve-
hicle tires to the recommended cold
tire pressure indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
●Trailer tire condition, size, load rating
and proper inflation pressure should
be in accordance with the trailer and
tire manufacturer’s specifications.
Safety chains
Always use suitable safety chains between your
vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains should
be crossed and should be attached to the hitch,
not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to leave
enough slack in the chains to permit turning
corners.
Trailer lights
CAUTION
When splicing into the vehicle electrical
system, a commercially available power-
type module/converter must be used to
provide power for all trailer lighting. This
unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct
power source for all trailer lights while
using the vehicle tail light, stoplight and
turn signal circuits as a signal source. The
module/converter must draw no more
that 15 milliamps from the stop and tail
lamp circuits. Using a module/converter
that exceeds these power requirements
may damage the vehicle’s electrical sys-
tem. See a reputable trailer dealer to ob-
tain the proper equipment and to have it
installed.
Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or
local regulations. For assistance in hooking up
trailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or repu-
table trailer dealer.
Trailer brakes
If your trailer is equipped with a braking system,
make sure it conforms to federal and/or local
regulations and that it is properly installed.
9-20 Technical and consumer information
Information Provided by:
WARNING
Never connect a trailer brake system di-
rectly to the vehicle brake system.
Pre-towing tips
●Be certain your vehicle maintains a level
position when a loaded and/or unloaded
trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it
has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down
condition; check for improper tongue load,
overload, worn suspension or other possible
causes of either condition.
●Always secure items in the trailer to prevent
load shift while driving.
●Keep the cargo load as low as possible in
the trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity
low.
●Load the trailer so approximately 60% of the
trailer load is in the front half and 40% is in
the back half. Also make sure the load is
balanced side to side.
●Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, ve-
hicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, and
trailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach a
trailer to the vehicle.
●Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to
all federal, state or local regulations. If not,
install any mirrors required for towing before
driving the vehicle.
●Determine the overall height of the vehicle
and trailer so the required clearance is
known.
Trailer towing tips
In order to gain skill and an understanding of the
vehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning,
stopping and backing up in an area which is free
from traffic. Steering stability and braking perfor-
mance will be somewhat different than under
normal driving conditions.
●Always secure items in the trailer to prevent
load shift while driving.
●Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or
lock to prevent the coupler from inadvert-
ently becoming unlatched.
●Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.
●Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.
●Always drive your vehicle at a moderate
speed.
●When backing up, hold the bottom of the
steering wheel with one hand. Move your
hand in the direction in which you want the
trailer to go. Make small corrections and
back up slowly. If possible, have someone
guide you when you are backing up.
Always block the wheels on both vehicle and
trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not
recommended; however, if you must do so:
CAUTION
If you move the shift selector to the P
(Park) position before blocking the
wheels and applying the parking brake,
transmission damage could occur.
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
2. Have someone place blocks on the downhill
side of the vehicle and trailer wheels.
3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowly
release the brake pedal until the blocks ab-
sorb the vehicle load.
4. Apply the parking brake.
5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).
6. Turn off the engine.
Technical and consumer information 9-21
Information Provided by:
To drive away:
1. Start the vehicle.
2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into gear.
4. Release the parking brake.
5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are
clear from the blocks.
6. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.
●While going downhill, the weight of the
trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may de-
crease overall stability. Therefore, to main-
tain adequate control, reduce your speed
and shift to a lower gear. Avoid long or
repeated use of the brakes when descend-
ing a hill, as this reduces their effectiveness
and could cause overheating. Shifting to a
lower gear instead provides “engine brak-
ing” and reduces the need to brake as fre-
quently.
●If the engine coolant temperature rises to a
high temperature, refer to “If your vehicle
overheats” in the “In case of emergency”
section of this owner’s manual.
●Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal
circumstances.
●Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s first
500 miles (805 km).
●For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you do
tow, do not drive over 50 MPH (80 km/h).
●Have your vehicle serviced more often than
at intervals specified in the recommended
Maintenance Schedule in the “NISSAN Ser-
vice and Maintenance Guide”.
●When making a turn, your trailer wheels will
be closer to the inside of the turn than your
vehicle wheels. To compensate for this,
make a larger than normal turning radius
during the turn.
●Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely
affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus-
ing vehicle sway. When being passed by
larger vehicles, be prepared for possible
changes in crosswinds that could affect ve-
hicle handling.
Do the following if the trailer begins to sway:
1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to
allow the vehicle to coast and steer as
straight ahead as the road conditions allow.
This combination will help stabilize the ve-
hicle.
– Do not correct trailer sway by steering or
applying the brakes.
2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply the
brakes and pull to the side of the road in a
safe area.
3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is bal-
anced as described earlier in this section.
●Be careful when passing other vehicles.
Passing while towing a trailer requires con-
siderably more distance than normal pass-
ing. Remember, the length of the trailer must
also pass the other vehicle before you can
safely change lanes.
●Use the Tow Mode or downshift the trans-
mission to a lower gear for engine braking
when driving down steep or long hills. This
will help slow the vehicle without applying
the brakes.
●Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long
or too frequently. This could cause the
brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced
braking efficiency.
●Increase your following distance to allow for
greater stopping distances while towing a
trailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
●NISSAN recommends that the cruise con-
trol (if so equipped) not be used while tow-
ing a trailer.
9-22 Technical and consumer information
Information Provided by:
●Some states or provinces have specific
regulations and speed limits for vehicles that
are towing trailers. Obey the local speed
limits.
●Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness con-
nections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50
miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.
●When launching a boat, don’t allow the wa-
ter level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or
rear bumper.
●Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights
before backing the trailer into the water or
the trailer lights may burn out.
When towing a trailer, transmission fluid
should be changed more frequently. For
additional information, see the “Mainte-
nance and do-it-yourself” section earlier in
this manual.
FLAT TOWING
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground is sometimes called flat towing. This
method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle
behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor
home.
CAUTION
●Failure to follow these guidelines can
result in severe transmission damage.
●Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-
ways tow forward, never backward.
●DO NOT tow any continuously variable
transmission vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground (flat towing). Do-
ing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmis-
sion parts due to lack of transmission
lubrication.
●For emergency towing procedures refer
to “Towing recommended by NISSAN”
in the “In case of emergency” section of
this manual.
Continuously Variable Transmission
To tow a vehicle equipped with a continuously
variable transmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly
MUST
be placed under the towed vehicle’s drive
wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer’s
recommendations when using their product.
Manual Transmission
●Always tow with the manual transmission in
Neutral.
●After towing 500 miles (805 km), start and
idle the engine with the transmission in Neu-
tral for two minutes. Failure to idle the engine
after every 500 miles (805 km) of towing
may cause damage to internal transmission
parts.
Technical and consumer information 9-23
Information Provided by:
DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality
Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to these
grades.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
ernment test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times
as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B and C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the
tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea-
sured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and con-
crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Temperature A, B and C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces-
sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-
mance which all passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is es-
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, or excessive loading, ei-
ther separately or in combination, can
cause heat build-up and possible tire
failure.
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
9-24 Technical and consumer information
Information Provided by:
Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following
emission warranties:
For USA
1. Emission Defects Warranty
2. Emissions Performance Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with other
vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information
Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.
If you did not receive a Warranty Information
Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-
ment by writing to:
●Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
For Canada
Emission Control System Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with other
vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information
Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.
If you did not receive a Warranty Information
Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-
ment by writing to:
●Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5
If you believe that your vehicle has a de-
fect which could cause a crash or could
cause injury or death, you should immedi-
ately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addi-
tion to notifying NISSAN.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-
come involved in individual problems be-
tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ve-
hicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-
327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go
to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh
Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
You may notify NISSAN by contacting our
Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at
1-800-NISSAN-1.
Due to legal requirements in some states and
Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be re-
quired to be in what is called the “ready condi-
tion” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of
the emission control system.
The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when it
is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually,
the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary
usage of the vehicle.
If a powertrain system component is repaired or
the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be
reset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking the
I/M test, check the vehicle’s
inspection/maintenance test readiness condi-
tion. Turn the ignition switch ON without starting
the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and then
blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test condition is
“not ready”. If the MIL does not blink after 20
seconds, the I/M test condition is “ready”. If the
MIL indicates the vehicle is in a “not ready” con-
dition, drive the vehicle through the following
pattern to set the vehicle to the ready condition. If
you cannot or do not want to perform the driving
pattern, a NISSAN dealer can conduct it for you.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARRANTY
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (US
only)
READINESS FOR INSPECTION/
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST
Technical and consumer information 9-25
Information Provided by:
WARNING
Always drive the vehicle in a safe and
prudent manner according to traffic con-
ditions and obey all traffic laws.
1. Start the engine when the engine coolant
temperature gauge needle points to C. Al-
low the engine to idle until the gauge needle
points between the C and H (normal oper-
ating temperature).
2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88
km/h), then quickly release the accelerator
pedal completely and keep it released for at
least 10 seconds.
3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for a
moment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of
53 - 60 MPH (86 - 96 km/h) for at least 9
minutes.
4. Stop the vehicle.
5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 km/h)
and maintain the speed for 20 seconds.
6. Repeat steps 4 through 5 at least 10 times.
7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h)
and maintain the speed for at least 3 min-
utes.
8. Stop the vehicle. Place the shift selector in
the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position.
9. Turn the engine off.
10. Repeat steps1-8atleast one more time.
If steps 1 through 7 are interrupted, repeat the
preceding step. Any safe driving mode is accept-
able between steps. Do not stop the engine until
step 7 is completed.
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re-
corder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa-
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understand-
ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR
is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this
vehicle is designed to record such data as:
●How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
●Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
●How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
●How fast the vehicle was traveling.
●Sounds are not recorded.
These data can help provide a better understand-
ing of the circumstances in which crashes and
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by
your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal data
(e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with
the type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)
9-26 Technical and consumer information
Information Provided by:
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-
ment is required and access to the vehicle or the
EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu-
facturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have ac-
cess to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only
be accessed with the consent of the vehicle
owner or lessee or as otherwise required or per-
mitted by law.
A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best
source of service and repair information for your
vehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrations
and step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment pro-
cedures, this manual is the same one used by the
factory-trained technicians working at NISSAN
dealerships. Also available are genuine NISSAN
Owner’s Manuals, and genuine NISSAN Service
and Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.
For USA
For current pricing and availability of genuine
NISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 model
year and later contact:
1-800-450-9491
www.nissan-techinfo.com
For current pricing and availability of genuine
NISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 model
year and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:
1-800-247-5321
For current pricing and availability of genuine
NISSAN Owner’s Manuals for this model year
and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:
1-800-247-5321
For Canada
To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Ser-
vice Manual or Owner’s Manual please contact
your nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num-
ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area
call the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-
387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representa-
tive will assist you.
Also available are genuine NISSAN Service and
Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.
IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION
Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this unlikely
event, there is some important information you
should know.
Many insurance companies routinely authorize
the use of non-genuine collision parts in order to
cut costs, among other reasons.
OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE
MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION
Technical and consumer information 9-27
Information Provided by:
Insist on the use of genuine NISSAN
collision parts!
If you want your vehicle to be restored using parts
made to NISSAN’s original exacting specifica-
tions – if you want to help it to last and hold its
resale value, the solution is simple. Tell your
insurance agent and your repair shop to
only use Genuine NISSAN Collision Parts.
NISSAN does not warrant non-NISSAN parts,
nor does NISSAN’s warranty apply to damage
caused by a non-genuine part.
Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protect
your personal safety, preserve your warranty pro-
tection and maintain the resale value of your
vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, using
Genuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit un-
necessary excess wear and tear expenses at the
end of your lease.
NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones to
minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate the
windshield of your vehicle in an accident. Non-
genuine (imitation) parts may not provide such
built-in safeguards. Also, non-genuine parts of-
ten show premature wear, rust and corrosion.
Why should you take a chance?
In over 40 states, the law says you must be
advised if non-genuine parts are used to repair
your vehicle. And some states have enacted laws
that restrict insurance companies from authoriz-
ing the use of non-genuine collision parts during
the new vehicle warranty. These laws help pro-
tect you, so you can take action to protect your-
self.
It’s your right!
If you should need further information visit us at:
www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or
www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers).
9-28 Technical and consumer information
Information Provided by:
10 Index
A
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)........5-25
Air bag (See supplemental restraint
system) .....................1-43
Air bag system
Front (See supplemental front impact
air bag system) ...............1-50
Side and curtain (See supplemental
side air bag and curtain side-impact
air bag system) ...............1-55
Air bag warning labels .............1-58
Air bag warning light...........1-58, 2-14
Air cleaner housing filter ............8-18
Air conditioner
Air conditioner operation ..........4-18
Air conditioner service ...........4-22
Air conditioner specification label .....9-11
Air conditioner system refrigerant and
oil recommendations .............9-6
Heater and air conditioner controls . . . .4-14
Servicing air conditioner ..........4-22
Air flow charts..................4-19
Alarm system
(See vehicle security system) .........2-17
Anchor point locations .............1-28
Antenna .....................4-61
Anti-lock brake warning light..........2-10
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)........5-25
Armrests .....................1-7
Audible reminders ...............2-16
Audio system ..................4-23
Compact disc (CD)
player ..........4-33, 4-36, 4-42, 4-47
FM/AM radio with compact disc
(CD) player..............4-31, 4-34
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc
(CD) player..............4-38, 4-44
Audio System
iPod姞Player..........4-54, 4-55, 4-57
Audio system
Radio ....................4-23
Steering wheel audio control switch . . .4-60
USB interface ............4-50, 4-52
Automatic
Automatic power window switch .....2-35
Automatic door locks ..............3-6
AUX jack ..........4-33, 4-37, 4-43, 4-49
B
Battery......................8-15
Charge warning light ............2-11
Before starting the engine ...........5-11
Belt (See drive belt) ..............8-16
Block heater
Engine ....................5-29
Bluetooth姞hands-free phone system .....4-62
Booster seats ..................1-39
Brake
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)......5-25
Brake fluid ..................8-13
Brake light (See stop light).........8-29
Brake system ................5-24
Brake warning light .............2-10
Brake wear indicators ........2-16, 8-21
Parking brake operation ..........5-19
Self-adjusting brakes ............8-21
Brakes ......................8-21
Break-in schedule ...............5-22
Brightness control
Instrument panel ..............2-23
Brightness/contrast button ...........4-8
Bulb check/instrument panel..........2-10
Bulb replacement ................8-29
C
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants...................9-2
Car phone or CB radio .............4-62
Cargo net ....................2-32
Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . .9-12
CD care and cleaning .............4-59
CD player
(See audio system) . . . .4-33, 4-36, 4-42, 4-47
Child restraint with top tether strap ......1-28
Child restraints.......1-23, 1-23, 1-24, 1-26
Precautions on child
restraints ........1-24, 1-31, 1-35, 1-39
Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-28
Child safety rear door lock............3-7
Chimes, audible reminders...........2-16
Cleaning exterior and interior ..........7-2
Clock ...............4-32, 4-35, 4-40
Information Provided by:
Clutch
Clutch fluid ..................8-14
C.M.V.S.S. certification label ..........9-10
Cold weather driving ..............5-28
Compact disc (CD)
player ............4-33, 4-36, 4-42, 4-47
Console box ...................2-31
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT). . .5-12
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) fluid ..................8-13
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) .............5-12
Transmission shift selector lock release . .5-16
Control panel buttons ...............4-2
Brightness/contrast button ..........4-8
Enter button ..................4-2
Setting button .................4-5
Controls
Audio controls (steering wheel).......4-60
Heater and air conditioner controls.....4-14
Coolant
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants .................9-2
Changing engine coolant ...........8-9
Checking engine coolant level ........8-8
Engine coolant temperature gauge .....2-7
Corrosion protection ...............7-6
Cruise control ..................5-20
Cup holders ...................2-30
Curtain side-impact air bag system
(See supplemental side air bag and curtain
side-impact air bag system)...........1-55
D
Daytime running light system (Canada only) . .2-23
Defroster switch
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch.....................2-21
Dimensions and weights .............9-8
Dimmer switch for instrument panel ......2-23
Display controls (see control panel buttons) . .4-2
Door locks ..................3-4, 3-5
Door open warning light.............2-11
Drive belt .....................8-16
Driving
Cold weather driving ............5-28
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) .............5-12
Driving with manual transmission ......5-17
Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2
E
Economy -fuel ..................5-22
Emission control information label .......9-11
Emission control system warranty .......9-25
Engine
Before starting the engine..........5-11
Block heater .................5-29
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants .................9-2
Changing engine coolant ...........8-9
Changing engine oil .............8-11
Changing engine oil filter ..........8-12
Checking engine coolant level ........8-8
Checking engine oil level ...........8-9
Engine compartment check locations . . . .8-6
Engine coolant temperature gauge .....2-7
Engine cooling system ............8-8
Engine oil ...................8-9
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . .9-5
Engine oil pressure warning light ......2-11
Engine oil viscosity ..............9-5
Engine serial number ............9-10
Engine specifications .............9-7
Starting the engine .............5-11
Engine oil pressure gauge ............2-7
Enter button ....................4-2
Event data recorders ..............9-26
Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) .........5-2
Eyeglass case ..................2-28
F
Flashers
(See hazard warning flasher switch) ......2-24
Flat tire .......................6-2
Floor mat positioning aid .............7-5
Fluid
Brake fluid ..................8-13
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants .................9-2
Clutch fluid ..................8-14
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) fluid ..................8-13
Engine coolant.................8-8
Engine oil ...................8-9
F.M.V.S.S. certification label...........9-10
Fog light switch .................2-24
Folding rear seat ............1-3, 1-4, 1-5
10-2
Information Provided by:
Front air bag system
(See supplemental restraint system) ......1-50
Front seats .....................1-2
Fuel
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants .................9-2
Fuel economy ................5-22
Fuel gauge ...................2-6
Fuel octane rating ...............9-4
Fuel recommendation .............9-3
Fuel-filler door and cap ...........3-25
Fuel-filler door lock opener lever ......3-25
Fuses .......................8-22
Fusible links ...................8-23
G
Gascap .....................3-25
Gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge .....2-7
Engine oil pressure gauge ..........2-7
Fuel gauge ...................2-6
g-force gauge .................2-6
Odometer ...................2-4
Speedometer .................2-4
Tachometer ..................2-5
Trip computer .................2-4
Trip odometer .................2-4
General maintenance ...............8-2
g-force gauge ...................2-6
Glove box.....................2-31
Glove box lock ..................2-31
Grocery hooks ..................2-33
H
Hands-free phone system, Bluetooth姞.....4-62
Hazard warning flasher switch .........2-24
Headlight and turn signal switch ........2-22
Headlight control switch ............2-22
Headlights ....................8-28
Heated seats ...................2-26
Heater
Heater and air conditioner controls.....4-14
Heater operation ...............4-17
Hood release...................3-23
Horn .......................2-25
I
Ignition switch ...................5-7
Immobilizer system .........2-19, 3-2, 5-10
Important vehicle information label .......9-10
In-cabin microfilter ................8-19
Increasing fuel economy.............5-22
Indicator lights and audible reminders
(See warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders) .....................2-9
Inside mirror ...................3-28
Instrument brightness control ..........2-23
Instrument panel ...............0-6, 2-2
Instrument panel dimmer switch ........2-23
Intelligent Key system
Key operating range .............3-13
Key operation ................3-14
Mechanical key ................3-4
Remote keyless entry operation.......3-17
Troubleshooting guide ............3-22
Warning signals ...............3-22
Interior light....................2-39
Interior trunk lid release .............3-24
iPod姞Player ............4-54, 4-55, 4-57
ISOFIX child restraints .............1-26
J
Jump starting ...................6-8
K
Keyfob battery replacement ...........8-25
Keyless entry
With Intelligent Key system
(See Intelligent Key system).........3-17
Keys, Except Intelligent Key............3-2
L
Labels
Air conditioner specification label .....9-11
C.M.V.S.S. certification label ........9-10
Emission control information label .....9-11
Engine serial number ............9-10
F.M.V.S.S. certification label.........9-10
Tire and Loading Information label .....9-11
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . .9-9
Warning labels (for SRS) ..........1-58
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)
System ......................1-26
License plate
Installing the license plate ..........9-12
10-3
Information Provided by:
Light
Air bag warning light .........1-58, 2-14
Brake light (See stop light) .........8-29
Bulb check/instrument panel ........2-10
Bulb replacement ..............8-29
Charge warning light ............2-11
Fog light switch ...............2-24
Headlight and turn signal switch ......2-22
Headlight control switch ..........2-22
Headlights ..................8-28
Interior light..................2-39
Light bulbs ..................8-28
Low tire pressure warning light .......2-12
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light ......................2-13
Passenger air bag and status light .....1-52
Security indicator light............2-15
Spotlights (See map light) .........2-40
Trunk light ..................2-41
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders ...................2-9
Lights
Map lights ..................2-40
Lock
Child safety rear door lock ..........3-7
Door locks ................3-4, 3-5
Fuel-filler door lock opener lever ......3-25
Glove box lock ................2-31
Power door locks ...............3-6
Trunk lid lock opener lever..........3-24
Low fuel warning light ..............2-12
Low tire pressure warning light .........2-12
Low windshield-washer fluid warning light. . .2-13
Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . .9-12
M
Maintenance
General maintenance .............8-2
Inside the vehicle ...............8-3
Maintenance precautions ...........8-5
Outside the vehicle ..............8-2
Seat belt maintenance............1-22
Under the hood and vehicle .........8-4
Malfunction indicator light ............2-15
Manual front seat adjustment...........1-2
Manual windows .................2-37
Map lights ....................2-40
Map pocket....................2-27
Meters and gauges ................2-3
Instrument brightness control ........2-23
Mirror
Inside mirror .................3-28
Outside mirror control ............3-28
Vanity mirror .................3-27
Moonroof .....................2-37
N
NISSAN Intelligent Key™..........3-3, 3-11
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer
system ................2-19, 3-2, 5-10
O
Octane rating (See fuel octane rating)......9-4
Odometer .....................2-4
Oil
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants .................9-2
Changing engine oil .............8-11
Changing engine oil filter ..........8-12
Checking engine oil level ...........8-9
Engine oil ...................8-9
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . .9-5
Engine oil viscosity ..............9-5
Outside mirror control ..............3-28
Overheat
If your vehicle overheats...........6-11
Owner’s manual order form ...........9-27
Owner’s manual/service manual order
information ....................9-27
P
Parking
Parking brake operation ...........5-19
Parking/parking on hills ...........5-23
Phone, Bluetooth姞hands-free system .....4-62
Power
Power door locks ...............3-6
Power outlet .................2-26
Power rear windows .............2-35
Power steering system ...........5-24
Power windows ...............2-34
Rear power windows ............2-35
Precautions
Maintenance precautions ...........8-5
Precautions on child
restraints.........1-24, 1-31, 1-35, 1-39
Precautions on seat belt usage .......1-13
10-4
Information Provided by:
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system ....................1-43
Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2
Programmable features ..............4-5
Push starting ...................6-10
R
Radio
Car phone or CB radio ...........4-62
FM/AM radio with compact disc
(CD) player ..............4-31, 4-34
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc
(CD) player ..............4-38, 4-44
Steering wheel audio control switch . . . .4-60
Readiness for inspection maintenance
(I/M) test .....................9-25
Rear center seat belt ..............1-19
Rear power windows ..............2-35
Rear seat ................1-3, 1-4, 1-5
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch.......................2-21
RearView Monitor .................4-8
Recorders
Event data ..................9-26
Refrigerant recommendation ...........9-6
Registering your vehicle in another country . . .9-9
Reporting safety defects (US only) .......9-25
S
Safety
Child safety rear door lock ..........3-7
Child seat belts .....1-24, 1-31, 1-35, 1-39
Reporting safety defects (US only) .....9-25
Seat adjustment
Front manual seat adjustment ........1-2
Seat belt
Child safety..................1-23
Infants and small children ..........1-23
Injured Person ................1-16
Larger children ................1-24
Precautions on seat belt usage .......1-13
Pregnant women...............1-16
Rear center seat belt ............1-19
Seat belt extenders .............1-22
Seat belt maintenance............1-22
Seat belts...................1-13
Shoulder belt height adjustment ......1-21
Three-point type with retractor .......1-16
Seat belt warning light..............2-13
Seatback pockets ................2-29
Seats
Adjustment...................1-2
Front seats ...................1-2
Heated seats .................2-26
Manual front seat adjustment.........1-2
Rear seat ..............1-3, 1-4, 1-5
Security indicator light..............2-15
Security system (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer
system), engine start ........2-19, 3-2, 5-10
Self-adjusting brakes ..............8-21
Service manual order form ...........9-27
Servicing air conditioner.............4-22
Setting button ...................4-5
Shift lock release.................5-16
Shifting
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) .....................5-13
Manual transmission .............5-18
Shoulder belt height adjustment ........1-21
Side air bag system (See supplemental
side air bag and curtain side-impact air
bag system) ...................1-55
Spark plug replacement .............8-17
Speedometer ...................2-4
Spotlights (See map light) ...........2-40
SRS warning label ................1-58
Starting
Before starting the engine..........5-11
Jump starting .................6-8
Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2
Push starting .................6-10
Starting the engine .............5-11
Steering
Power steering system ...........5-24
Tilting steering wheel ............3-27
Steering wheel audio control switch ......4-60
Stop light .....................8-29
Storage ......................2-27
Storage bin....................2-28
Storage tray ...................2-28
Sunglasses case.................2-28
Sunglasses holder ................2-28
Sunroof (see Moonroof) .............2-37
Supplemental air bag warning labels ......1-58
Supplemental air bag warning light . . .1-58, 2-14
Supplemental front impact air bag system . . .1-50
Supplemental restraint system
Information and warning labels .......1-58
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system ....................1-43
Supplemental restraint system
(Supplemental air bag system) .........1-43
Supplemental side and curtain side-impact
air bag system ..................1-55
10-5
Information Provided by:
Switch
Automatic power window switch ......2-35
Fog light switch ...............2-24
Hazard warning flasher switch .......2-24
Headlight and turn signal switch ......2-22
Headlight control switch ..........2-22
Ignition switch .................5-7
Power door lock switch ............3-6
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch.....................2-21
Turn signal switch ..............2-24
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off
switch.....................2-25
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-20
T
Tachometer ....................2-5
Temperature gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge .....2-7
Theft (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system),
engine start .............2-19, 3-2, 5-10
Three-way catalyst ................5-2
Tilting steering wheel ..............3-27
Tire
Flat tire .....................6-2
Spare tire ................6-3, 8-41
Tire and Loading Information label .....9-11
Tire chains ..................8-38
Tire placard..................9-11
Tire pressure .................8-31
Tire rotation..................8-38
Types of tires .................8-37
Uniform tire quality grading .........9-24
Wheels and tires...............8-31
Wheel/tire size.................9-8
Tire pressure
Low tire pressure warning light .......2-12
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . .5-3
Top tether strap child restraint .........1-28
Towing
Flat towing ..................9-23
Tow truck towing...............6-12
Towing load/specification ..........9-19
Trailer towing .................9-16
Transmission
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) fluid ..................8-13
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) .............5-12
Driving with manual transmission ......5-17
Selector lock release ............5-16
Travel (See registering your vehicle in another
country) ......................9-9
Trip computer ...................2-4
Trip odometer ...................2-4
Trunk access through the rear seat .....1-4, 1-5
Trunk lid lock opener lever............3-24
Trunk light ....................2-41
Turn signal switch ................2-24
U
Uniform tire quality grading ...........9-24
USB interface
Audio file operation ..........4-50, 4-52
V
Vanity mirror ...................3-27
Vehicle dimensions and weights .........9-8
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch . . .2-25
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system.....5-26
Vehicle identification ...............9-9
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
(Chassis number) .................9-9
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . .9-9
Vehicle loading information ...........9-12
Vehicle recovery .................6-14
Vehicle security system .............2-17
Vehicle security system (NISSAN vehicle
immobilizer system), engine start. .2-19, 3-2, 5-10
Ventilators ....................4-14
W
Warning
Air bag warning light .........1-58, 2-14
Anti-lock brake warning light ........2-10
Battery charge warning light ........2-11
Brake warning light .............2-10
Door open warning light...........2-11
Engine oil pressure warning light ......2-11
Hazard warning flasher switch .......2-24
Low fuel warning light ............2-12
Low tire pressure warning light .......2-12
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light ......................2-13
Passenger air bag and status light .....1-52
Seat belt warning light............2-13
Vehicle security system ...........2-17
10-6
Information Provided by:
Warning labels (for SRS) ..........1-58
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders ...................2-9
Warning lights ...................2-9
Washer switch
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-20
Weights (See dimensions and weights) .....9-8
Wheels and tires.................8-31
Wheel/tire size...................9-8
When traveling or registering your vehicle
in another country .................9-9
Windows
Locking passengers’ windows .......2-35
Manual windows ...............2-37
Power rear windows.............2-35
Power windows ...............2-34
Rear power windows ............2-35
Windshield wiper and washer switch .....2-20
Windshield-washer fluid.............8-14
Wiper
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-20
Wiper blades.................8-20
10-7
Information Provided by:
RECOMMENDED FUEL:
MR20DE and QR25DE engine except Spec-V
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane
rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-
ber (Research octane number 91).
QR25DE engine Spec-V only
Use unleaded premium gasoline with an octane
rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-
ber (Research octane number 96).
If unleaded premium gasoline is not available,
unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating
of at lease 87 AKI (Research octane number 91)
can be used, but only under the following precau-
tions:
●have the fuel tank filled only partially with
unleaded regular gasoline, and fill up with
unleaded premium as soon as possible.
●avoid full throttle driving and abrupt accel-
eration.
However, for maximum vehicle perfor-
mance, the use of unleaded premium gaso-
line is recommended.
CAUTION
●Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission
control system, and may also affect the
warranty coverage.
●Under no circumstances should a
leaded gasoline be used, because this
will damage the three-way catalyst.
●Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is not designed to run on
E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage
the fuel system components and is not
covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-
ited warranty.
For additional information, see “Capacities and
recommended fuel/lubricants in the “Technical
and consumer information” section.
RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL:
●Engine oil with API Certification Mark
●Viscosity SAE 5W-30
See “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations” in
the “Technical and consumer information” sec-
tion of this manual.
COLD TIRE PRESSURE:
See Tire and Loading Information label.
The label is typically located on the driver side
center pillar or on the driver’s door. For additional
information, see “Wheels and tires” in the “Main-
tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE
BREAK-IN PROCEDURE:
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicle
use, follow the recommendations outlined in the
“Break-in schedule” information found in the
“Starting and driving” section of this manual. Fol-
low these recommendations for the future reli-
ability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure
to follow these recommendations may result in
vehicle damage or shortened engine life.
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Information Provided by:
®
2010 SENTRA
OWNER’S MANUAL
For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.
2010 NISSAN SENTRA B16-D
Printing : February 2010
Publication No.: OM0E 0B16U2
Printed in U.S.A. B16-D
Information Provided by:
